Vehicle Manual

_________________________________________________________________________________

Issue Date: February 2026

Release Date: July 2026

Issued by: Mahindra Electric Automobile Limited (hereinafter appearing as “Mahindra”)

NOTE: Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this Vehicle Manual. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please refer to the Vehicle Manual and / or visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance or advice.

Please note that this Vehicle Manual contains a list of all the features available in the BE 6 FE vehicles. However, not all features are enabled in each variant of the BE 6 FE vehicles. Therefore, please refer to only those features which are enabled for the particular variant of the BE 6 FE vehicle purchased by you. For more information on the features available for the variant of BE 6 FE vehicle purchased by you, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Information provided in the Vehicle Manual is explicit at the time of publication. However, as Mahindra continues to make changes and improve products, it reserves the right to make changes in the Vehicle Manual or any product at any time, without notice and without any obligations.

The Vehicle Manual serves as a reference for the safe use and maintenance of your BE 6 FE . It does not grant or imply any warranty or guarantee unless the vehicle is officially sold to a customer and registered as per applicable law and as per Mahindra’s policies. Therefore any mention to ‘warranties / warranty’ or the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide (WSIG)’ in the Vehicle Manual placed in BE 6 FE vehicles or the more detailed Vehicle Manuals does not grant any warranty rights to the recipients of the BE 6 FE Vehicles unless the vehicles are sold to the customers as per applicable law and as per Mahindra’s policies.

Mahindra Electric Automobile Limited., Mahindra Towers, Pandurang Budhkar Marg, Worli, Mumbai, Maharashtra, 400018.

www.mahindraelectricsuv.com

1 General and Safety Information

Introduction to Your Vehicle

Congratulations on choosing a BE 6 FE, a symbol of innovation, sustainability, and the future of mobility. Unlike traditional vehicles, your BE 6 FE is designed from the ground up as an electric vehicle, ensuring that every aspect–from performance to efficiency–reflects the cutting-edge advancements in electric mobility.

Your Born Electric Vehicle is more than just a mode of transportation, it’s a commitment to reducing your carbon footprint without compromising on driving pleasure.

Powered entirely by electricity, it offers zero-emission driving, a quieter and smoother ride, and instant torque for an exhilarating driving experience.

This vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art battery system, advanced regenerative braking, and smart connectivity features that make every drive more efficient and enjoyable.

Whether you’re commuting to work or embarking on a long road trip, your BE 6 FE is engineered to provide a seamless and intuitive experience.

In this manual, you’ll find detailed information on the features and operations of your BE 6 FE, as well as tips on how to maximize its range, charge efficiently, and take full advantage of its technological capabilities. Please note that this manual contains a list of all the features available in the BE 6 FE vehicles. However, not all features are enabled in each variant of the BE 6 FE vehicles. Therefore, please refer to only those features which are enabled for the particular variant of the BE 6 FE vehicle purchased by you. For more information on the features available for the variant of BE 6 FE vehicle purchased by you, contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

This manual along with the Quick Reference Vehicle Manual (together the ‘Vehicle Manual’) serves as a reference for the safe use and maintenance of your BE 6 FE. It does not grant or imply any warranty or guarantee unless the vehicle is officially sold to a customer and registered as per applicable law and as per Mahindra’s policies. Please note Mahindra, including its directors, officers or key managerial personnels, do not carry any liability arising due to any action or inaction, with respect to your vehicle, on your part that may not be in accordance with, or in contradiction of, the Vehicle Manual, WSIG and any other ancillary documents that may be provided to you with your BE 6 FE.

We encourage you to explore the following pages to become familiar with the innovative features that make your BE 6 FE vehicle truly exceptional.

Warranty Disclaimer

Mahindra shall not be liable for any indirect, incidental or consequential damages arising from improper vehicle usage, unauthorized modifications, or failure to adhere to the explanations, warnings and guidelines set out in the Vehicle Manual.

Welcome to the future of driving.

1.1 Safety Symbols

To get a detailed understanding of all the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc. carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ instructions given in this manual.

Legend of the Symbols: To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc, the following symbols are used throughout the manual:

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury and all occupants must evacuate the vehicle immediately.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.

NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle and it’s optimum use, to which particular attention must be paid.

If you see this symbol, it indicates “no”, “do not”, “do not do this”, or “never”.

1.2 INGLO Platform

INGLO is an ‘electric-origin’ Architecture. Unlike many mainstream EVs adapted from traditional combustion-engine designs, INGLO was built exclusively for electric vehicles. This difference fundamentally changes the way the vehicle performs and feels.

INGLO was designed with modularity, scalability, and versatility.

This electric-origin approach also enables us to design one of the lightest skateboard structures in the industry, paired with high-density battery technology. This foundation allows us to optimize every inch of space, enhance stability, and maximize performance, which means you, our customers, will experience a drive that is lighter, more agile, and yet incredibly spacious and comfortable.

1.3 Vehicle Power and Charging Information

Your BE 6 FE is equipped with a high-voltage (HV) battery pack, approximately 409V, which powers the vehicle. The vehicle must be charged before driving, as the battery stores energy needed for operation.

Once the ignition is turned ON, the battery begins to discharge gradually. If the battery charge is depleted completely (0%), the vehicle will not be able to drive until the battery is recharged.

Charging times may vary based on the current state of charge (SOC) of the battery and environmental conditions. For detailed information on how to charge the battery, please refer to the “Charging” section.

Your vehicle features an Integrated Electronic Booster with ABS and ESP, along with regenerative braking for added efficiency.

Your vehicle is eco-friendly and produces no toxic emissions, such as carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, or nitrogen oxide.

Since the electric motor is quiet, you may hear sounds from the tires, wind, and other external sources. During charging, you might also hear noises from the fan, compressor, contactor, and relay.

Always check and ensure enough SOC is available in the HV battery before starting the journey. Verify the same with the help of “State of charge (SOC)” and “Range” values displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID).

It is recommended to let the vehicle reach a full 100% state of charge (SoC) before ending the charging session.

Pay special attention to the pedestrians since there is no engine noise. The pedestrian may not know that the vehicle is approaching or moving or about to move, and can step into the path of vehicle travel.

Virtual Engine Sound Synthesis (VESS) available in the vehicle can be enabled for more safety. Refer “Virtual Engine Sound Synthesis (VESS)” content for more details.

For preventing damage to the HV battery pack:

•

Never allow the HV battery to be fully discharged.

•

Discharging the HV battery to 0% may cause damage to vehicle components. Persistent deep discharges can cause permanent battery degradation.

•

Do not leave the vehicle at 100% SOC for prolonged periods, as it may reduce battery longevity.

•

Always charge in a well ventilated area, away from flammable materials.

•

Do not use the Battery as a stationary power source. This will void the warranty.

•

Do not expose the vehicle to very high or freezing temperatures for longer duration.

•

Do not use High-Voltage (HV) battery for any other purpose, consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center or manufacturer for help.

If you let the battery discharge to 0%, other components may be damaged or need to be replaced (Ex: Low voltage battery).

In these cases, you are liable for repair and/or transportation costs.

The warranty does not cover discharge-related expenses.

BE 6 FE uses high voltage and current. Failure to follow the proper handling instructions may cause serious injury or death.

BE 6 FE cannot be push started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause internal power train/ motor damage.

BE 6 FE uses high voltage systems, these systems may be hot during charging and driving, also sometimes in shut off condition. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature. Obey the labels that are attached to the vehicle.

Never disassemble, remove or replace high-voltage parts and cables as well as their connectors. High voltage cables are colored orange.

Connecting unauthorized electrical accessories is not recommended.

Disassembling, removing or replacing HV components or cables can cause severe burns or electric shock that may result in serious injury or death. The vehicle high voltage system has no user serviceable parts. Take your vehicle to the Authorized Mahindra Service Center for any necessary maintenance/repair.

•

Ensure to apply the parking brake before turning off the ignition and take the key out of the vehicle before leaving.

•

Always engage the parking brake before getting out of the vehicle.

•

Strictly do not allow untrained / non designated people to access EV system and appraise first responders that this vehicle is an Electric Vehicle, in case of any kind of unexpected incident / events.

•

The vehicle will not run with completely discharged battery. At low SOC avoid continuous and (frequent acceleration and deceleration) this will result in higher energy consumption. Try to maintain a steady speed with moderate acceleration for getting the maximum efficiency.

•

Driving in down gradient, when accelerator pedal is released, regenerative braking will provide some energy to recharge battery pack and simultaneously assists in deceleration.

•

You may hear some sounds and feel vibrations during the drive this is normal:

–

Traction motor makes lighter sound during its operation, also will be higher in deceleration of vehicle.

–

The HV contactor produces a ‘tak’ noise when the vehicle is switched ON or OFF.

–

AC compressor makes sound while in operation.

•

If the ambient temperature is between –10 °C to 0 °C, there will be a considerable increase in charging time, also performance drop during drive.

•

The Performance of battery will decrease with time and usage. This does not indicate any defect in the battery pack.

•

Once the HV battery pack has reached its end of life, its charge holding capacity reaches below specific level, it may require an inspection from Authorized Mahindra Service Center and may require battery pack replacement.

•

It is recommended and mandatory that during the process of battery or vehicle / components disposal, the owner should contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for guidance and information on recycling or proper disposal without causing any environmental pollution.

If the vehicle cannot be assessed for extent of damage, do not touch vehicle and contact nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center or the customer care executive for Mahindra support.

Don’t carry out any welding work on vehicle outside Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Any repair, servicing, or modification outside Authorized Mahindra Service Centers may void your warranty for those affected systems.

1.4 Additional Safety Precautions

In BE 6 FE “Drive enable” does not get activated and vehicle will not move unless charge gun is unplugged from charge port.

It is recommended to apply park brake before switching OFF the ignition and before leaving the vehicle.

The vehicle should be driven within 20 km/h speed on speed breakers and rough roads to avoid damage to the battery pack under the vehicle.

Tyres used in the vehicle are tubeless, designed for all weather conditions. They provide the best driving range with improved road grip.

In case of vehicle shutdown contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

1.5 End Of Life - Disposal

As this is an electric vehicle, many electric and electronic parts are used in its system. It should be disposed without causing pollution to the environment.

Your vehicle contains a sealed LFP Blade type high voltage battery. If the battery is disposed improperly, there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in serious injury or death and there is also a risk of environmental damage.

Composition

BE 6 FE is made from Steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, Other plastics, Glass, Rubber and miscellaneous components. Some of these component are reusable by recycling while others are hazardous to the environment and living beings Hence, such components are to be disposed of as per local pollution board regulations.

Disposal

•

Since batteries contain chemical compounds and solvents as electrolytes which can be harmful to the environment, they must be disposed of in accordance with local pollution control regulations. Improper disposal may result in legal consequences, environmental harm, or personal injury.

•

Similarly, ABS and other plastic panels and materials should be disposed of through accredited agencies for proper recycling.

•

Most other materials are reusable, so components should be sorted into hazardous and non-hazardous categories and disposed of through accredited recycling agencies. It is recommended to contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for proper disposal.

•

The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting from improper disposal of batteries or other vehicle components. Owners should consult Authorized Mahindra Service Centers for appropriate recycling or disposal services.

The BE 6 FE has a sealed LFP Blade type battery pack. Improper disposal of battery could lead to risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in serious injury or death and also may cause damage to environment.

For more details:

https://www.mahindra.com/sustainability

https://youtu.be/Q5CMl3VcuNU

https://cerorecycling.com/

1.6 General Safety Information and Instructions

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions provided in this manual could result in failure of the vehicle, an accident and/or serious personal injury for which the company assumes no liability.

Carefully read, understand and follow the warnings and instructions given in this manual. This manual is an essential part of the product. Keep it in the vehicles glove box for future reference.

Never use mobile phones or Infotainment while driving. This may take your focus off the road and lead to accidents.

Please be advised that many service and repair tasks require specialized knowledge, tools and experience. General mechanical skill set may not be sufficient to properly service or repair your vehicle with 350 DC volt. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the ability to properly service or repair your vehicle, please contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Examine tyres for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread and check sidewalls for any cuts, cracks, or other signs of wear. The customer should not operate/ attempt to remove the objects but get it checked by the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Always maintain the safety labels affixed to your vehicle in a good legible condition.

All signal lamps, buzzers, shields, guards and other protective safety devices must always remain in place and in good, proper working conditions.

The life span of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its life span. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center. If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace or have the component serviced.

We strongly recommend that you use only genuine parts supplied by Mahindra to ensure the continued performance, safety, and reliability of your vehicle. The use of non-Mahindra parts, modifications, or non-genuine accessories is strictly discouraged, as it may compromise the vehicle’s functionality and safety. Mahindra shall not be liable for any issues, damages, or consequences arising from the use of non-genuine parts, modifications, or unauthorized accessories, and such use will not be covered under warranty.

10.

Never crawl under or never place your hands, feet, be in close proximity to the vehicle or any part of your body under a raised vehicle when it is supported solely by a jack. Mahindra strongly advises against crawling under or being in close proximity to the vehicle when it is lifted off the ground, unless the vehicle is securely supported with jack stands, wheel chocks, and other appropriate safety devices. Always prioritize safety and follow proper procedures when working on or around a raised vehicle.

11.

Never attempt any adjustments to any component while the vehicle is in motion. Always turn off the ignition and keep the vehicle key away before making any adjustments.

12.

The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference, hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. The customer is responsible for any possible tampering with the plates, which will immediately void the warranty.

13.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier.

1.7 To the Users of the Mahindra Vehicle

When driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic of the tyres and there should be no reason for any concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15 km of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked immediately by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

Driving and Alcohol: Your driving ability can be seriously impaired by alcohol even if the blood alcohol level is far below the legal minimum. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Never drink and drive. Drinking and driving may lead to an accident.

Driving and Drugs/Medication

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.

Mobile Phones Warning

Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In exceptional conditions, if use of a mobile phone is necessary, use a hands-free system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even hands-free does not ensure distraction free drive. Please comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles.

Driving Long Distances

When you are driving over long distances, follow these tips so that you have a safe journey:

•

Take breaks at regular intervals.

•

Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely.

•

Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road.

•

Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea.

•

Relax and stay calm.

1.8 Mahindra Genuine Parts

Mahindra uses high quality parts for building vehicles. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that you use only Mahindra genuine parts.

Non-Mahindra parts may effect the vehicle performance and will not be covered under Mahindra warranty.

Any unauthorized modifications or alterations to this vehicle or failure to use appropriate specification and quality spare parts could seriously affect vehicle road worthiness and safety leading to an accident, resulting in serious injury.

1.9 Mahindra Genuine Accessories

A wide selection of quality accessories is available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. These accessories have been specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic appearance.

Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets Mahindra’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the respective accessory warranty.

Consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for detailed information about accessories available for your specific model variant.

For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:

•

The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorized aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for specific weight information.

•

Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended.

•

Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc, may affect the performance of safety systems.

•

Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center they can potentially affect the vehicle performance.

1.10 Vehicle Safety

When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:

•

Always turn OFF the ignition before parking the vehicle.

•

Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors.

•

Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors.

•

Please lock and take the key fob with you.

When Sleeping in Your Vehicle

•

Do not sleep in a parked vehicle with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the parked vehicle and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you may suffocate to death.

Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.

Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to use it.

Only class ‘ABC’ type fire extinguishers to be used. Only Class ‘D’ and Class ‘ABC’ type fire extinguishers to be used.

When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing

When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle to check the safety and drive through carefully. If the vehicle is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help you and move the vehicle to a safe place quickly.

Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorized modifications are made on the vehicle, Mahindra is not liable for repairing the modified parts even during the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered. Additionally, Mahindra shall, in no circumstance whatsoever, be liable for any damage, malfunctions, or safety risks resulting from such unauthorized modifications are not covered under warranty.

•

The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests.

•

These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, it may under-perform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life.

•

Mahindra does not accept liability for any personal injury, death, or vehicle damage resulting from unauthorized modifications or the use of non-approved parts and accessories.

Protecting Our Environment: As responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.

Body Repairs: In the event of a collision involving an electric vehicle, safety is paramount. Avoid contact with high voltage cables (orange colored), damaged battery components or leaking fluids, as these can be toxic or conductive.

Be aware that airbags may deploy even after the vehicle is stationary, and high voltage battery is automatically disconnected in severe collisions to reduce risks. Occupants should exit the vehicle immediately if it is safe to do so and move to a safe distance, avoiding re-entry unless absolutely necessary.

After the collision, notify Roadside Assistance that an electric vehicle is involved, and do not attempt to charge the vehicle until it has been inspected by a qualified Mahindra technician.

Only a flatbed is allowed for towing to prevent further damage, and have the vehicle towed to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

1.11 Disclaimers

1.11.1 Event Data Recorder (EDR)

Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a intrusion, unauthorized entry, etc occurs, no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (for example, name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with person identifying data they routinely acquire during a crash investigation.

1.11.2 Vehicle Telematics

The vehicle is equipped with electronic modules that monitor and record data from various vehicle systems, including the motor, Battery, braking and electrical systems.

The electronic modules record information about various driving and vehicle conditions, including braking, acceleration, trip and other related information regarding your vehicle. These modules also record information about the vehicle’s features such as charging events and status, the enabling/disabling of various systems, diagnostic trouble codes, VIN, speed, direction and location.

The data is stored by the vehicle and may be accessed, used and stored by Mahindra service technicians during vehicle servicing or periodically transmitted to Mahindra wirelessly through the vehicle’s telematics system in compliance with Mahindra’s Privacy Policy.

This data may be used by Mahindra for various purposes, including, but not limited to: providing you with Mahindra telematics services, troubleshooting, evaluation of your vehicle’s quality, functionality and performance, analysis and research by Mahindra and its partners for the improvement and design of our vehicles and systems, to defend Mahindra from legal action, and as otherwise may be required by law or any judicial authority, including any tribunals. In servicing your vehicle, Mahindra can potentially resolve issues remotely simply by reviewing your vehicle’s data log.

Mahindra’s telematics system, wirelessly transmits vehicle information to Mahindra on a periodic basis. The data is used as previously described and helps ensure the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Additional features may use your vehicle’s telematics system and the information provided, including features such as charging reminders, software updates, and remote access to, and control of, various systems of your vehicle.

Mahindra does not disclose the data recorded in your vehicle to any third party except when:

•

An agreement or consent from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained.

•

Officially requested by the police or other judicial authorities.

•

Used as a defense for Mahindra in legal proceedings.

•

Ordered by a court of law including a tribunal.

•

Used for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner or identification information.

•

Disclosed to a Mahindra affiliated company, including their successors or assigns, or our information systems and data management providers.

•

To access the Privacy Policy, please visit www.mahindraelectricsuv.com.

1.11.3 Data Sharing

Note: Although BE 6 FE GPS is associated with driving and operation, as discussed in this document, Mahindra does not record or store vehicle-specific GPS information, except the location where a crash occurred.

Consequently, Mahindra is unable to provide historical information about a vehicle’s location (for example, Mahindra is unable to tell you where parked/traveling at a particular date/time).

To access the Privacy Policy, please visit www.mahindraelectricsuv.com.

1.11.4 Feature Availability Statement

Note: In view of our policy of continuously improving our products, Mahindra reserves the right to make changes or modifications to specifications, designs, features, this manual, or any product at any time, including alterations to the design of the vehicle or its components, without prior notice. Such changes may be implemented without incurring any obligation or liability to incorporate them in vehicles sold prior to the changes. We recommend referring to the Variant Matrix on the official Mahindra website or contacting your nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for the most up-to-date list of features and specifications applicable to your vehicle.

The vehicle’s software and security measures are subject to ongoing development. Similar to computers and mobile device operating systems, the software and security features of the vehicle might also receive updates from time to time.

1.12 Software Update

For the latest software download and install procedure, refer the Vehicle Manual.

2 Overview

2.1 Front Overview

A	Bonnet
B	Front Windshield
C	Mars Roof
D	Outside Rearview Mirror
E	Head Lamp (Low / High)
F	Front Tow Hook
G	Front Camera
H	Turn Indicator / Daytime Running Lamp

2.2 Rear Overview

A	Rear Windshield
B	Tailgate Tail Lamp
C	Rear Turn Indicator / Stop Lamp
D	Reverse Parking Assist Sensors
E	Rear Tow Hook
F	Reverse Lamp
G	Rear Camera

2.3 Interior Overview

A	Side Vents	K	Wireless Charger
B	Passenger Airbag	L	‘P’ Mode Switch
C	Center Vents	M	Intelli Command Centre
D	Center Information Display (CID)	N	Rear Vents
E	Steering - Audio Controls	O	Armrest and Center Console Storage
F	Driver Information Display (DID)	P	Key Fob Slot
G	Steering Wheel	Q	Start/Stop Button
H	Steering - Cruise and DID Controls	R	Shift By Wire Lever
I	Bonnet Open Lever	S	USB Ports
J	Driver Side Switch Bank

2.4 Steering Controls Overview

A	Voice	I	Boost
B	Regen+	J	RESUME
C	Mode	K	Cruise Set +/-
D	Cruise (ON/OFF)	L	Toggle - SEEK Up/Down
E	Regen –	M	Call Disconnect
F	Menu	N	One Pedal
G	Menu Toggle Up / Down	O	Call Connect
H	ENTER	P	Toggle-VOLUME +/- Push-Mute

2.5 Exterior Lamps

2.6 Technical Specifications

ELECTRIC POWER TRAIN SYSTEM
Motor Type	Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (IPMSM)
Maximum Power	210 kW
Maximum Torque	380 Nm
HV Battery Capacity	79 kWh
Nominal Voltage	409 V
Charger	EVSE : 3 kW, Air Cooled
	Wall box : 7.2 kW and 11 kW, Air Cooled
On Board Charger	11 kW, Liquid Cooled
TRANSMISSION
Type	Transmission (Single Speed)
STEERING
Type/Description	Electric Power Steering (EPS)
BRAKES
Brake Type	Hydraulic Brakes with Integrated Electronic Booster assisted with ABS and ESP
Front/Rear	Disc
Parking Brake	Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
SUSPENSION
Type	Front: Independent Suspension with I-LINK technology and Semi-active MacPherson Strut*
	Rear: Independent Suspension with 5 Link and Semi-active shock absorber*
WHEELS & TYRES
Tyre Size	245/55 R19 or 245/50 R20
Temp / Spare Tyre	T135/80/R18
Wheel Rim	8Jx19 or 8Jx20
	Spare wheel: 3.5Jx18
Laden Tyre Pressure	Front and Rear: 36 Psi, Temporary Spare Wheel: 60 Psi
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage	12 V
Battery Rating	55 Ah
* - If Equipped

2.7 Dimensions

Dimensions	mm
Wheel Base	2775
Overall Length	4433
Overall Width	1907
Overall Height	1636
Track Width (Front/Rear)	1635

2.8 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

VIN Plate Location: Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on the VIN Table riveted on to the bottom of the B-Pillar on the driver side. It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VIN Punch Location: VIN number is also punched below the co–driver seat.

Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.

3 Convenience System

3.1 Smart Key Remote

Smart key remote system enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the doors.

You can lock/unlock, tailgate unlock and remote cooling the vehicle using key fob. To do this, you only need carry the key fob with you.

The key fob also includes an emergency keyblade, which allows access to a mechanical key for emergency situations, as when the PKE battery is low.

•

While locking and unlocking the vehicle passively, the distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

•

To prevent relay attacks, store your key fob in an RFID blocking pouch when not in use.

•

Do not leave the key fob inside the vehicle, as it may lead to unintended unlocking or theft.

•

Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves.

•

Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight.

•

Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

•

The key fob can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity.

Never leave the key fob in the vehicle when children are present.

Avoid placing key fobs on top of the wireless charger.

A child could accidentally start the vehicle, activate power windows or other controls, or even move the vehicle, potentially causing injury to bystanders or passengers.

Leaving the key fob inside the vehicle may allow unauthorized access, potentially leading to vehicle theft or unintended vehicle operation. Any damages or losses resulting from failure to secure the key fob properly will not be covered under your warranty.

3.1.1 Remote Key Status LED

LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the Remote lock / unlock / tailgate button input.

3.1.2 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the LOCK button on the key fob for locking and arming the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using key fob.

Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - if any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.

If alarm is in mute condition only the hazard lamps will flash. If alarm to be activated then press lock and unlock button together to unmute the alarm. Now both hazard lamps flash and alarm will work.

3.1.3 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock doors and disarm the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash twice:

if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Front DRL and Tail lamps flash twice (If Equipped):

if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Hazard lamps flash four times along with an alarm:

if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or left open, the hazard lamps will flash 5 times to indicate the same.

If the driver door unlock is enabled through CID, pressing the unlock button on the key fob once will only unlock the driver door.

To unlock all doors, press the unlock button on the key fob again.

3.1.4 Remote Cooling

Your vehicle is equipped with a remote cooling function that can be activated using the key fob. This feature allows you to cool down the interior of the vehicle remotely, which can be especially useful in hot weather.

Press the remote cooling button on the key fob. The vehicle’s cooling system will activate and begin lowering the cabin temperature.

This remote cooling system is designed for added comfort, allowing the vehicle to reach a more comfortable temperature before you enter.

3.1.5 Tailgate Lock / Unlock — Manual

Remote Tailgate lock / Unlock:

Press the Tailgate release button for 1 second on the key fob to unlock the tail door. The hazard lamp flash three times indicating the same.

The tailgate locks and unlocks simultaneously, To open the tailgate, press the button located on the inner side of the tailgate door and lift to open the tailgate.

To close the tailgate, pull the tailgate inner handle and allow it fall on its own weight. The door will be locked automatically.

3.1.6 Tailgate Emergency Release Lever

Your vehicle is equipped with the tailgate emergency release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. If someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, they can use the tailgate emergency release lever to open the tailgate from inside.

Open the cover.

To unlock the tailgate, push the tailgate emergency release lever inside the trim panel to right side.

Push the tailgate to open.

•

Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.

•

For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.

•

Do not allow children to play in luggage compartment. If they open the tailgate with the opening lever abruptly, it may cause a serious personal injury.

•

No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

3.1.7 Remote Function

Auto Locking – All doors will get locked automatically when:

•

All doors are closed properly.

•

Vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h.

Auto Locking on Door Open – Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the autolock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 km/h and further crosses 20 km/h.

Auto Locking on Master Actuator Unlock – Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the autolock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 km/h and further crosses 20 km/h.

Auto Unlocking –Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions;

•

When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR.

•

In the event of a crash (only on Airbag Variants).

Auto Re-locking – Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when:

•

No door status change for 45 second after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE.

Search Function

Press the tailgate button on the RKE 2 times within 2 second to locate the vehicle in a parking lot.

Search alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.

When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 second. In this mode:

•

Pressing any button on the RKE again switches OFF the alarm.

•

Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors.

The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.

3.1.8 Mute / Un-mute Function

The chirps can be muted / un-muted. Press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons together for 3 second to toggle between MUTE/UN-MUTE mode.

Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate un-mute to mute condition. Hazard lamps and chrip will flash once to indicate mute to un-mute.

In the un-muted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps).

In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.

3.1.9 Theft Detent Warning System

Arming of Vehicle:

Once all the doors are closed and locked with remote by pressing lock button, theft detent warning system would get activated.

Theft Detent Trigger:

If any one tries to manipulate the Ignition or manually opens the doors or manually unlocks the doors, theft detent warning system alarm is activated by blinking the turn lamps and blowing burglar horn for 27 second. Once the alarm is triggered, it can be disabled by pressing unlock button on remote or switching on the Ignition by using valid key.

3.1.10 Remote Key Operating Range

Using remote, you can lock / arm or unlock / disarm the vehicle from distances approx 20 m.

If there is reduction in Remote range, please follow the steps below:

Check the distance: The Remote key may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather.

Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the remote key higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of Remote key.

Check the Remote key battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section.

If the Remote key is still not working correctly, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

3.1.11 If Key fob is Lost

If you have lost the programmed Key fob, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for procuring a new smart key.

While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to understand the formalities involved.

If you make your own duplicate key fob, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the vehicle.

If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for de-activating the function of the lost or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorized access using the misplaced key.

Only key fob transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.

3.1.12 Key Fob Limitations

When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, It may be due to Radio Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external source like transformer, Amateur Radio, etc. which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle key fob. This interference may be resulting in RF signal not being received by system controller.

Customer may not get Panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference zone, key fob may start working properly.

If still key fob not working then contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

3.2 Immobilizer System

An immobilizer system is a security feature that prevents a vehicle from being operated by anyone who does not have the correct vehicle key. The immobilizer stops the ignition from turning on or the drive from being enabled unless it recognizes signals from the correct vehicle key. This system is automatically activated when the vehicle is locked using the key fob after the ignition is turned off.

If the immobilizer lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system malfunction. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

When the correct coded key is inside the vehicle and the SSB (Start/Stop Button) is pressed, the system automatically recognizes and authenticates the key. This allows the vehicle ignition to turn on.

Do not modify, remove or disassemble the immobilizer system. Any unauthorized changes or modifications can affect proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.

After the ignition is turned off, the security system will activate when the vehicle is locked using the key fob. If the vehicle is locked and armed with the key fob, and the driver door is opened using the key blade, the system will treat any door switch status change as unauthorized. This will trigger the alarm. To turn off the alarm, press the unlock button on the key fob.

Tampering with or attempting to bypass the immobilizer system using third-party components or unauthorized software may render the vehicle inoperable and could void claims under your warranty. Only a Authorized Mahindra Service Center should service or replace immobilizer components.

3.3 Doors

Doors can be unlocked using the following methods.

•

Using key fob

•

Using Key Blade

Using Key Fob - Press the lock / unlock button on the key fob to activate/de-activate the central door locking system and Lock/unlock the doors.

Lock	Unlock

Using Key Blade – If the key fob battery fails the door can be locked/unlocked manually using key blade.

Refer the key blade removal procedure from key fob to access the key blade.

Accessing driver door key hole

For vehicles equipped with mechanical flush door handle, press the handle once as shown in the figure. Driver door handle pops out.

Once it does, pull it firmly outward, drip it and continue pulling to gain access to the key.

Key barrel for manual door locking/unlocking is available only on the driver door.

For unlocking insert the key blade and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t apply abusive load).

Take out the key to return the handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.

For locking, pull the handle and same time press the door with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes to release mode) insert the key blade and rotate the key anti-clockwise gently.

Take out the key blade and leave the handle to nominal position.

Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.

A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside.

Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle.

Opening the Front Door

•

BE 6 FE comes with the flush outer door handle for front doors, which can be operated manually.

•

After unlocking the doors using key fob (RKE), Push the flush handle once as shown the image, door handle will pop out.

Door handle will return to the original position automatically when the handle is released after opening the door.

Opening the Rear Door

BE 6 FE comes with the integrated flap handle for rear doors, which can be operated manually.

•

To unlock the rear doors, insert your four fingers behind the handle and press it inward, as shown in the image.

Closing the Door from Inside

Pull the door arm from inside as shown in the image.

Opening the Door from Inside

Pull the door strap away from the door and push the door outward to open.

Individual doors can be unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock the door or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.

Lock

Unlock

Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.

3.3.1 Central Locking System

All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked from the driver door.

Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Outside

By using the mechanical key blade:

To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the mechanical key blade, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively in the driver door keyhole.

By using the key fob:

Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.

If any door was unlocked or not closed completely when central locking activated. It will only get locked when the door is completely closed.

Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.

Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Inside

•

Driver Door Switch Bank

Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing CDL button in driver door switch bank.

•

Driver Door Lock Tab

Lock

Unlock

Anti-Lock Out

Master Actuator Lock at Door open (Except Driver Door) — If any door is opened and driver door is in closed condition:

•

Vehicle speed is below 7 km/h - On actuating master actuator lock manually, master actuator will get lock and unlock immediately for the first time. On actuating master actuator lock again, vehicle will get locked.

•

Vehicle speed above 7 km/h - On actuating master actuator lock manually, vehicle will get locked for the first time itself.

If the driver’s door is open, the master actuator lock will not lock the vehicle, even if activated.

3.3.2 Child Safety Rear Door lock

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.

To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.

To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.

A: Activate/Lock

B: De-activate/Unlock

If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.

Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear seat.

3.3.3 Vehicle locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation

If the key fob does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:

Refer to the Vehicle Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical / Electrical Handle) section for more details.

It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorized person.

A maximum of 2 keys can be registered to a vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.

The key fob may not work if any of the following occurs:

•

If the vehicle is close to a radio station, airport, or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the key fob.

•

The key fob is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the key fob could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. Avoid placing the key fob and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

•

Another vehicle key fob is being operated close to your vehicle.

•

Key fob kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the key fob in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected.

•

Keep the key fob away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty. Any damage caused due to mishandling of the key fob, including exposure to excessive heat, magnetic interference, or impact-related breakage, may void your warranty. It is advised to store the key fob in a secure and dry location to prevent unintended failures.

Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in ON will hamper the vehicle security.

Do not hand over the key fob to any unauthorized person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised in doing so.

3.3.4 Remote Battery / Key Blade Removal

Key Blade Removal

To access the key blade follow the below steps:

Use a small flat head screwdriver to open the battery cover.

Once the battery cover is opened, the key blade is available in the back case of the battery cover.

Take out the key blade in the back case.

Battery Specification

Battery Voltage	3V
Battery Capacity	225 mAh
Battery Model Name	CR 2032

Remote Battery Replacement

If the remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the remote battery is weak.

To replace the battery follow the below steps:

Use a small flat head screwdriver to open the battery cover.

Insert a small flat head screwdriver into the battery secure cover and rotate it anti-clockwise to open.

Gently pullout the battery out and discard it.

Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery No. CR 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up.

After inserting the new battery, reverse the opening procedure to close the battery cover.

•

After closing the battery cover, check the remote’s functionality.

Ensure key blade inside battery cover is placed correctly in its position.

While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.

Do not use sharp objects like screw driver, knife or conductive material for battery removal.

Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing and the printed circuit board.

This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two hours and lead to death.

Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep away from children.

If you think that batteries have been swallowed or are stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help immediately.

3.4 Control Switches

The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest/handle and controls and the various functions:

A	Right ORVM Select Switch
B	ORVM Fold/Unfold
C	Driver Door Window Switch
D	Rear Right Window Switch
E	Door Center Locking Switch
F	Power Window Locking Switch
G	Rear Left Window Switch
H	Co–driver Door Window Switch
I	ORVM Adjustment Switch
J	Left ORVM Select Switch

3.4.1 Driver Door Power Window Switch

Power windows can be operated when the ignition is in “ON” position.

The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the driver door window switch on the driver door armrest / handle.

Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided on each of the door trim pads / armrests.

To lower/raise the window glass, press/lift the respective power window switch accordingly.

Do not operate the power windows frequently when the ignition is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.

If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly. In such scenario, customer should wait for 1-2 minute and should not operate the switch during this period. After 2 minute operate the switch.

It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.

Make sure heads, hands, arms or any other body parts or objects are out of the way before operating the power window. Body parts or objects may get caught causing injuries or vehicle damage.

Never use your body parts deliberately to test the anti pinch function. The power window may reverse the direction but there is a risk of injury.

3.4.2 Power Window Lock Switch

The power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of rear passenger window switches.

To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.

To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.

3.4.3 Door Center Locking Switch

The driver can lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.

3.4.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch

This is applicable for driver door only (If Equipped)

Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.

This feature consists of three functions:

•

Auto Up

•

Auto Down

•

Anti-Pinch during Auto Up

Auto UP:

Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.

Auto DOWN:

Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass comes down.

Anti-Pinch during Auto UP (If Equipped):

During auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value more than 100 N, The controller senses the load and reverses the direction of the glass from the point of pinch detection.

Driver door power window can be opened or closed through remote also (If Equipped). Press key fob lock button more than 1 second to close the power window. Press key fob unlock button more than 1 second to open the power window.

Thermal Protection is active for all modes of operation, and once activated up movements are not allowed for 30 second, and down movements are allowed if the window is not stalled in either of the stall positions (top stall/bottom stall).

Thermal Protection is tuned for 16 cycles before 1st activation and inhibition duration is 30 second.

After 30 second thermal protection is de-activated, and the number of cycles available after inhibition is dependent on the idle duration. Right after thermal protection inhibition duration of 30 second 2 cycles are available.

Do not disconnect the vehicle battery while the power window is in operation.

•

Extended Power Window

After turning OFF the ignition, all the doors power windows can be operate for up to 3 minute.

3.5 Hood Opening and Closing

To open the Hood:

Ensure the vehicle is in park mode.

Locate the lever below the steering wheel, on the right side of the driver’s seat.

Pull the lever twice to release the hood.

4. Lift up the hood to fully open.

To Close the Hood:

Step 1:

•

Energetically close the hood down from approximately 50 cm above the closed position using both hands.

•

Maintain continuous pressure with both hands during the closing process to ensure the hood engages on both sides.

•

Verify that the hood is flush with the front bumper grille and fenders if both sides are completely latched.

Step 2:

•

If both latches do not lock in Step 1, lift the hood to reopen it and repeat Step 1 with slightly more force until it locks completely.

Step 3:

•

If any one side of the hood is not locked after Step 1, press firmly on the green-marked area (as shown) of the unlatched side until it locks completely.

Avoid applying pressure on the red-marked areas, as this may cause dents or paint damage to the hood or fender.

Confirm that the hood is fully latched by checking the following:

The hood is flush with the surrounding parts, such as the front spoiler, bumper grille, and side fenders.

The DID does not indicate that the hood is open.

Before opening or closing the hood, ensure the surrounding area is completely clear of people and objects. Failing to do so may result in damage or serious injury.

3.6 Front Frunk Luggage Compartment

The front frunk is designed to carry luggage or goods.

Front Frunk Loading Instructions:

•

The front frunk can carry a maximum load of 45 kg.

•

Ensure the weight is evenly distributed across the entire frunk area.

•

Proper weight distribution is essential to maintaining the vehicle stability and handling.

Never exceed the specified weight limit. Avoid placing items that can shift or move during transit, as this may affect stability and safety.

3.7 Rear Luggage Compartment

The rear trunk can be opened for use as a luggage compartment. For additional storage, the second-row seats can be folded to create more space. To accommodate large objects, fold the second-row seats by pulling the hook located in the middle, accessible from outside the vehicle.

Load limit :

The rear trunk of a vehicle can typically be loaded with minimum amount of weighing goods.

Ensure the weight of the goods is uniformly distributed across the entire trunk area. Proper weight distribution is essential to maintaining the vehicle stability and handling.

Never load the rear trunk beyond the specified weight limit. Exceeding this limit can compromise vehicle handling, stability, and safety.

Avoid overloading the luggage compartment. Ensure all items are securely fastened to prevent shifting during transit. Unstable or improperly secured luggage may pose risks to both the driver and passengers, potentially causing injury or affecting vehicle safety. Additionally, ensure that luggage does not obstruct rearview mirrors, as clear visibility is essential for safe driving and maneuvering.

For seat folding, refer the Seats and Safety chapter for more details.

3.8 Charging - Lid Opening and Closing

To open the charging lid:

•

Press the unlock button on the key fob / mobile app / central door lock (CDL) to unlock the vehicle.

•

Gently press the hatch marking on the charging lid as shown in the image to release and open it.

•

After completion of charging, push on the hatch marking on the charging port lid to close.

Do’s

•

Push on the hatch marking on the charging port lid to open or close.

•

Incase of dust accumulated on the charge port, wipe it with normal soft cloth.

•

Pull the release cable in case of electronic failure. After pulling the release cable, Gently press the marked line on the charging lid to release and open it.

Dont’s

•

Do not press the charging lid other than the hatch marking area to open the lid.

•

Do not wash with water or any chemical in the charger port.

•

Do not try to open force fully the charging lid, if actuator is not functioning.

3.8.1 Charging lid Manual Override

Manual override cable is located on the left-hand side of the rear trim. If unable to Open the Charging lid, follow these steps to open the charging lid door.

Remove the safety cover.

To release the charging lid door when the electrical actuator is not functioning, pull the release cable. By pulling the cable, you can unlock the door to access the charging port without relying on the electrical system.

Gently press the hatch marking on the charging lid as shown in the image to release and open it.

Do not pull the release cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.

3.9 Lamps and Controls

3.9.1 Interior Lamps

Interior lamps comprises of Reading lamps, Map Reading Lamp

These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry.

In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) illuminate when any of the doors are opened. Once all doors are closed, the interior lamps gets switched OFF.

Switches on Roof Console

A	Roof Lamp (LH)	C	Door Auto Mode
B	Roof Lamp (RH)	D	Hazard Lamp

Roof Lamp : The roof console lamps can be Switch ON/OFF with a simple touch.

Also, the lamp goes off once the Lock button in key fob is pressed and the same will be ON again when unlock button on key fob is pressed.

For Auto mode: Auto Mode will be active when switch ‘C’ is in pressed position. In Auto Mode, the roof lamps will turn ON automatically when any of the doors are opened. The roof lamps will also turn OFF automatically after preset time once the doors are closed.

Map Reading Lamp

Map reading lamps are located on the both sides of the roof near the grab handle above the second-row seats.

Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.

SOS calling

The eCall system automatically notifies the emergency services if your vehicle is involved in an accident. You can also call the emergency services manually by pressing the SOS button.

This button should only be used in a real emergency.

3.9.2 Exterior Lamps

Lighting Control Stalk:

The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.

It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF” to switch OFF all lamps.

When selecting each operation, indication will appear in the DID for driver’s information.

i) Turn Signals

A: Turn Signal - Left

B: Turn Signal - Right

Taking a Right Turn:

•

Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The DID arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear and ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right.

After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

Taking a Left Turn :

•

Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The DID arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear and ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left.

•

After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.

Changing Lanes:

The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change.

To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will flash 3 times and stop.

The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.

ii) Parking Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.

The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.

The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must turn OFF and turn ON manually.

Park Lamp Warning Buzzer

A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.

iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function

Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function.

•

Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax.

•

On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances.

•

Any aftermarket sun film or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction.

•

When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognizing the automatic setting.

•

There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour.

iv) Head Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to switch ON the head lamps.

v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam

Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam and lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the DID illuminates indicating high beam option selected.

A	Low Beam
B	High Beam

Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minute.

vi) Head Lamp Flash

Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.

vii) Head Lamp Levelling System

When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.

The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.

To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch. This switch is located on the driver side switch bank. This switch has four positions marked as 0, 1, 2 and 3.

Switch Position	Vehicle Loading Condition
0	Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
1	Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied
2	All seats occupied
3	All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side

Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading condition as advised in the table.

3.9.3 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (If Equipped)

To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the vehicle is in running condition and park lamp switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.

To disable DRL: Whenever the vehicle is in running condition and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode.

If user doesn’t want the DRL / rear park lamp to be ON, it can be disable through CID settings, select App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Exterior >> Lights >> DRL (Enable/Disable).

3.9.4 Hazard Warning Lamp

The hazard warning lamp switch is located on the roof console switch.

Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. The DID turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.

Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.

The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps in operational.

3.9.5 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 second during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where airbags are deployed.

In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minute or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (OFF to ON) or Ignition reset (Ignition OFF and ON).

3.9.6 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor (RLS)

This feature helps to navigate safely from the vehicle to the doorstep or unfamiliar surroundings during poor lighting condition. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 second, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the key fob.

To enable FMH;

•

Ignition transition from ON to OFF.

•

Park lamp is OFF.

•

Ignition key is out.

•

Driver door open within 3 minute from KEY OUT.

•

Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor.

To extend FMH;

•

The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors.

•

Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam.

•

Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 second.

To disable FMH

•

Park lamp transition from OFF to ON.

•

Ignition off to any other state.

•

FMH ON 20 second expires.

•

FMH Max time is 3 minute expires.

With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle is disarmed.

3.9.7 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (If Equipped)

This feature helps to navigate safely from the vehicle to the doorstep or unfamiliar surroundings during poor lighting condition. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 second assisting the passengers to find their way. It will only work if prior to switching off the ignition, the head lamp were ON for a predefined time.

To activate FMH:

•

Switch OFF the parking lamps

•

Remove the ignition key

•

FMH can be activated by pressing lock button in key fob twice. First press locks the vehicle and second press enables head lamp low beam for 20 second.

•

Pressing unlock button in key fob disables FMH feature and unlocks the vehicle.

To extend the FMH feature further for 20 second, press RKE LOCK button once. This FMH extension can be availed for maximum 3 minute from the first activation.

With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE will lock the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

To deactivate FMH:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps.

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position.

•

Press the RKE unlock/lock button once.

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 second and switched OFF automatically.

With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE, the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked, and vehicle disarmed.

3.9.8 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV) (If Equipped)

LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 second helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and comfortably at night.

LMV is activated:

•

Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times.

LMV is de-activated:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps.

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position.

•

Press the RKE lock/unlock button once.

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 second and switched OFF automatically.

To extend the LMV feature further for 20 second, press RKE UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum 3 minute from the first activation.

With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

3.9.9 Carpet Lamp (If Equipped)

The carpet lamp is designed to illuminate the vehicle’s under the floor area, enhancing visibility and convenience, especially in low light conditions.

The function of the carpet lamps provided in the vehicle exterior can be turned OFF and ON using this option.

The carpet lamp in the vehicle can be conﬁgured to project diﬀerent patterns.

The user can switch between the two default patterns provided. Additionally, more patterns can be accessed through the Software Deﬁned Vehicle (SDV) function.

To Activate: The carpet lamp typically turns on automatically when vehicle locked /unlocked or doors are opened or when the cabin light is manually switched on. To Deactivate: The lamp turns off when the doors are closed, or the cabin light is switched off, depending on the settings. The carpet lamp can display in Static and Dynamic patterns to enhance the vehicle’s aesthetics and user experience:
Static Pattern
Good Bye	The Goodbye pattern is a feature designed to provide a visually appealing send-off experience when exiting the vehicle. The pattern is triggered when the vehicle is turned off, the doors are closed, or the vehicle is locked.
Caution	The Caution pattern is a lighting feature designed to alert occupants or passersby to a potential issue or warning state. This will activate when the doors are not fully closed, hazard lights are activated or parking in low visibility or emergency situations for about 20 second.
Low Battery	The Low Battery Pattern is a visual alert designed to notify the user of the low SOC. This will automatically trigger when the vehicle‘s SOC is 15% or lower when locked and unlocked. This pattern takes priority over Welcome/Goodbye lamp.
Dynamic Pattern
Welcome	Activates when the vehicle is unlocked or a door is opened. Provides a welcoming ambiance with soft lighting.
Note: More patterns can be availed based on subscriptions. Carpet lamp pattern may appear blur or distorted on one or both sides. Attempt to clean the dust from the carpet lamp lens using a wet lint free cloth and low-pressure water hose or spray bottle. Replace the light carpet module only if the lens cannot be sufficiently cleaned.

3.9.10 Frunk Lamp (If Equipped)

The front frunk is designed as a storage space located at the front of the vehicle, often illuminated with a lamp that automatically turns on when the hood is opened and off when closed or after a set period to prevent unnecessary battery drain.

3.10 Windshield Wipers

3.10.1 Wiper Control Stalk

The wiper control stalk is located on the left-hand side of the steering wheel, and the driver can operate the front windshield wipers and the rear washer using this control.

When selecting each operation, indication will appear in the DID for driver’s information.

A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)	D: Low Speed (LO)
B: Off	E: High Speed (HI)
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO	F: Rotary Switch

Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.

Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).

Auto Mode (If Equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.

Intermittent (INT) (If Equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.

Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.

High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.

3.10.2 Wipe/Wash

Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.

When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:

After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 second, then the wiper will continue in the Intermittent mode.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 second, then a further single wipe will be performed 5 second after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.

The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.

3.10.3 AUTO Wash

When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield for 2 second. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times.

After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 second and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times.

AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.

3.10.4 Windshield Washer Jet

There are two nozzles are located in the hood inner panel.

Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.

3.11 Mirrors

3.11.1 Interior Rear View Mirror (IRVM)

Auto Dimming

IRVM	Front Sensor

The auto-dimming inside rearview mirror (IRVM) is a great feature for reducing glare from the headlights of vehicles behind the driver. It’s making night driving safer and more comfortable. The auto-dimming can be enabled/disabled in the CID screen.

Auto Dimming setting path in the below:

App Drawer >>My Vehicle >> Exterior >> Mirrors >> Auto Dimming IRVM (Enable/Disable).

•

Under the following conditions, auto dimming function may not operate properly.

•

When the rear vehicle’s head lamp is not beamed directly to the inside rearview mirror’s sensor.

•

When the rear window has a dark tinted glass.

•

When the gear selector lever is in the R position, auto dimming function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview.

•

For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.

•

The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor.

•

For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.

•

If front sensor is blocked /hide by sticker or object, auto dimming may enable in day time and visibility will be poor.

3.11.2 Electric Adjustable ORVM

The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door trim/handle. The switches on it can be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.

ORVM Folding/Unfolding

Fold Function: To fold ORVM assembly, When the ignition is on, press the button once to fold the mirrors and press it again to unfold them.

ORVM folds automatically when:

•

The mirror is already unfold condition and the doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle.

Unfold Function: To unfold the ORVM assembly, select the respective side switch (R or L), then press mirror fold switch to fold ORVM when ignition is in ON condition.

ORVM unfolds automatically when:

•

Mirror is already in folded condition and IGN is turned ON.

ORVM memory functions and settings are connected with seat chapter.

3.12 Horn

The horn is integrated into the driver airbag section of the steering wheel. Use it appropriately when necessary.

Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn. The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.

Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed.

It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 second of continuously pressing.

If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 second, Horn will get deactivate after 10 second.

The horn may activate if the haptic switches or control wing buttons on the driver airbag module are pressed with excessive force beyond the recommended level. Use gentle pressure to operate these switches to avoid unintentional horn activation.

3.13 Microphone

The microphone is located on the roof above driver side as shown in the image.

The microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone to the system.

3.14 Storage Compartments

3.14.1 Glove Box/Tab Holder

Glove Box: The glove box is located on the Left side of Instrument panel. To open the lid gently press the push button.

To close the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.

It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with the Vehicle’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when needed.

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box Lid should be kept closed when the vehicle is in motion.

Glove Box Lamp : This lamp is located inside the Glove box below the TAB Holder. It will get switched ON when Glove box is opened and switch OFF when it is closed.

Do not use excessive force while closing the glove box.

Always shut the glove box door after use, as an open glove box can pose a serious risk there by potentially injuring a passenger in a crash even if they’re wearing a seat belt.

Digital video recorder (DVR) (If Equipped)

A DVR port is a connection interface on a digital video recorder (DVR) that allows users to connect devices and access video streams efficiently. It is located inside the glove box.

3.14.2 Console Storage

You can use the console storage below the arm rest in between driver and the passenger.

To open the console storage press the knob in the front and lift up the lid. Devices with up to 25.4 cm screen size can be stored inside console storage.

Cooler - Air vents

Cooler (air vents) is provided in the Console Storage. You can cool cans, small bottles, etc. by opening the air vents. Turn the cooler clockwise to open the air vents, or anti-clockwise to close the air vents.

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.

Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and cause a fire.

Only sealed cans/bottles to be stored in the cooler. Any spilled beverage can damage the interior trim and electrical components/cooler.

3.14.3 Cup Holder and Armrest

The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid.

Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.

Be cautious while using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

3.14.4 Bottle Holder

Bottle holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc.

Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.

3.14.5 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket

The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.

To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back pockets.

3.15 Sun Visor

Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or side windows. It is available on both driver and co-driver side.
To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.

Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or blocking your view.
Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in moving.

3.15.1 Vanity Mirror and Lamp

Vanity mirror is in the sun visor.

Swing the sun visor down and slide the cover to open and close the vanity mirror.

Lamp above the sun visor will be ON once you slide and open the vanity mirror.

Lamp will not illuminate if arm is not correctly locked in the sun visor.

Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.

3.16 Grab Handle and Coat Hook

Grab Handle: Foldable grab handles are provided above the front (passenger only) and second row outboard seats.

Coat Hook: The second-row outboard passenger seats grab handles features a coat hook for hanging your coat, shirts, etc.

Hanging excess/bulky weight/items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to the passengers. Hang light weight articles only.

3.17 Roof Console Switches

A	Roof Lamp Door Auto Mode	D	SOS Calling
B	Hazard Switch	E	Mars Roof Rollo Shade Switch (If Equipped)
C	360° Camera	F	Airbag ON/OFF Indication

When Passenger Air Bag is enabled/activated through the DID, then the ‘PAB OFF’ indicator light will turn off.

3.18 Driver Side Switch Bank

Driver side switch bank is located on the right side instrument panel below the right-side AC air vents.

The following switches are available in the driver side switch bank:

A	Charge Port Lid Open	D	HDC
B	VESS	E	AUTO HOLD
C	ESC OFF	F	FPAS Chime ON/OFF

3.19 Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC)

Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) is located on the centre console near the gear shift lever.

It is used to control the infotainment screen.

A	Climate Control	D	My Vehicle
B	Rotary Knob	E	Enter/OK
C	Home/Back	F	Volume Control

Climate Control: Press the climate control button and use the knob to modify the climate setting.

Volume: Press the volume control button to adjust the volume using the ICC knob clockwise or anti clockwise.

My vehicle : Press the my vehicle button to open the my vehicle apps, to use the knob to select the required functions.

Home/Back: Press the Home/Back Button to navigate to the home screen.

Rotary Knob: A rotary knob can indeed rotate clockwise and counterclockwise. Also, it can move in other directions, such as up/down and left/right.

Enter/OK: Can select and enter the required options.

3.20 Mars Roof

To enhance the driving experience and make it more enjoyable, slide open the power sunshade to let natural light and sunshine fill the cabin through the MARS Roof, creating a bright and uplifting atmosphere inside the vehicle.

3.20.1 Controls and Functions

MARS Roof control switch is located on the roof console.

Switch Position	Switch Press	Operation
1	Short Press	Power Sunshade Express Close
1	Long Press	Power Sunshade Manual Close
2	Short Press	Power Sunshade Express Open
2	Long Press	Power Sunshade Manual Open
0	—	Switch Home/Neutral Position

Home/Neutral position of the switch position is 0. To operate the Sunshade, Pull or Push the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes to home position automatically.

You must switch ON the ignition to operate the power sunshade.

3.20.2 Power Sunshade Open

Push the switch to position (2) for Power Sunshade Express (one touch) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.

3.20.3 Power Sunshade Close

Pull the switch to position (1) for Power Sunshade Express (one touch) Close to close Power Sunshade completely. Manual (long press) Close to stop at desired position.

3.20.4 Anti Pinch Function

If the power sunshade senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction and stop at a certain position.

The anti-pinch function may not work if any thin or soft object is caught between the power sunshade sliding.

Make sure heads, hands, arms or any other body parts or objects are out of the way before operating the Power sunshade. Body parts or objects may get caught causing injuries or vehicle damage.

Never use your body parts deliberately to test the anti pinch function. The power sunshade may reverse the direction but there is a risk of injury.

Do not continue to push/hold the switch after the power sunshade is fully open or closed. Doing this could damage the motor.

Do not Push or Pull the power sunshade by hand, doing this could damage the sunshade or resulting in malfunction.

Wrinkles formed on the power sunshade are normal due to material characteristics.

3.21 Steering

Your vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS). EPS system provides an external assist, so that the driver can easily rotate the steering wheel without much effort. The power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

Continued operation with reduced power steering performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering problem is noticed.

Keep both hands especially your thumbs on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Do not hold the steering wheel spokes.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

•

Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s).

•

Uneven vehicle loading.

•

High crown in the centre of the road.

•

High crosswinds.

•

Wheels out of alignment.

•

Wheels out of balance.

•

Loose or worn suspension components.

3.21.1 Tilt / Telescopic Steering

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both tilt and telescopic as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.

To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:

Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.

Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.

Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering.

Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

3.22 Steering Controls Overview

A	Volume Toggle: + (Increase) / - (Decrease) / Push (Mute)
B	Voice
C	Mode
D	Toggle: Seek Up/Down
E	Call Connect
F	Call Disconnect

Mode: Press Mode button to toggle between FM, AM, Hard Drive, Alexa, USB, Bluetooth, Ganna, and Amazon Music.

•

USB MODE - Press the seek button ‘UP’ / ‘DOWN’ moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video playing.

•

TUNER MODE - Press the seek ‘UP’ / ‘DOWN’ button briefly: Manual Search, moves to selected channel. Press and hold the seek button ‘UP’ / ‘DOWN’ for 2 second to AUTO Search.

VOLUME CONTROL: Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or decrease the volume.

MUTE: Press MUTE button to mute audio while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode.

Call Connect: Press to accept incoming call to the paired BT phone.

Call Dis Connect:

•

Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone.

•

Press to activate Alexa or OK Google or Siri voice assistant.

Voice: Press to activate the Voice recognition.

4 Phone as key (If Equipped)

The Mahindra phone as key is a secure, contactless solution that allows drivers to unlock, lock, and start their vehicles using compatible Android devices r NFC card, replacing keyfobs.

Phone as key is powered by NFC and is compliant with CCC. It securely stores key data in your phone’s Secure Element, ensuring safety and convenience.

Users can set up phone as key easily via the Me4U app, using supported Google and Samsung devices (Android 13 and above) with NFC support.

Owner’s can share their phone as key with up to 15 phones of family members or friends through a secure link.

Shared key can be revoked by the Owner through Samsung / Google Wallet, vehicle’s Center Information Display or Me4U app.

Whenever the vehicle is accessed using phone as key or an NFC Card, ensure that the phone as key or NFC Card is with the driver before switching off the ignition, as it will be required again to restart the vehicle or to lock it.

4.1 To lock/unlock the vehicle using phone as key:

Users can hold their paired device's NFC touch point against driver doors flush handle to lock / unlock the vehicle.

Android device's NFC touch position may vary depending on the models. kindly refer device manual for NFC position.

Android	NFC Card

4.2 To start the vehicle using phone as key:

Place the paired device on the vehicle's wireless charging pad (Right side) press the SSS to turn ON the ignition and again press the SSS & brake to start the vehicle.

Android	NFC Card

4.3 Phone as key (NFC) Compatible Device List

Any one of the below mentioned devices should be used for both owner and shared key paring.

Compatible Samsung devices:

Galaxy S20 series (excluding S20 FE), Note20 series, S21 series (including S21 FE), S22 series, S23 series (including S23 FE), S24 series (including S24 FE), S25 series (including S25 FE), S26 series, Z Flip 5G, Z Flip3, Z Flip4, Z Flip5, Z Flip6, Z Flip7, Z Flip7 FE, Z Fold2, Z Fold3, Z Fold4, Z Fold5, Z Fold6, Z Fold7, XCover7 Pro with Android 13 or newer

Compatible Google devices:

Google Pixel 10 series / 9 series / 8 series / 7 series / 6 series / Fold with Android 13 or newer

Check your device specification on manufacturers website before using any devices.

Phone and Wallet app should be updated to latest version.

4.4 Owner’s phone as key Pairing configuration

To setup phone as key, pairing configuration should be done through Me4U application.

Follow steps 1-4 if using the Me4U application for the first time or if profile set-up is not yet completed. If the user is already using Me4U application skip directly to step 5.

1. Download and install the Me4U applicable from play store sing the following URL:

Android :https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.mahindra.inglo&hl=en_IN.

2. If using the app for the first time, enter the KYC registered mobile number.

3. Enter the OTP and verify the account.

4. Set password, PIN and profile details.

5. Tap on the hamburger menu, select 'NFC Key'.

6. Tap on 'Set up phone as key'.

7.Verification of mobile number and email is required to pair the digital key. (The mobile number is auto fetched from KYC records. A new email ID can be entered if needed; However, it will replace the email ID registered in KYC records).

8. Enter the received OTP and tap on verify.

9. After successful verification, NFC Key screen displays, prerequisites screen

10. Enable the consent check box and tap on 'Proceed'.

11. As per the prerequisites,

a. Go to the vehicle and turn ON the ignition.

b. Place both the key fobs on the centre console.

c. Ensure both the Owner pairing mobile and vehicle are having good network.

12. Me4U screen then displays configuring complete screen, simultaneously a mail will be received from Mahindra mobiity services to the email id entered for verification.

4.5 Owner’s phone as key Pairing

Pairing can be done only after successful completion of phone as key configuration. Pairing can be done in 3 methods,

1. Pairing through Me4U application.

2. Pairing through mail form Mahindra mobility service.

3. Pairing through Center Information Display screen

4.5.1 Pairing through Me4U application

1. To pair phone as key through Me4U application Pairing configuration should be completed.

Please verify whether your device is listed in compatible device list and its Android version is 13 and above for Samsung and Pixel devices prior to starting the pairing procedure.

2. After successful configuration, click on start paring in Me4U app.

3. It will auto open the mobile specific, Samsung Wallet, Google Wallet.
Samsung Wallet	Google Wallet

4. Place your device in vehicles NFC pad (right side wireless charger).

5. In vehicles Center Information Display screen, go to App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Interior >> Convenience >> Manage NFC device.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

6. Tap on Add NFC device and select Owner’s phone under it.

7. Ensure the listed prerequisites are satisfied and tap on proceed in the following screens.

Ensure good network in the Owner phone and vehicle.

Ensure the phone is placed properly on the wireless charging pad aligning to the NFC antenna.

Phone needs to be in unlocked state.

Do not remove the phone from wireless charging pad.

8. If you are using Samsung smartphone, tap start in the Samsung wallet and follow the on-screen instructions.

9. If you are using Google smartphone, the following screen flow will begin. You can rename the owner's key using Change name option displayed on the screen.

10 When key pairing is in progress, the Center Information Display displays progress screens and shows a success message upon successful key pairing.

11.Similarly, Me4U will display the added owner’s phone as key.

4.5.2 Pairing through mail form Mahindra mobility service

1. After successful pairing configuration, a email will be received into the verified emails inbox, tap on the attached secure link to start phone as key paring.

Please verify whether your device is listed in compatible device list and its Android version is 13 and above for Samsung and Pixel devices prior to starting the pairing procedure.

2. It will auto open the mobile specific, Samsung Wallet, Google Wallet Refer to Pairing through the Me4U Application Section and follow the instructions.
Samsung Wallet	Google Wallet

4.5.3 Pairing through Center Information Display screen

1. To pair phone as key through Center Information Display, pairing configuration should be completed.

2. After successful configuration, In vehicles Center Information Display screen, go to App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Interior >> Convenience >> Manage NFC device.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

3. Tap on Add NFC device and select Owner’s phone under it.

4. Ensure the listed prerequisites are satisfied and tap on proceed in the following screens.

Ensure good network in the Owner phone and vehicle.

Ensure the phone is placed properly on the wireless charging pad aligning to the NFC antenna.

Do not lock the phone/remove it from the wireless charger pad and neither click on the cancel icon on Center Information Display screen.

5. Place your device in vehicles NFC pad (Right side wireless charger).

6. Device will open its respective Wallet app and will ask for validation code, enter the 8-digit validation code received in email after completing the phone as key configuration.

7. If you are using Samsung smartphone, tap start in the Samsung wallet and follow the on-screen instructions.

8. If you are using Google smartphone, the following screen flow will begin. You can rename the owner's key using Change name option displayed on the screen.

9. When key pairing is in progress, the Center Information Display displays progress screens and shows a success message upon successful key pairing.

4.5.4 Enable / Disable device Authentication

The phone as key can't be used if device is switched off with verification required option turned ON in Android device.

Samsung / Google

In Compatible samsung and pixel devices by default, the user can lock, unlock, or start the vehicle using phone as key without unlocking their device. if the user wants to enable a device authentication it can be done by enabling verification required toggle bar available in their respective Wallet app.

Samsung	Google

4.6 Phone as key Sharing

The owner can securely share vehicle access with up to 15 friends or family members using the supported wallet application. This feature enables the owner to provide digital access without the need for a physical key. Vehicle access can be shared with trusted users and managed directly through the wallet and the mobile application. The owner may assign restricted access or revoke shared access at any time, ensuring convenience, flexibility, and enhanced security.

Please verify whether your device is listed in compatible device list and its Android version is 13 and above for Samsung and Pixel devices prior to starting the pairing procedure.

Share vehicle access only with trusted people.

4.6.1 Phone as key sharing through Samsung Wallet

Tap on the share icon in Samsung wallet.

The user can share the key through two methods using Samsung Wallet.

i. Quick share using QR code

ii. Set options and share

i. Quick share using QR code:

1. Select quick share using QR code, Wallet app will ask for smartphone authentication enter the device password.

2. QR code will be displayed with default key name and settings, receiver can directly scan the displayed QR to add the shared key.

ii. Set options and share:

1. Select ‘Set options and share’, Wallet app will ask for device authentication, enter the device password.

2.User can enable security code for key activation and under access type owner can limit the key function to lock / unlock or full access based on his preference.

3. Owner can set name to the shared key which can’t be changed by shared user or owner after activation. Select ‘Send Key’ and choose any messaging application to share the invite link.

4. Active shared keys can be viewed under Manage shared keys section of both Me4U and Samsung wallet.

4.6.2 Phone as key sharing through Google Wallet

1. Tap on share car key in google wallet, Wallet will ask for device authentication, enter the device password.

2. If required enable key activation code and Choose access level between no restriction and access only based on the requirement.

3. Select the messaging app / contact to which the key has to be shared and name the shared key. the shared key name can’t be changed by shared user or owner after pairing.

4. If key activation code is enabled, it will display the activation code, click on share key.

5. The shared key can be sent via the preselected messaging app.

6. Active shared keys can be viewed under Manage shared keys section of both Me4U and google wallet.

4.6.3 Phone as key Sharing through Me4U Application

As a convenient option, key sharing may be initiated from the Me4U app and will be redirected to the native wallet application.

1. To share the key, select NFC key in Me4U app hamburger menu.

2. Tap on share icon in Me4U application.

3. Me4U app will auto open the respective Wallet app (Samsung Wallet/Google Wallet).
Samsung Wallet	Google Wallet

4.7 Shared phone as Key Activation

Please verify whether your device is listed in compatible device list and its Android version is 13 and above for Samsung and Pixel devices prior to starting the pairing procedure.

1. Shared key can be activated either by scanning the QR code or through the share key link received from owner.

2. On clicking the link or scanning the QR code will open the user’s device specific wallet app, either Samsung Wallet, Google Wallet.
Samsung Wallet	Google Wallet

3. If the owner has opted for authentication code while key sharing, it will prompt user to enter the authentication code

4. On successful verification of authentication code, phone as key will be reflecting in respective wallet app.

5. Shared key user and owner will get notified, when the key is activated.

Shared key activation may take some time if internet connectivity is poor. Ensure that both the owner’s and the recipient’s phone have a stable internet connection.

4.8 Replace owner’s phone as key

When the owner replaces their device, the existing phone as key should be re-paired with a new device by following the below steps,

1. Download and install the Me4U applicable in the new Owner’s device from play store using the following URL:

Android :https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.mahindra.inglo&hl=en_IN.

Please verify whether your device is listed in compatible device list and its Android version is 13 and above for Samsung and Pixel devices prior to starting the pairing procedure.

Phone as key is device specific and not account specific.

While performing Owner’s key replacement, previous shared keys won’t be affected, it will automatically reflect in new Owners phone as key wallet.

If Shared user changes his device, phone as key should be again re-shared by Owner.

If a factory reset is performed on a device with phone as key will delete the key.

2. login to the Me4U account.

3. Tap on the hamburger menu, select 'NFC Key'.

4. As Owners key is already paired in a different device it will show a popup stating to re-pair phone as key, click on proceed.

5. Enable the consent check box and tap on 'Proceed'.

6. As per the prerequisites,

a. Go to the vehicle and turn ON the ignition.

b. Place both the key fobs on the centre console.

c. Ensure both the Owner pairing mobile and vehicle are having good network and click on start paring in Me4U app.

7. Me4U screen then displays configuring screen, simultaneously a mail will be received from Mahindra mobiity services to the email id entered for verification.

8. It will auto open the mobile specific, Samsung Wallet, Google Wallet.
Samsung Wallet	Google Wallet

9. Place your device in vehicles NFC pad (right side wireless charger).

10. In vehicles Center Information Display screen, go to App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Interior >> Convenience >> Manage NFC device.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

11. Tap on Add NFC device and select Replace Owner’s phone under it.

12. Ensure the listed prerequisites are satisfied and tap on proceed in the following screens.

Ensure good network in the Owner phone and vehicle.

Ensure the phone is placed properly on the wireless charging pad aligning to the NFC antenna.

Phone needs to be in unlocked state.

Do not remove the phone from wireless charging pad.

13. If you are using Samsung smartphone, tap start in the Samsung wallet and follow the on-screen instructions.

14. If you are using Google smartphone, the following screen flow will begin. You can rename the owner's key using Change name option displayed on the screen.

15. When key pairing is in progress, the Center Information Display displays progress screens and shows a success message upon successful key pairing.

16. Similarly, Me4U will display the added owner’s phone as key.

4.9 Lost phone as key

In the event that the device associated with the Phone-as-Key is lost, the owner can delete the key using any of the following methods:

1. Delete the owner key through the Me4U application.

2. Delete the owner key from the Center Information Display (CID) after entering the vehicle using the physical key fob.

3. Delete the owner key by signing in to the associated Samsung, Google account through a web browser.

4. For further assistance, contact the Customer Support Center or visit an authorized service center.

4.10 Owner Key Deletion

Owner’s phone as key can be deleted through.

Me4U application.

Vehicles Center Information Display.

Wallet app.

Samsung / Google Account.

4.10.1 Owner Key Deletion through Me4U application

Owner key can be deleted through the Me4U app provided vehicle is ON and connectivity is good.

1. To delete the owner’s key, select NFC key in Me4U app hamburger menu.

2. Tap on delete icon in Me4U application and click on ‘proceed’. Me4U will ask for Me4U remote pin, after entering it Me4U will confirm key deletion immediately if the vehicle is turned on.

Shared key will be working after owners key deletion. Refer 'Shared key deletion' topic for further deleting shared key also.

Incase of bad network in vehicle, the keys deletion will be shown as in-progress and will take some time to delete completely.

4.10.2 Owner Key Deletion through Center Information Display

The owner’s key can be deleted from the Center Information Display by following the below steps

1. Go to ‘App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Interior >> Convenience’.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

2. Tap on ‘Manage NFC device

3. Tap on delete icon near the owner’s phone as key and confirm delete.

4. Owner’s phone as key will be deleted immediately

Shared key will be working after owners key deletion. Refer 'Shared key deletion' topic for further deleting shared key also.

incase of bad network in user device, the keys will be deleted immediately, but it will take some time to reflect in Me4U and wallet app.

4.10.3 Owner Key Deletion through Wallet app

Owner key can be deleted through the respective device’s Wallet app like Google wallet, Samsung wallet.

Shared key will be working after owners key deletion. Refer 'Shared key deletion' topic for further deleting shared key also.

Owner Key Deletion using Samsung Wallet

1. To delete the owner’s key, open Samsung wallet >>> select the owner’s NFC key and click on the more options icon.

2. Tap on ‘delete’ and again reconfirm the deletion.

3. Wallet app will ask for device validation, after validation Wallet app will confirm key deletion immediately.

Owner Key Deletion using Google Wallet

1. To delete the owner’s key, open Google wallet >>> select the owner’s NFC key and click on the more options icon.

2. Tap on ‘delete car key’ and select ‘delete’.

3. Wallet app will ask for device validation, after validation owner’s key will be immediately deleted.

4.10.4 Owner Key Deletion through Samsung / Google Account

Owner key can be deleted by logging in Samsung / Google Account through browser.

Samsung- https://smartthingsfind.samsung.com/login

Google- https://myaccount.google.com/intro/find-your-phone?hl=en-US

4.11 Shared Key Deletion

Shared phone as key can be deleted through the following methods

Owner’s Me4U application

Vehicles Center Information Display

Owner’s Wallet app

Shared users Wallet app

4.11.1 Shared Key Deletion through owner’s Me4U application

Shared key can be deleted through the owner’s Me4U app provided vehicle is ON and connectivity is good.

1. To delete the shared key, select NFC key in Me4U app hamburger menu.

2. Tap on delete icon adjacent to the respective shared key in Me4U application and click proceed. Me4U will confirm shared key deletion immediately if the vehicle is turned on.

4.11.2 Shared Key Deletion through Center Information Display

The shared key can be deleted from the Center Information Display by following the below steps

1. Go to ‘App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Interior >> Convenience’.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

2. Tap on ‘Manage NFC device.

3. Tap on delete icon near the shared key and confirm delete.

4. Shared phone as key will be deleted immediately.

4.11.3 Shared Key Deletion through Owner’s Wallet app

Shared key can be deleted through the owner’s respective smartphone’s Wallet app like Samsung wallet, Google wallet.

Shared Key Deletion using Owner’s Samsung Wallet

1. To delete the shared key, open Samsung wallet >>> select the shared key to be deleted and tap on ‘cancel key’.

2. Wallet app will ask for device validation, after validation shared key will be immediately deleted.

Shared Key Deletion using owner's Google wallet

1. To delete the shared key, open Google wallet >>> select the owner’s NFC key and click on manage shared keys.

2. Tap on ‘delete, button adjacent to the respective shared key and select ‘Stop sharing’.

3. Wallet app will ask for device validation, after validation shared key will be immediately deleted.

4.11.4 Shared Key Deletion through shared user’s Wallet app

Shared key can be deleted by the respective shared key user itself by using his device specific Wallet app like Samsung wallet, Google wallet.

Shared Key Deletion using Samsung Wallet

1. To delete the shared key, open Samsung wallet >>> select the NFC key and click on the more options icon.

2. Tap on ‘delete’ and again reconfirm the deletion.

3. Wallet app will ask for device validation, after validation Wallet app will confirm key deletion.

Shared Key Deletion using Google Wallet

1. To delete the shared key, open Google wallet >>> select the NFC key and click on the more options icon.

2. Tap on ‘delete car key’ and select ‘delete’.

3. Wallet app will ask for device validation, after validation shared key will be deleted.

4.12 NFC Card deletion

NFC card can be deleted through.

Me4U Application.

Vehicles Center Information Display.

After deletion, the NFC card can be paired again by visiting a nearby authorized Mahindra dealership.

4.12.1 NFC Card Deletion through Me4U Application

NFC Card can be deleted through the Me4U app provided vehicle is ON and connectivity is good.

1. To delete the NFC card, select NFC key in Me4U app hamburger menu.

2. Tap on delete icon in Me4U application and click on ‘proceed’. Me4U will ask for Me4U remote pin and will confirm key deletion immediately if the vehicle is turned on.

4.12.2 NFC Card Deletion through Center Information Display

The NFC card can be deleted from the Center Information Display by following the below steps

1. Go to ‘App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Interior >> Convenience’.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

2. Tap on ‘Manage NFC device

3. Tap on delete icon near the NFC card and confirm delete.

4. NFC card will be deleted immediately

4.13 Vehicle Reselling - Deletion of paired keys (Owner, shared keys and NFC cards)

In the event of vehicle resale, the current owner must delete all paired keys associated with the vehicle, including Owner Keys, Shared Keys, and NFC cards, or perform a vehicle factory reset. This ensures secure transfer of ownership.

For additional information on the key deletion, refer to Owner key deletion, Shared Key Deletion and NFC card deletion sections.

4.14 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

1. How do I use my “phone as key” to lock / unlock my car or start the vehicle?

- User can lock / unlock eSUV by tapping Android device and NFC card on eSUV Driver Door Handle.

- User can start eSUV by keeping compatible Android device in wireless charger and then by pressing Start Button.

Android device's NFC touch position may vary depending on the models. kindly refer device manual for NFC position.

2. How to pair phone as key?

- To pair phone as key by Owner, registering in Me4U App is required and pairing to be initiated with 2 keyfobs in vehicle. For detailed procedure refer Vehicle Owners Manual

3. Can I share my “phone as key” with family and friends?

- Yes, user can share eSUV's “phone as key” to family members and friends that allows to manage digital key access to others.

- User can share “phone as key” through device’s Wallet app / Me4U App, refer Owner’s Manual for detailed process.

- User can assign customized name to the shared key for easy identification.

- Sharing “phone as key” with an activation code is a secured option to follow during the sharing process (recommended).

4. List of devices which support “phone as key” feature?

Any one of the below mentioned devices should be used for both owner and shared key paring.

Compatible Samsung devices:

Compatible Google devices:

Google Pixel 10 series / 9 series / 8 series / 7 series / 6 series / Fold with Android 13 or newer

5. Can I use “phone as key” when there is no internet connectivity?

- Once paired, locking / unlocking / starting eSUV will no longer needs an active internet connection

- Only “phone as key” pairing needs internet connectivity for both vehicle and device

6. Can I use “phone as key” when device battery is low or switched off?

- Digital Key functionality works even when your device is in Power Reserve Mode / device power OFF state.

For Android phones, User Authentication must be turned OFF to unlock your SUV when the device is in this Power Reserve state.

7. How do I delete a “phone as key” (both Owner’s Key & Shared Key)?

- User can delete Owner’s Key / Shared Key from your eSUV’s Center Information Display-NFC menu, Me4U App’s NFC Key menu or Samsung / Google Wallet.

- From Vehicle, MyVehicle App > Interior > Convenience > Manage NFC Key > Delete desired key from the list

- From Me4U App, NFC Key > Delete desired key from the list

- From Wallet app, Select the SUV Key > Delete desired key from the list

To delete a key, eSUV and Smartphone should be online with internet connectivity. Refer Owner’s Manual for detailed process.

8. What if I lost my phone which has a digital key and I have no access to vehicle?

- User can login their Google / Samsung Account (as applicable based on the device type / Wallet app) and mark that device as lost or stolen. This will prevent eSUV from being unlocked with lost / stolen phone key.

In case if you have deleted the key, you will loose the access to the vehicle, You need valid keyfob/ NFC card to access the vehicle further.

Google- https://myaccount.google.com/intro/find-your-phone?hl=en-US

Samsung- https://smartthingsfind.samsung.com/login

- Or user can reach Mahindra Customer Care (1800 209 6006) and raise a request to terminate the key associated with vehicle

This needs an active internet connection either in eSUV or in smartphone

9. I am not able to unlock the door/ start the vehicle using Digital Key

- Customer to verify the KEY STATUS for the specific key from list of keys.

- If the KEY STATUS is ACTIVE and user is unable to access, call Mahindra Customer Care (1800 209 6006) or call RSA or reach nearest dealer

- If the KEY is not in the list, proceed with Key Pairing procedures from Vehicle Owners Manual

10. Whether phone as key/NFC Card is to be in Wireless Charging pad during vehicle drive?

- Not necessarily. It should be placed on the wireless charging pad only at the time of vehicle start. The driver must keep the key accessible to restart the vehicle if needed.

Whenever vehicle is accessed with phone as key / NFC Card, it is to be always ensured that phone as key/NFC Card is available with the driver before switching the vehicle ignition off.

11. Whether phone as key device can be charged in wireless charger?

- Yes, wireless charging is independent of NFC function

12. Whether wireless charging of Phone can be done when Vehicle NFC card / any NFC card is placed in charging pad ?

- It is recommended not to place Phone with NFC card as the operations get interrupted, also avoid placing more than 1 NFC device in wireless charging area to have seamless operation

13. How to avail the NFC card for my vehicle?

- Reach nearest dealer service center for purchasing and pairing NFC card

14. Is it possible to revoke NFC based access to vehicle?

- phone as key and NFC Card can be deleted by user. For inhibiting NFC feature usage in vehicle, reach the nearest dealer service center

15. Is it possible to temporarily revoke NFC based access to vehicle, without deleting the key?

- Yes, possible. User can login their Google / Samsung Account (as applicable based on the smartphone type / Wallet app) and mark that smartphone device as lost or stolen, on doing so phone as key will be suspended.

Google- https://myaccount.google.com/intro/find-your-phone?hl=en-US

Samsung- https://smartthingsfind.samsung.com/login

5 Seats and Safety

5.1 Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. Failure to wear a seat belt significantly increases the risk of serious injury or fatality in an accident.

In an accident, an unbelted passenger may be projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.

Pregnant women must also wear seat belts after consultation with the doctor for specific recommendations.

Airbag Hazards

Airbags are critical safety devices, but they can pose hazards if mishandled or improperly used. Airbags are supplementary safety systems and are not a substitute for seat belts. Rapid deployment with significant force can cause injuries, especially to occupants seated too close, unbelted, or improperly positioned, including children and shorter adults.

Chemical exposure from deployment residues can irritate the skin, eyes, and respiratory system. To minimize hazards, always use seat belts, maintain proper seating positions, deactivate airbags during servicing, and follow safety protocols. Never place a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat unless the airbag is deactivated. Doing so can result in serious injury or death if the airbag deploys.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction occurs when a driver’s attention is diverted from the primary task of operating a vehicle, compromising safety. It can start from visual distractions like looking at a phone, manual distractions such as adjusting controls, or cognitive distractions like daydreaming or conversing.

Common sources include mobile devices, infotainment systems, eating, and external events. Driver distraction can lead to loss of vehicle control, collisions, serious injury, or death. Distracted driving increases the risk of accidents, as reaction times slow and situational awareness diminishes. To mitigate this risk, drivers should minimize in-vehicle distractions, use hands-free devices sparingly, and maintain focus on the road to ensure their safety and that of others.

Mahindra is shall not be held liable for accidents resulting from driver distraction or failure to follow safe driving practices.

Control your speed

Controlling your speed is essential for safe driving, as excessive speed reduces reaction time, increases stopping distance, and magnifies the severity of collisions. Adhering to speed limits ensures better vehicle control, especially in adverse weather, heavy traffic, or around curves and intersections. Driving at a safe and appropriate speed helps accommodate unexpected hazards, such as pedestrians or sudden stops, and improves battery efficiency. Always adjust your speed based on road conditions, visibility, and traffic flow to protect yourself, passengers, and others on the road.

Unauthorized modifications to seats, seat belts, airbags, or child restraint systems may compromise safety. Mahindra shall not be held liable for injuries or damages resulting from improper alterations or misuse. Always follow this Owner’s Manual and consult Authorized Mahindra Service Center before modifying safety components. Carefully review the terms of your warranty for exclusions as contained in the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

The images in this Owner’s Manual are representative and may vary depending on the vehicle model, software version, and specifications.

Always take into account the road conditions, weather conditions, vehicles’ speed in order to prevent accidents.

Turn ‘ON’ the side indicators at least 30 meters before taking a turn or changing the lane.

Decelerate to a safe speed before taking turn. Do not apply brakes during cornering.

When overtaking other vehicles, watch out for the oncoming vehicle.

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

If your vehicle is equipped with infotainment/ navigation system, set and make changes to your travel route only when the vehicle is parked.

If your car gets flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you should not try to start the vehicle, we recommend to kindly contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Even with the presence of airbags, it is essential for the driver and passengers to wear seat belts at all times to reduce the risk and severity of injuries in the event of a collision.

Safe Driving depends on a combination of attentive driving habits, following traffic rules & signals, properly maintaining vehicle condition, and being aware of your surrounding situations based on the traffic, weather and road conditions.

5.2 Seats

Vehicle seats are designed to provide comfort, support, and safety for occupants during travel.

Modern seats are ergonomically engineered to reduce fatigue and include adjustable features like seat height, and reclining angles to accommodate various body types and preferences.

Seats have integrate safety systems such as seat belts and airbags, with headrests positioned to reduce the risk of whiplash in collisions.

It also have advanced features like USB charging and BYOD docking.

Sitting in Correct Position

Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:

•

Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back.

•

The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 4 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head.

•

Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Maintain at least a Ten inch (10") distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest.

•

The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility.

•

Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel.

•

Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the brake and accelerator pedals.

The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the brake and accelerator pedals), steering wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat movement may be more than expected and can cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary.

Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury.

While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.

5.2.1 Front Seat

Front Seat Slide

To adjust the seat position, locate the seat slide lever beneath the seat. Pull and hold the lever upward to unlock the seat. Slide the seat forward or backward to your desired position while keeping the lever engaged. Once positioned, release the lever to lock the seat securely in place. Always ensure the seat is properly locked before driving.

While adjusting the seat, ensure the latch fully engages on both sides of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and that the seat is firmly locked in the desired position. Failure to properly secure the seat could result in unintended movement during a sudden stop or collision, potentially causing injury. After adjusting, push and pull the seat to confirm it is securely locked before driving.

Front Seat Recline

To adjust the seatback angle, lean forward slightly and lift the seatback adjustment lever. While holding the lever, lean back to set the seatback to your desired angle. Once adjusted, release the lever and ensure it returns to its original position, locking the seatback securely in place. Always confirm the seatback is locked before driving to ensure safety.

Seat belts offer maximum protection during frontal or rear collisions when occupants are seated upright and positioned well back in their seats.

If you are reclined while wearing a seat belt, the lap belt may slide past your hips and exert restraint forces on the abdomen, increasing the risk of internal injuries in a collision. Additionally, the shoulder strap may press against your neck, causing discomfort or injury.

The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury in a collision.

The front seat-back should never be fully reclined while the vehicle is in motion, as doing so may increase the risk of injuries.

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.

Front Seat Height Adjustment

The driver’s seat height can be adjusted using the height adjust handle.

To raise the seat, lift the handle repeatedly until the desired height is reached.

To lower the seat, push the handle downward in a similar manner.

Do not adjust the seat height while the vehicle is moving.

5.2.2 Second Row Seats

The second row seat has a 60:40 split configuration with a foldable armrest.

Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous, as it can become a projectile during a sudden stop or collision, potentially injuring passengers. Always store luggage on the floor, ensuring it is securely placed to minimize the risk of injury in the event of an accident.

To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.

Second Row Folding

•

To fold the second row 60:40 seat, Pull the seat folding strap to fold the backrest.

Return the seat back to its upright position in one continuous motion to securely lock the seat and in turn avoiding seat flipping forward suddenly leading to injuries.

If this happens, release the seat lock by pulling the lever and repeat the procedure.

Be cautious when placing your hands around the seat anchors. You could pinch your hands or fingers between the seat anchor and the seat. Hold the edge of the seat when lowering it into place. Never place your hands between the seat anchor and the seat.

Second Row Armrest

The second row 60:40 is equipped with a foldable armrest.

•

To open the armrest, pull the strap located at the top of the armrest, as shown in the illustration.

•

When the armrest is not needed, push it back into the 60P backrest until it locks in place.

5.3 Head Restraint

The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top of the seat back. Vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.

Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or as close to it as possible. To raise the head restraint, pull the restraint up.

To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the head restraint down. The head restraint can be pulled out completely by depressing the locking button while pulling the restraint out. Align the head restraint shafts over the holes on the seat top and push the restraint straight down till you hear the lock click. Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the headrest is behind, not beneath, and almost touching your head.

Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted, head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition. With no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.

Head restraints are provided for the front row and second row outboards and center occupant.

5.4 Seat Belt

5.4.1 General Warnings and Instructions

At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.

•

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.

•

In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to serious and / or fatal’ injury than a person wearing a seat belt.

•

In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. An improperly worn seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident.

•

Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.

•

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained.

•

For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems.

•

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.

•

Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

•

An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Authorized Mahindra Service Center inspect the seat belt system after an accident.

•

Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle.

•

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts fitted inside the passenger compartment like grab handles, coat hooks, screens and other fitments, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.

Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious injury.

•

Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage and periodic inspection for seat belt functionality to be ensured.

•

Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts.

•

Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer.

Prevention of seat belt slow retraction:

•

Check if there any twist on in-board or out-board side of safety belt.

•

Check if dust accumulated on outer parts such as Webbing, D-Loop, Tongue stopper and Tongue.

•

Remove the dust from D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper by compressed air or air blower.

•

Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt parts D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids which might damage the seat belt assembly.

•

Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance. Safety belt assembly cleaning required if seat belt retraction becomes very slow due to dust and soil accumulation on safety belt assembly, then below cleaning procedure to be followed:

Steps to be followed for removal seat belt for cleaning

•

Appropriate Procedure of disassembly of all pyrotechnic devices to be followed for pretensioner seat belt. The battery negative terminal to be removed before disassembly of pretensioner, otherwise there will be error codes registered in Airbag ECU and Airbag ECU will show malfunction.

•

Open Pillar trims and take out Seat belt assembly on bench by carefully disassembly of connector and Lap Pretensioner/ Anchor wire assembly (if equipped). Kindly follow correct safety belt pretensioner handling procedure in case of pretensioner safety belts. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt assembly. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids which might damage the Seat belt webbing and other parts.

•

If seat belt movement is sticky due to dust accumulation. Then please contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center for help in cleaning.

•

In case of soiling on the belt, use a mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of normal soap powder to 1 liter of lukewarm water.

•

Care to be taken to prevent contact of soap water with pretensioner.

•

Clean dust accumulated on D-Loop, Webbing and overall assembly by close inspection of D-Loop and Webbing using lint free cloth.

•

After cleaning safety belt they should be dried by lint free dry cloth.

•

After cleaning kindly inspect Webbing movement through D-Loop slot for any sticky movement of webbing.

•

Assemble the safety belt using correct torque. Re-assemble all trim parts.

•

Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance.

Seat Belts use for Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before travel.

Seat Belts use for Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts in the below illustrated manner. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.

The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or emergency stop.

A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus and/or the pregnant mother.

Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer in a collision, resulting in serious personal injury.

Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.

Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. This could lead to serious injuries.

Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:

•

Reduce the possibility of being thrown out from your vehicle during an accident.

•

Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident.

•

Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be route across the child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child's shoulder, the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.

5.4.2 Seat Belt Configuration

To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.

Seat Belt Types with respect to Location
Seat Location	Seat Belt Type
Driver Seat	Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL), & Anchor Pretensioner
Co-Driver Seat	Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL)
2nd Row LH (40P)	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
2nd Row RH (60P)	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) for outboard and center occupant

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.

Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.

Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.

5.4.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner

In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.

This vehicle is provided with a anchor pretensioner for driver seat (in the sill board area) and help to protect occupant in the sever crash events.

Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in seat belt.

To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.

In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag. Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Get the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Operation of pretensioner

When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants to their seats.

Operation of load limiter

After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.

Fastening the seat belt

Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.

•

Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle.

•

Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract.

•

Each seat belt and each seating position should be used by only one occupant at a time.

•

Seat belts and airbags can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury.

•

Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint.

5.4.4 Fastening the Seat Belt

Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.

Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “DID Features” chapter for further details.

5.4.5 Seat Belt Release

To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.

5.4.6 Second Row Seat Belt Fastening

The word “CENTER” is marked on the seat belt buckle positioned on LH side for the rear center seat occupant to wear seat belt correctly. The buckles are designed so that an outboard seat belt tongue cannot be inserted into the wrong buckle.

To unfasten the seat belt, push the red colour button engraved with “PRESS” on the buckle and retract the seat belt slowly while holding the belt or/and the belt tongue.

5.4.7 Seat Belt Height Adjuster

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection.

The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest to the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position.

Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.

Check that the seat belt is positioned over the centre of outward shoulder, and it is ensuring belt is away from your neck and face, but not slipping off from your shoulder. Improper adjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt during the accident/collision.

5.4.8 Driver and Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Indication

The driver, front passenger and rear passenger seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will be continuous ON in Driver Information Display (DID) if driver or passenger doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled.

Chime will be activated when vehicle speed is more than 25 km/h of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 seconds for front seat belt and 35 seconds for rear seat belt.

5.4.9 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) and Seat Belt Reminder Indication

PODS detects the presence of occupant in the front passenger and on all rear seating locations.

Front passenger

Rear passenger

If Occupant is present on front passenger and rear passenger seats and not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on the vehicle instrument cluster panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled.

It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95 seconds for front seat belt reminder and 35 seconds for rear passenger seat belt reminder.

Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the occupant detection sensor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non authorized seat covers.

Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.

Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed to harness person taller than 140 cm. Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat. We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISOFIX.

5.5 Child Restraint System (CRS)

How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rods

ISOFIX Marking

Latch anchor / ISOFIX rod

•

The ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) are located in rear seats bottom position. Their locations are shown in the illustration.

•

Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.

•

Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child restraint.

ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult Seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

•

When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor

There are two top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base back side of the rear row front facing seats.

Remove the headrest from the rear row seat.

Place the child restraint on the rear row seat.

Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the CRS manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.

Each Child Restraint System (CRS) should be designated for the use of one child only.

•

The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer for installation.

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on seat.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury. Additionally, a loose or improperly fitted child seat may not provide adequate protection.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints and must never be used to secure other objects, equipment, or adult passengers. Misuse may cause serious injury or death.

•

The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear anchor provided on seat back.

•

Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of rear row seat which is not the correct method and may cause risk.

•

Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

•

Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the operations of the front seat and causes problems to the front occupants.

•

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat unless the airbag is deactivated. Airbag deployment can cause serious injury or death to a child.

Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) Using The Seat Belt

Table of vehicle handbook information on child restraint systems installation suitability for various seating positions

Mass Group	Front Passenger (with ON/OFF Switch)		Rear Outboard	Rear Center	Mounting method of Child seat in vehicle
Mass Group	With PAB ON	With PAB OFF	Rear Outboard	Rear Center	Mounting method of Child seat in vehicle
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (0 to 9 months)	X	U	U	U	Rear facing seat using 3-point belt
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)	X	U	U	U	Rear facing seat using 3-point belt
Group I: 9 to 18 kg (9 months to 4 years)	X	U/UF	U	U	Rear facing / forward facing seat using 3-point belt
Group II: 15 to 25 kg (4 years to 6 years)	UF	UF	U	U	Forward facing seat / Booster seat using 3-point belt
Group III: 22 to 36 kg (6 years to 12 years)	UF	UF	U	U	Forward facing seat / Booster seat using 3-point belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group. UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group. L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories. X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.

Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions

Mass group	Size Class	Fixture	Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass group	Size Class	Fixture	Front Passenger	Rear outboard	Rear Center
Carrycot	F	ISO/L1	X	X	X
Carrycot	G	ISO/L2	X	X	X
Group 0: up to 10 kg	E	ISO/R1	X	IL	X
Group 0+: up to 13 kg	E	ISO/R1	X	IL	X
	D	ISO/R2	X	IL	X
	C	ISO/R3	X	IL	X
Group I (9 to 18 kg)	D	ISO/R2	X	IL	X
	C	ISO/R3	X	IL	X
	B	ISO/F2	X	IUF/IL	X
	B1	ISO/F2X	X	IUF/IL	X
	A	ISO/F3	X	IUF/IL	X
Group II (15 to 25 kg)			X	IL	X
Group III (22 to 36 kg)			X	IL	X

Key of letters be inserted in the above table.

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.

IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with ISOFIX & Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg.

X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 720 mm).

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650 mm).

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650 mm).

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System.

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System.

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System.

F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot).

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot).

Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation instructions provided in manual carefully before use.

Table of Vehicle Handbook Information i-Size Child Restraint Systems for Installation in Various seating Positions
Restraint device figure	Front Passenger (With ON/OFF Switch)		Rear out board	Rear Center
	With PAB ON	With PAB OFF
i-Size Child Restraint System	X	X	i-U	X

i-U: Suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System forward and rearward facing.

i-UF: Suitable for forward-facing i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System only.

X: Seating position not suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint systems.

Recommended Child Seat to Use in Vehicle:

Mahindra & Mahindra recommends Britax DUALFIX PRO M i-Size child seats for up to 18 Kg children. These seats are available at an Authorized Mahindra Service Centers.
Mass Group	CRS Manufacturer	Model	Type	Installation in Vehicle	Attachment Method
Group 0 : up to 10 kg (0 to 9 months)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group 0+ : up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group I : 9 to 18 kg (9 months to 4 years)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg

Anchorage Location : Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in the figure.

Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured.

•

Never transport them unless they are properly restrained.

•

Use restrained system which meet safety standard.

•

Follow directions provided by the manufacturer.

Warning for Child Restraint

•

Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for better safety of your child.

•

Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint system.

•

Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the weight and size for your baby.

•

Use the child restraint system at recommended seating location only and follow the instructions.

•

The Child Restraint System (CRS) must remain unaltered and should not be tampered with under any circumstances.

•

After a collision, it is crucial to have the seat belts, seats, ISOFIX, and top-tether anchorages thoroughly inspected and repaired exclusively at an authorized service center to ensure safety and reliability.

•

Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below:

1	GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 KG	4	GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 KG
2	GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 KG	5	GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 KG
3	GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 KG

•

Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is recommended).

•

Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended).

•

Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage

•

The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound and color indications.

•

The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of anchor location.

•

Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.

•

User is sole responsible for injuries or damage resulting from improper installation, incorrect seat selection, or disregard of the instructions given in this Vehicle Manual.

5.6 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.

The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioner system and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's or front passenger's head/chest.

Any attempt to modify the SRS can lead to serious malfunctions or disabled safety systems. Mahindra is not liable for injuries, death, or property damage caused by such unauthorized changes, and any resulting harm shall be the sole responsibility of the user.

Any tampering of the SRS components (Airbags, crash sensors, Airbag ECU software and wiring harness etc) can lead to serious malfunctions and may cause unintended deployment which can lead sever injury or inhibits safety restraint systems functionality. Mahindra is not liable for injuries, death, or property damage caused by such unauthorized changes, and any resulting harm shall be the sole responsibility of the user.

Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat belts.

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts irrespective of presence of airbag to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.

Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.

Airbags

Your vehicle has the following airbags:

1: Curtain Airbag

2: Side Airbag

3: Passenger Airbag

4: Driver Airbag

5.6.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters “AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side demister cover above the glove box.

The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

Driver Airbag

Deployment

Horn may activate while operating the haptic switches and control wing buttons present on Driver airbag module when switches are operated with higher force than recommended.

Front Passenger Airbag

Deployment

Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. It cause injuries.

5.6.2 Side Impact Airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.

The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.

•

In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs.

•

The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.

•

For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

•

Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

•

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag.

•

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself.

•

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates.

Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation.

It is strictly non recommendable to use retrofitted seat covers on the driver and front passenger seats equipped with airbags.

An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of collision and severity of impact, the front protection airbags and side protection airbags are may independently deployed thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an collision.

Incase of low sever collisions there may not be any airbag deployed and proper wearing of seat belts can provide maximum protection to occupant.

5.6.3 Side Curtain Airbag

The side curtain air bags are contained between right above the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof.

The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•

In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs.

•

In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat.

•

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position.

•

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag.

5.6.4 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation

The passenger air bag activation/deactivation option is available in the CID screen present on the vehicle display unit.

Steps to Activate and Deactivate the Passenger Airbag

In Centre Information Display (CID), go to App drawer >> My Vehicle >> Interior >> Safety >> Passenger Airbag (ON/OFF).

If your select Airbag ON/OFF the following indicator will appear.

Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator

This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when passenger airbag “OFF” position.

Passenger Airbag ON Indicator

This Warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag “ON” option to enable the passenger airbag.

5.6.5 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp

Airbags do not require any regular maintenance or service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF after about two seconds as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system and malfunction lamp.

This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) seconds after switching the ignition ON.

•

The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly.

•

The lamp comes ON intermittently.

Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of airbag system. In particular, changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function as intended. Take the vehicle to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.

5.6.6 Airbag Inflation/Deployment

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.

Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.

Deployment of the airbags happen in a milliseconds, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. Exit the vehicle as soon as possible after the accident.

Airbag components will be very hot once it deployed incase of any accident. Touching or holding of those parts during/immediately after the collision may cause severe burns/injuries. Ensure of proper driving posture and sitting positions inside the vehicle during in motion.

Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.

•

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury.

•

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once.

•

After airbag deployment, it is not recommended to drive the vehicle, as the airbags will not deploy or provide protection in the event of another collision.

•

Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats with any object (e.g. dash panel covers, seat covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly.

•

The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle.

•

Users breaching/violating the cautions and warnings provided in this manual are solely liable for the consequences. Mahindra directors, officers, designers and managers are not responsible.

The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.

•

The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

•

The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.

•

Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury.

•

Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor.

•

All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts.

•

Retrofitted seats with modified cushions should not be used, as this may result in serious or fatal injury in the event of accident.

•

All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts.

•

Front airbags can injure occupants who are improperly positioned in the front seats.

•

Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this vehicle manual.

•

Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags.

•

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

If your SRS malfunctions, the Airbag may not inflate properly during a collision thereby increasing risk of serious injury or death. If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:

1. The SRS warning lamp does not turn ‘ON’ when the ignition switch is placed in the ‘ON’ position for few seconds.

a. The SRS warning lamp stays ‘ON’ after illuminating.

b. The SRS warning lamp comes ‘ON’/stays ‘ON’ while the vehicle is in motion.

c. The SRS warning lamp blinks when the vehicle is running.

2. We recommend the customer to immediately visit M&M Authorized Service Centre and get the SRS system inspected if any of the above conditions occur.

3. Never make any modifications to your vehicle. The modifications carried out, but not limited to the vehicle frame, bumpers, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trims, steering wheel (especially holders), are not acceptable. This will affect the intended performance of SRS.

4. Fitment of bull bars, seat covers on seats with airbags etc, is strictly prohibited. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your M&M Authorized service centre for necessary guidance.

5. Do not tamper with SRS in any way. This will lead to unexpected performance of system and may cause serious injury or death.

5.6.7 Child Restraint and Airbag

Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.

Do not put the safety seat belt under your child’s arm or behind its back.

Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child’s height.

Do not allow children to stand up or kneel on either the rear or the front seats.

An unrestrained child could suffer serious or fatal injuries during a collision.

Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with a seat belt that is slack or twisted.

If the front passenger airbag inflates, while a child is seated using a rearward child restraint it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position. On the front passenger’s sun visor.

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and securely lock the child restraint system in position with the help of ISOFIX.

Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

5.6.8 Airbag Deployment

The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.

Front Airbag

Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision. The system that senses the collision and the mechanism of deployment of airbags is triggered when there is a collision severe enough to trigger airbag deployment.

In case of frontal impact, side and curtain airbag of either side or both side may deploy depends on the type & severity of impact.

In case of low severity frontal collision, Seat-belts, If fastened properly, alone are effective to reduce the severity of injury to occupants, seat belt pretensioners may trigger to further reduce the severity of injury in such accidents and airbags are may not intended to deploy.

5.6.9 Airbag Non-deployment

Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:

The airbags are triggered only when there is a collision severe enough to trigger the airbags. The extent of vehicle damage is not always the correct indicator for airbag deployment. In some extreme/rare conditions of rough road driving, running into a curb or hitting other fixed objects, the airbags may deploy depending upon the severity of collision. In some of these conditions, damage to the vehicle may be minor or not be readily visible.

The airbags are triggered only when there is a collision severe enough to trigger the airbags. The amount of visible vehicle damage is not always the correct indicator for airbag deployment. Some collisions can result in visible damage but with no airbag deployment, because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed. Seat belts, if worn, offer adequate occupant protection in such cases.), damage to the vehicle may be minor or not be readily visible.

where there may be visible damage but the airbags did not deploy since such deployment was either not needed (according to the system) or would not have offered protection. In such cases, seat belts, if worn, offer adequate protection.

Collision with narrow objects – Utility poles or trees etc:

Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees or any other narrow objects such as the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

Frontal Impact: Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.

Frontal Side Swipe Impact: Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.

Under-ride Situations:

Running under a heavy vehicle's rear, side or front as shown in the exemplar image below may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.

Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly low.

Rear-end Collisions:

Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions. In rear collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit. Side airbags can deploy based on the severity of the rear impact. High voltage cutoff happen, depends on the severity and location of impact.

The head restraint should be properly positioned to provide adequate support to the occupant's head and the back of the head. Proper adjustment of the head restraint is essential to minimize head movement in the event of a rear collision.

Potholes or Stepped Surfaces:

Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.

Other collision scenarios where airbags may not deploy:

Impact With Animal (Cow, Horse, Deer, etc.)

Vehicle impacting rear of another car.

Rollover: Wearing seat belts offers effective protection in the event of a rollover collision.

Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants. However, side impact and curtain airbags may inflate only when severe side impact causes rollover.

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate in a strong impact:

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate even in a frontal collision, if there is a strong impact to the lateral direction.

A frontal collision occurs when the front ends of two vehicles collide.

When a vehicle hits a curb or bump.

When a vehicle falls into a deep hole or ditch.

When a vehicle experiences a hard landing or fall.

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may not inflate:

In the event of a side impact to the vehicle body, excluding the passenger compartment, several areas of the vehicle are typically affected.

When a vehicle is impacted from the side at an oblique angle.

When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a high-hood vehicle.

When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a motorcycle or bicycle.

Possible scenarios in which high voltage may cutoff:

•

Frontal collision, Side collision, Rear collision and Under strike collision.

5.6.10 Airbag Service

Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for inspection and repairs.

In case the customer either tries to self-service the airbag systems or tamper with the air bag systems. Mahindra, including its directors, officers or key managerial personnels, do not carry any liability arising due to such actions of the customers.

Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual or garages. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Service Center if these parts must be service and repair of the parts.

Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an Authorized Mahindra Service Center to do these jobs.

Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.

Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.

6 Driver Information Display (DID)

6.1 DID Overview

A	Time	G	ODO Meter
B	Gear Indicator	H	Current Drive Mode
C	Digital Speedo Meter	I	Current SOC value
D	Outside Ambient Temperature	J	SOC Gauge
E	Power and Regen Gauge	K	Current Range
F	Recuperation Level

The Driver Information Display (DID) theme changes according to the selected drive mode.

The DID system is not a substitute of the driver and are only to assist the driver. The driver should not solely rely on them and remain in control of the vehicle at all times. These systems do not offer a substitute to the driver’s alertness and judgement.

DID display will not turn OFF completely in IGN OFF state if LV battery charging is going ON.

6.2 Power Gauge

Power gauge indicates the % of power being used to drive the vehicle at that instance.

If the display indicates ‘Power’ in the lower right corner, the system is using HV battery power.

A	Power Level	C	Power Boost
B	Max Power

Power Mid Level – It indicates that the HV battery power utilization from the HV battery.

Max Power – It indicates that the HV battery power utilization from the HV battery is 100%.

Boost – It indicates that the BOOST mode is activated.

6.3 Regen Gauge

When regeneration is taking place DID will display the percentage of regeneration along with regen indication.

6.4 State of Charge (SOC)

The SOC indicates the status of charge available in the HV Battery.

This varies with changes in weather, load on battery and driving pattern.

The SOC will be displayed on a graph ranging from 0% to 100%, likely indicating the remaining battery charge.

If the SOC reaches 20%, the range gauge and SOC will turn into red color to warn the driver of low battery level. Additionally an alert will be shown on the center of DID display which will time out in 5 second.

If the SOC reaches 10%, an alert will appear on the DID (Flashing in Red color) indicating that the SOC is at 10%. Based on user input, it will disappear once user press ok button.

When the SOC reaches 1%, an alert will appear on the DID indicating that the SOC is at 1%. This alert will appear continuously until the charger is connected.

Small fluctuations in the SOC observed when the vehicle starts to move from stop condition is normal.

SOC bar changes in dynamic, level changes from 0 - 100% and the same is displayed digitally.

The vehicle should not be driven with low SOC.

6.5 Outside Ambient Temperature

This screen shows the outside ambient temperature, and we can change units based on the units settings in the Center Information Display (CID).

Refer CID section for more details.

6.6 Speedometer

The speedometer indicates actual vehicle speed in km/h.

The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used.
If customer uses non-genuine/ modified parts, they will not be covered under vehicles warranty and Manufacturer will not be liable for any damages arising out of use of such non-genuine/ modified parts.
If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the speedometer might not display the correct speed and distance travelled.

Overspeed Alert Buzzer

•

Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minute when the vehicle speed reaches 80 km/h. Once primary level chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 km/h or goes beyond 120 km/h.

•

Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime along with DID alert, when the vehicle speed reaches 120 km/h and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 km/h. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 km/h.

6.7 Gear Information

Gear indication shows the selected gear position (P/N/D/R) in the vehicle.

Incase of a fault or failure, the owner should take the vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

For reference of different gear position Refer “Starting and Driving” chapter.

6.8 Recuperation Levels (Multiple Regen modes)

Recuperation means regaining of energy. The Recuperation levels will be Indication range as ‘L0, L1, L2 to L3, one Pedal drive, Auto Regen mode’. Refer “Starting and Driving” chapter for more details.

In case of failure, DID will show ERROR/ – –.

Incase of a fault or failure, the owner should take the vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.9 Predicted Range

Predicted Range indicates the remaining driving range that can be covered by the vehicle. This is calculated by the vehicle’s onboard computer using the following information.

•

Available battery SOC

•

Past driving behavior

•

Accessories usage pattern (For Example. Cabin AC)

This predicted range may get reset automatically to a nominal value whenever the vehicle is under charging and when the SOC is above 80%.

6.10 Clock

The time on the clock and date is in sync with the CID. Any change in CID will reflect on the DID. Refer time settings in CID for changing the clock format.

6.11 Odometer

The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in km. Odometer cannot be reset.

6.12 Drive Mode Status

The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Default, Range, Everyday, Race and Custom mode which have their own distinct pre-set configurations. The selection of drive mode can be done through Center information Display (CID) / Intelli Command Center (ICC). Drive selection menu is the part of CID, and DID will only display the current drive mode. Refer “Starting Driving” chapter for more details.

Everyday Mode	Race Mode

Range Mode	Default Mode

Custom Mode

6.13 DID Control Switches

The right side steering wheel switches are used to control the DID menus.

MENU:

Press menu button to toggle among cluster menus.

Enter:

Press enter button to select the respective menu/option.

UP:

Press UP button to navigate up within the selected menu.

DOWN:

Press DOWN to navigate down within the selected menu.

6.14 DID Screen Flow

DID Screen layouts can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

Use Enter button to select the required screen layout. DID will change into the selected layout.

6.14.1 Focus Info Screen

Focus can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switches.

Use OK button to enter focus page.

Focus screen provides a driver focused screen comprising of Speedometer and Alert telltales.

6.14.2 Navigation

Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

Use the OK button to enter Navigation page.

Full Screen Navigation

DID will display the full screen Navigation with input from center information display (CID).

6.14.3 Analytics Menu

In Analytics, Trip Distance, Trip Time and Average Speed and Average Consumption will get displayed in screen.

Analytics can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

Use OK button to enter Analytics page.

Energy Consumption

Energy consumption provides a graphical representation of energy usage, including details such as average and instantaneous energy efficiency.

Energy consumption is calculated on an average basis and may vary significantly based upon driving conditions, driving habits and condition of the vehicle.

Current trip will reset on every ignition cycle.

Power Flow

Power flow provides a visual representation of the movement of energy, indicating whether power is flowing to or from the battery pack.

The electric vehicle system provides drivers with information about the power flow in various operating modes.

Incase of failure, Power flow animation will not move.

The driver must remain vigilant and in control of the vehicle at all times and should be ready to manually intervene in case of need.

Current Trip

•

Trip meter contains 3 trips namely Current trip, Trip A and Trip B.

•

Trip Timer: Measures the total elapsed time from the beginning of the trip. It starts counting as soon as the trip cycle begins and continues until the cycle ends.

•

Average Speed: Represents the average vehicle speed of travel over the duration of the trip.

•

Trip Distance: Tracks the cumulative distance traveled from the start of the trip cycle to the current point.

•

Average Power Consumption refers to the distance the vehicle has travelled using 1 kWh (kilowatt-hour) of energy. It is a measure of the vehicle’s energy efficiency, indicating how far it can go on a single unit of energy.

Range is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available charge.

Select TRIP A / TRIP B in screen by pressing Up/Down switch in steering wheel switch. Long press of OK switch will reset trip information, average speed and driving time.

Beyond the maximum value of the trip meter, it will reset to zero.

Trip A		Trip B
Min	Max	Min	Max
0	9999.9	0	9999.9

It is recommended to reset the trip meter when battery is disconnected and reconnected.

Current trip will reset automatically on every ignition cycle.

6.15 General Cluster Alerts

Display	Operating Conditions
	If the doors are open in the vehicle, the corresponding warning message will appear with animation.
	Park Lamp alert notifies the driver when the vehicle’s parking lights are left ON, after the vehicle is turned OFF.
	Passenger airbag off alert is displayed when passenger airbag is turned OFF from Center information display (CID).

Display

Operating Conditions

Service Reminder alert notifies the driver when the vehicle is due for routine maintenance or servicing.

Periodic service completed alert notifies the driver that scheduled or preliminary maintenance has been completed on the vehicle.

•

Seatbelt not Fastened alert notifies the driver or passenger when their seat belt is not properly fastened.

•

The pictorial representation of the unfastened seat belt will be highlighted in red color.

Overspeed alert is displayed when vehicle is driven more than 120 km/h.

ABS Malfunction alert notifies the driver when there is a problem with the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), which may affect braking performance.

Hill hold Control error alert is displayed when the Hill hold Control function is not available due to malfunction in the system.

Display	Operating Conditions
	Hill Descent Control Error alert notifies the driver when there is a malfunction or issue with the hill descent control system.
	Hill Descent Control Passive alert typically indicates that the Hill Descent Control (HDC) system is not actively engaged or available at the moment.
	Hill Descent Control Active alert indicates that the Hill Descent Control (HDC) system is currently engaged and actively controlling the vehicle’s speed while descending a steep incline.
	ESP system OFF alert is displayed when user turns OFF the ESP from driver side switch bank.
	Check ESP alert notifies the driver when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system detects a loss of traction or instability, or if there’s a malfunction in the system.
	Electric Park Brake Engaged indicates that the vehicle’s electronic parking brake is activated, preventing the car from moving while stationary.
	Engage Park Brake instructs the driver to activate the parking brake, securing the vehicle in place to prevent movement while stationary.

Display	Operating Conditions
	EPB released automatically indicates that the EPB is released due to various drive condition.
	EBD Malfunction indicates there’s a problem with the brake force distribution system, which could potentially affect braking performance.
	Front Brake Pad Worn Out indicates that the brake pads on the front wheels have worn down and may need replacement.
	Rear Brake Pad Worn Out indicates that the brake pads on the rear wheels have worn down and may need replacement.
	The low brake fluid alert notifies the driver when the brake fluid level in the vehicle is too low.
	Pull the lever twice to unlatch hood alert is displayed when hood unlatch lever is pulled only once to unlock the hood.

Display

Operating Conditions

Power Window Not Learnt indicates that the vehicle’s power window system has not been properly calibrated, potentially causing issues with window operation.

This alert is displayed when charging process is stopped by any of the below means:

Manual charge cutoff switch on the driver side switch bank is pressed.

Stop charging option is selected in CID.

This alert is displayed when user is trying to enable drive with charger gun connected in the charge port.

This alert comes, when charging gun is connected to vehicle and the main power is not turned ON.

‘Boost mode not available’ alert means that Boost mode precondition are met and still boost is not available.

This alert is displayed when vehicle has observed internal limitations and performance is reduced. If driving is possible, drive the vehicle slowly to nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Limp Mode alert indicates that the vehicle’s system has detected a serious issue, and to protect the motor and HV battery, the vehicle is limiting performance, usually reducing speed and power.

This alert is displayed when malfunction is observed in vehicle’s electric power train system. Contact Authorized Mahindra Service center for assistance.

It’s Time to Charge alert notifies the user that the vehicle’s battery is low and needs to be charged soon. Time to charge alert is displayed thrice when vehicle battery SOC reaches 20%, 10%, 1% respectively.

Press Start/Stop Switch to Start instructs the driver to press the start/stop button to turn on the vehicle.

This alert is displayed when critical failure is observed in the high voltage system. Please leave the vehicle and contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

Wireless Charging Device Forgotten alert notifies the user that the device intended for wireless charging has been left behind in the rear wireless charging pad.

Wireless Charging Device Forgotten alert notifies the user that the device intended for wireless charging has been left behind in the front wireless charging pad.

Display	Operating Conditions
	Rear Left Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the left rear turn signal light on your vehicle.
	Rear Right Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the right rear turn signal light on your vehicle.
	Left High Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left-side high beam headlight.

Display	Operating Conditions
	Left Low Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left-side low beam headlight.
	Right high Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right-side high beam headlight.
	Right Low Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right-side low beam headlight.

Display	Operating Conditions
	Left Daytime Running Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left-side daytime running light (DRL).
	Right Daytime Running Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right-side daytime running light (DRL).
	Front Left Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the left front turn signal light on your vehicle.

Display	Operating Conditions
	Front Right Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the right front turn signal light on your vehicle.
	Front Left Corner Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left front cornering lamp.
	Front Right Corner Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right front cornering lamp.

Display	Operating Conditions
	Front Fog Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the vehicle’s front fog lights.
	Rear Park Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the rear parking lights on your vehicle.
	Brake Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with one or more of your vehicle’s brake lights.

Display

Operating Conditions

This alert is displayed to suggest that vehicle is to be charged to 100% SOC for better efficiency.

This alert is displayed when power saving mode is activated in CID.

1-Pedal Drive On alert indicates that the 1-pedal driving mode has been activated, allowing the vehicle to accelerate and decelerate using only the accelerator pedal.

This alert is displayed when 1-pedal drive is requested but conditions to activate is not met.

This alert is displayed when 1-pedal drive is deactivated.

This alert is displayed when HV battery temperature is very low.

This alert is displayed when LV battery is disconnect.

This indicates that LV battery energy is consumed in ignition OFF condition. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

This alert is observed when LV battery is not charged by the system. Ignition may not turn ON if vehicle is used with this alert. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

This message is displayed when vehicle is ready for drive. Shift gear lever out of park and release brake pedal or press accelerator to drive away.

This alert is displayed when electric power train related components are overheating. Please slow down & park the vehicle. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

This alert is displayed when coolant level is low in the vehicle. Driving with this alert ON may lead to critical components damage. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

This alert is displayed when HV battery is overheating. Please slow down and park the vehicle. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

This alert is displayed when critical failure is observed in the vehicle system and drive is no more possible. Please park the vehicle and contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

This alert is displayed when critical failure is observed within the HV battery. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

This alert is displayed when auto regeneration is being activated but conditions are not met.

This alert is displayed when regeneration is being activated but function is not available due to system limitations.

This alert is displayed when auto regeneration level change is requested but conditions are not met.

•

System will monitor some of the internal parameters and if any malfunction is detected it will display the “Contact Dealer” alert.

•

Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert is displayed in DID.

The low pressure alert will be triggered only when the tyre pressure drops below the threshold. Additionally, the low pressure alert will also be triggered based on the tyre temperature value (Refer “Recommended tyre pressure Value” section for more details).

High tyre pressure alert will be triggered only when the tyre pressure value goes to certain values (>44 PSI).

6.16 Smart Key Alerts

Display	Conditions
	Key inside the vehicle alert notifies the driver that the key has been left inside the car.
	Key fob not in vehicle alert notifies the driver that the key fob is not detected inside the vehicle.
	Start/Stop switch malfunction indicates a problem with the vehicle’s start/stop button, which may prevent the vehicle from starting or stopping as intended.
	Key fob battery low alert notifies the driver that the battery in the key fob is running low and may need to be replaced soon to ensure proper functionality.
	Key Reminder alert notifies the driver if the key fob has been left inside the vehicle.
	To start the vehicle, place the key fob in its tray alert instructs the user to place the key fob in the key fob tray to start the vehicle.
	Press brake while pressing Start/Stop switch to start instructs the driver to press the brake pedal while also pressing the Start/Stop button to start the vehicle.

6.17 Steering Lock Alerts

Display	Conditions
	Turn Steering Wheel While Pressing Start/Stop Switch alert appears when the vehicle’s steering lock mechanism is engaged and needs to be disengaged before starting the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when start/stop switch is stuck START for more than 60 second.
	Steering Wheel Not Locked alert indicates that the vehicle’s steering wheel is not properly locked in place when the when the vehicle is turned off.
	Electric Power Steering ECU Flash Failure alert indicates that an update of the ECU’s software has failed.
	Electric Power Steering Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the vehicle’s electric power steering (EPS) system.

6.18 Gear Shift Alerts

Display

Conditions

This alert comes when,

Vehicle is moving in the reverse direction (speed > 2 km/h) and if the driver presses “P” button to engage the “Park” mode with brake pedal pressed.

Vehicle is moving in the forward direction (speed > 2 km/h) and if the driver presses “P” button to engage the “Park” mode with brake pedal pressed.

This alert comes, when the gear shifting is not possible as brake pedal press precondition is not met. Refer “Shift Lever” section for more details.

This alert comes when the park switch is depressed for more than 30 second.

Shift to ‘P’ or ‘N’ to Start alert instructs the driver to move the gear selector to either “Park” (P) or “Neutral” (N) in order to start the vehicle.

Shift to ‘P’ to Turn OFF alert prompts the driver to shift the vehicle’s gear selector to “Park” (P) in order to turn off the vehicle.

This alert is displayed when user is trying to shift gear out of Park while charger is connected

This alert is displayed when gear shift is not possible with the gear shifter. Contact Authorized Mahindra Service center for assistance

A gear shift error message usually displayed a problem with the transmission or shifting mechanism.

A “Shift not possible” message indicates an issue preventing the vehicle from changing gears.

6.19 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)

Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle is just started, and you are about to move the vehicle. It displays the current direction in which tyres are aligned to assist in maneuvering the vehicle. TDMS is displayed only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral, or park and brake pedal is pressed.

<Level 5>

<Level 3>

<Level 0>

Operating Conditions: Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree.

Working conditions:

When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral position. (or)

When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and brake pedal is pressed.

6.20 Driver Information Display Telltale Overview

6.21 Warning Telltale lamps in DID

6.21.1 Left Turn Indicator

Lamp blinks whenever left turn indicator is turned ON or hazard lamp is ON.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp blinks /flashing in higher rate indicates failure in one or more of the lamp bulbs.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.2 Right Turn Indicator

Lamp blinks whenever right turn indicator is turned ON or hazard lamp is ON.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp blinks /flashing in higher rate indicates failure in one or more of the lamp bulbs.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.3 Parking Lamp

The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through Combination switch. During ignition OFF, if park lamp is already ON with driver door open, alert will be displayed.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning ON/OFF when park lamp is on/off indicates malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

Park lamp need to be checked, In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.4 Front Fog Lamp

Lamp ON/OFF when both the front fog lamp and the parking lamps are turned ON/OFF.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning ON/OFF when the front fog lamp turned on/off indicates the malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

Fog lamp may not work, In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.

6.21.5 High Beam Head Lamp

Lamp on when the head lamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash is used and goes off when High beam lamp is turned OFF.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not working ON/OFF when head lamp high beam is ON/OFF indicates malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.6 Service Reminder Lamp

Lamp ON indicates faults related to 12V system and it's sub system

Abnormal Operation:

When Blinking- Vehicle can't be moved or charged. When its Continuously ON - Vehicle may have partial torque limitations

Actions recommended:

Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance

6.21.7 Front Seat Belt Warning Lamp

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes OFF in few seconds. Lamp remains on when driver seat belt is not worn when vehicle is running. Chime will also be on reminding driver to wear the seat belt.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp remains OFF when driver seat belt is not worn indicates malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

Buckle the seat belt and check whether the lamp is turned OFF. If not so, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.8 Rear Seat Belt Warning Lamp

The Rear seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the any one of the Passenger (if occupied) to fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON. The lamp will continue to illuminate till all the Passengers (if occupied) fastens the seat belt properly.

Abnormal Operation:

If the passenger is not present or fastened the seat belt and lamp still illuminate means there is a malfunction in system.

Actions recommended:

Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.9 Airbag Malfunction

Lamp ON when ignition is turned ON and goes OFF in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp Continuously on during motor running indicates malfunction in airbag system.

Actions recommended:

Airbag may not deploy contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.10 Immobilizer

Immobilizer Lamp flashes intermittently (few seconds frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF indicating that the vehicle security system is armed (when locked using the key fob).

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on/ Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

6.21.11 LV Battery Charge

The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the LV battery is in low charge state and not being charged. This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the vehicle drive is enabled.

Abnormal Operation:

If the lamp continues to remain ON even after enabling the vehicle, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the LV charging system.

Actions recommended:

Vehicle battery may not charge, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately for assistance.

Driving further in this condition will cause battery to discharge and vehicle may switch OFF. Once the ignition is switched OFF, vehicle may not start again.

6.21.12 Tiretronics

Lamp turns ON when ignition is turned ON and goes OFF in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously ON indicates the Tire pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure/ air leakage/high temperature Lamp blinks for 90 seconds and then continuously ON indicates tiretronics system malfunction.

Actions recommended:

Inspect and adjust the tire pressure and check for the lamp, if lamps is still ON then contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

System malfunction: System fails to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure. System Warning: Indicated Low/High Tire pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.

6.21.13 Door Ajar Warning Lamp

Lamp turns ON if any door/hood is open and goes OFF once it is closed. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speeds more than 2 km/h. The lamp and chime go OFF when all the doors are closed properly.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp OFF when any doors/hood is open or lamp ON when all the doors/hood is closed indicates malfunction.

Actions recommended:

Open and close all the doors/hood and check whether the warning lamp is working as intended. If not, then contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.14 Electronic Power Steering System (EPS) Warning Lamp

The EPS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously ON Indicates malfunction in Electric Power steering system which may result in hard power steering system.

Actions recommended:

Steering may be hard to steer, drive the vehicle to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

When EPS fails. vehicle can still be driven with increased steering effort.

The customer should avoid driving and should contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center since driving in such a situation can be dangerous.

6.21.15 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Warning Lamp

Lamp ON when ignition is turned on and goes OFF in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

If the lamp remains ON while driving indicates the malfunction in the System.

Actions recommended:

Then contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

The brake system still works conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible. However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care dangerous and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.16 Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) Malfunction

Lamp ON when ignition is turned ON and goes OFF in few seconds or when parking brake is disengaged.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously ON indicates Brake fluid level might be low/ malfunction in parking brake system/Front Brake Pad worn out.

Actions recommended:

Either one of the below conditions:

Park Brake is engaged.

Brake fluid level is low. Check & top up if required. If issue still persists, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

There is some concern in EBD. Please contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Integrated Electronic Booster Malfunction/Error. Please contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

ABS system may not work in this condition, vehicle can be driven slowly for the nearest dealer. If ABS warning lamp and park brake lamp is simultaneously on, there may be a severe malfunction in the braking system. Then contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.17 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF

Lamp ON when ignition is turned ON and goes OFF in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning ON/OFF when ESC OFF switch is operated indicates malfunction in the ESC system.

Actions recommended:

ESC function may not work contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Drive the vehicle slowly for nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.18 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction Warning Lamp

Lamp ON when ignition is turned ON and goes OFF in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESC System.

Actions recommended:

If ESP function doesn't work, then contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.19 Hill Hold Control (HHC) Malfunction

Lamp ON when ignition is turned ON and goes OFF in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously ON indicates malfunction in HHC system.

Actions recommended:

If the warning lamp is turned ON, have the vehicle checked and serviced at an Authorized Mahindra Service center.

There are chances of vehicles rolling down when starting on a hill. No assistance will be available from ESC system.

The driver should not solely rely on the system and should remain in control of the vehicle at all times. Mahindra will not be liable for any damages arising out of such situations.

6.21.20 Hill Descent Control (HDC) Malfunction

The lamp turns ON when the ignition switch is turned ON and turns OFF after about 3 second.

Abnormal Operation:

If Lamp Continuous ON malfunction warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system.

Actions recommended:

Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.21 Front Brake Pad Wear

Abnormal Operation:

The front brake pad wear tell-tale is a warning indicator on the vehicle dashboard that illuminates when the front brake pads are nearing the end of their service life. This system is designed to alert the driver to the need for brake pad replacement, ensuring the braking system continues to operate effectively.

Actions recommended:

Minimize aggressive braking to prevent further damage to the braking system Visit an authorized service center to replace the brake pads with manufacturer-recommended parts.

Driving with worn brake pads can severely compromise braking performance, increasing stopping distances and the risk of accidents. Ignoring the tell-tale may lead to damage to the brake rotors, increasing repair costs. Consistent use of worn brake pads can result in complete brake failure in extreme cases.

6.21.22 Rear brake pad wear

Abnormal Operation:

The rear brake pad wear tell-tale is a dashboard warning light or alert that activates when the rear brake pads are close to their minimum thickness. This system ensures the driver is notified to replace the pads before they compromise the vehicle’s braking performance.

Actions recommended:

Minimize aggressive braking to prevent further damage to the braking system Visit an authorized service center to replace the brake pads with manufacturer-recommended parts.

6.21.23 Low Brake Fluid

During Low Brake Fluid warning, vehicle speed will be limited to 25 km/h.

This Message comes when brake fluid level is low while driving.

Actions recommended:

If this telltale is continuos ON, Immediately visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.24 Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) malfunction

Lamp ON when ignition is turned ON and goes OFF in few second.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously ON indicates malfunction in EPB system.

Actions recommended:

Indicates malfunction of Electric Parking Brake. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

If the warning lamp is turned ON, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center If you must park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever to the P position.

6.21.25 Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

Telltale turns ON when ignition is turned ON and when EPB / park mode is engaged.

Abnormal Operation:

If telltale remains ON even after shifting to other than P mode (except for auto EPB apply), it indicates malfunction in EPB system.

Actions recommended:

If EPB doesn’t work as intended, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.26 Auto Vehicle Hold Standby

White colour: Lamp ON when AVH is enabled through AUTO HOLD switch in centre console. AVH is available in white color indicates standby mode.

6.21.27 Auto Vehicle Hold Malfunction

Abnormal Operation:

Yellow light Indicates some fault in AVH, because of which AVH not available.

Actions recommended:

If lamp is turned ON contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp is turned ON, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.28 Auto Vehicle Hold Active

Green colour: Lamp ON when AVH is enabled through AUTO HOLD switch in centre console. AVH is available in green color indicates Active mode.

6.21.29 Auto Vehicle Hold Failure

Abnormal Operation:

Auto Hold lamp in red color indicates Auto Hold Not Working/Fail State.

Actions recommended:

FIf lamp is turned ON contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.30 Vehicle Engine Sound Synthesis (VESS) Malfunction

Telltale indicates VESS system is not working properly.

Actions recommended:

Telltale illuminates when there is a fault in VESS.

Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.31 Suspension (If Equipped)

The Suspension System Tell-Tale illuminates when there is an issue with the vehicle’s suspension system, such as a malfunction in the adaptive suspension, air suspension, or shock absorbers. It may appear as a yellow or red warning light, depending on the severity of the issue.

Actions recommended:

Drive slowly and carefully to prevent further damage to the suspension system Check for any obvious signs of damage, such as a low ride height or uneven suspension and contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

Handling and Stability Impact: A malfunctioning suspension system can reduce vehicle stability, handling, and comfort. Exercise caution while driving. Avoid Harsh Conditions: Avoid driving over rough terrain or at high speeds until the issue is resolved, as it could worsen the condition. Safety Risk: Continuing to drive with a suspension issue may lead to uneven tyre wear or damage to other components, increasing repair costs and safety risks.

6.21.32 EV Warning Lamp

EV warning tell tale is used to indicate faults related to HV system (400V).

Abnormal Operation:

When Blinking - Vehicle can't be moved or charged When its Continuous ON - Vehicle may experience torque limitation / charge cut off.

Actions recommended:

Contact your nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

6.21.33 Thermal warning

The Thermal Warning Telltale illuminates when the vehicle’s temperature exceeds the recommended operating range. This typically indicates overheating in the motor, battery, transmission, or another critical system. The warning can be caused by insufficient coolant, blocked airflow, or malfunctioning cooling components.

Actions recommended:

Check the coolant level in the reservoir. Add coolant if it’s low, but only after the vehicle has cooled. Look for visible leaks under the vehicle or obstructions near the radiator or cooling vents. If the warning persists after topping off coolant or clearing blockages, contact a service center immediately.

Do Not Ignore: Operating the vehicle with an illuminated thermal warning can lead to severe damage to the motor or other critical systems. Avoid Strain: Do not continue driving aggressively or towing heavy loads, as it may worsen the issue. Be Alert to Smoke or Steam: If you notice steam or a burning smell, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and immediately contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.34 High Voltage (HV) Battery Failure

Abnormal Operation:

If lamp is continuously ON indicates that HV Battery Fail.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with this lamp ON. This may result in damage to the components and will not be covered under warranty. The owner should take the vehicle to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.35 HV Battery High Temperature

The temperature warning lamp indicates the high & low temperature condition of EPT components which may lead to malfunction of EPT components Blinking indicates extreme temperature condition & continuous ON indicates very extreme temperature condition.

Abnormal Operation:

Blinking indicates extreme temperature condition & continuous ON indicates very extreme temperature condition.

Actions recommended:

Do not continue driving the vehicle with this lamp ON. This may result in damage to the components and will not be covered under warranty. The user must immediately visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

6.21.36 High Voltage (HV) Battery Charge Lamp

Continuously blinking Indicates that HV battery charging is in progress.

Abnormal Operation:

If the lamp is ON without blinking when charger plug is connected condition, then charging is not happening.

Actions recommended:

HV Battery Charge Lamp doesn’t work contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for Assistance

6.21.37 Regeneration Lamp

If it is continuously ON it Indicates that vehicle is in regeneration state due to braking regeneration/coasting regeneration.

Abnormal Operation:

If lamp is ON even though braking is not happening.

Actions recommended:

Regeneration Lamp doesn’t work, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately for assistance.

If lamp is not ON even though braking then please contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for Assistance.

6.21.38 Ready to Drive

Lamp turns ON When the vehicle Ignition is turned ON & drive is enabled, after successful security authentication. This lamp illuminates indicating user that the vehicle is ready to drive.

Actions recommended:

While Vehicle is moving ,without the lamp turning ON then contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance

6.21.39 Press Brake

The "Press Brake" tell-tale illuminates as a prompt to depress the brake pedal. This is typically required in specific scenarios, such as: Starting the Vehicle: In vehicles with automatic transmissions or push-button start systems. Shifting Gears: To move the gear selector from "Park" or "Neutral".

Actions recommended:

Firmly press and hold the brake pedal when the tell-tale illuminates. If the light remains ON despite following the prompts, consult the Vehicle’s Manual or contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

Do Not Ignore: Ignoring the prompt may prevent the vehicle from starting or shifting gears, potentially causing delays or unsafe conditions. Check System Behavior: If the tell-tale remains illuminated after pressing the brake, it may indicate a problem with the brake pedal sensor or system.

6.21.40 Reduced Power/Power Saving Mode

This lamp glows when the Limp Home Mode is activated and the vehicle operates at minimal power.

Actions recommended:

Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

6.21.41 Cruise Control Indicator Standby

The white cruise control indicator illuminates ON, when the cruise control system is in standby mode, meaning it is ready to be activated but not currently maintaining a set speed. It indicates that the system is operational and can be engaged by the driver.

Actions recommended:

Always be prepared to disengage the cruise control system by pressing the brake pedal, clutch (for manual transmission), or the cancel button in challenging driving conditions. If the white indicator does not turn on or behave as expected, consult an authorized service center to check the cruise control system.

Do Not Rely Prematurely: The vehicle’s speed is not being maintained; driver control is still required. Road Awareness: Ensure safe driving conditions before engaging cruise control. Avoid using it in heavy traffic, steep inclines, declines, or slippery surfaces. System Compatibility: If the tell-tale does not function as expected, there may be an issue with the cruise control system requiring inspection.

6.21.42 Cruise Control Indicator Active

The green cruise control indicator illuminates, when the cruise control system is actively maintaining the set speed of the vehicle. It signifies that the system is engaged and operational.

Actions recommended:

If the tell-tale flashes or remains illuminated after turning OFF cruise control, consult an authorized service center to diagnose and resolve potential issues.

Maintain Awareness: Although the system controls the vehicle’s speed, the driver remains responsible for steering and responding to changing traffic conditions. Avoid Unsafe Conditions: Do not use cruise control on slippery roads, steep inclines/declines, or in heavy traffic. Overriding Cruise Control: Always be prepared to override the system by braking, accelerating, or turning off cruise control if necessary. Malfunction Risks: If the green indicator behaves abnormally or flashes, it may indicate a malfunction in the system that requires immediate attention.

6.21.43 Cruise Control Indicator Malfunction

The yellow cruise control indicator illuminates when there is an issue or limitation with the cruise control system, rendering it unavailable or partially functional. It serves as a warning that the system requires attention before it can be safely used.

Actions recommended:

Schedule a check-up with an authorized service technician to diagnose and resolve the issue causing the yellow indicator.

System Unavailable: Do not attempt to engage cruise control when the yellow indicator is on, as the system may not function as intended. Potential Malfunction: The yellow indicator may signify a fault within the cruise control system. Prolonged usage without addressing the issue could cause further damage. Limited Functionality: If the system is partially operational, driving behavior may not align with expectations, posing a risk in traffic.

6.21.44 Auto High Beam (If Equipped)

Lamp will be OFF during ignition is ON. Lamp turns ON when high beam is ON in AUTO mode and high beam assist function is enabled in DID.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning ON/OFF when head lamp high beam is ON/OFF in AUTO mode and high beam assist in enabled state indicates failure in the system.

Actions recommended:

In case of any failure, immediately contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

7 Center Information Display (CID)

The Center Information display is equipped with a 12.5” touch screen TFT display. It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,), Navigation, Vehicle controls & Settings

Display Overview

A	Volume	G	SET Temperature – Driver
B	e-SIM Network Signal	H	Home
C	AQI Indicator	I	App Drawer
D	Time	J	Blower
E	Notification	K	SET Temperature – Passenger
F	User Profile Name	L	Tiles

•

Once the home button is selected, the home screen will appear on the CID.

The apps can be selected by referring the below image.

7.1 User Controls – Intelli Command Center (ICC)

ICC switch is combination of Joystick & switches for easy ergonomic access for the driver and co-driver.

It has 4 shortcut keys and a central rotary knob.

A	Climate Control	D	My Vehicle
B	Rotary Knob	E	Enter/OK
C	Home/Back	F	Volume Control

Climate Control: Press the climate control button and use the knob to modify the climate setting.

Volume: Press the volume control button to adjust the volume using the ICC Knob clockwise or anti clockwise.

My vehicle : Press the my vehicle button to open the my vehicle apps, to use the knob to select the required functions.

Home/Back: Press the Home/Back Button to navigate to the home screen.

Rotary Knob: A rotary knob can indeed rotate clockwise and counterclockwise. Also, it can move in other directions, such as up/down and left/right.

Rotary Knob - Long Press: On long pressing the rotary knob will open display off screen.

Enter/OK: Can select and enter the required options.

7.2 Steering Wheel Controls – LH Side

A	Enter
B	Mode (Audio Sources)
C	Navigate any list by pressing up/down

Enter: Press the ‘Enter’ on the steering wheel to select options

Mode: To change the mode, Press the button repeatedly (FM, AM, Hard Drive, Alexa*, USB, Bluetooth, Ganna*, and Amazon Music*)

UP/DOWN: Press the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video Playing.

7.3 Home Screen

Home Screen Details

Home Screen is displayed when user press the Home icon.

This screen allows the user to have customizable widgets with various applications.

The tiles can be rearranged and edited based on the user preference.

The Tiles in home screen are as follow

Media Tile

Navigation Tile

Energy Tile

Clock Tile

Phone Tile

Fun and Work Tile

Calender Tile

Weather Tile

•

Widget which are available in CID is known as Tile.

•

For e.g., Energy, Clock, Navigation, Fun & work, Ambient Light, Weather, Media, Phone, Parking and Calender can be accessed through Home screen tile.

7.3.1 Energy Tile

The Energy Tile displays the progress of charging and discharging of the Vehicle. On a single touch of the tile it will launch Energy application.

7.3.2 Media Tile

The Media tile have the quick access to media player with various audio inputs.

On a single touch of the media tile it launches media player in full screen.

Media Player offers various audio sources like Radio, USB, Hard Disk, Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, Ganna, Amazon Music.

Media tile displays details of the media Audio such as Source, Previous and Next, Play, Pause icons.

Change to Previous

Change to Next

Pause/Play

7.3.3 Clock Tile

Clock tiles displays the current time and date.

The clock style and format can be altered from settings menu.

7.3.4 Weather Tile

Weather application is powered by Accuweather.

User can check weather condition in their vehicle location by using weather application.

It also shows hourly weather prediction.

We can also add different locations in Places tab and can get weather updates of those locations.

7.3.5 Navigation Tile

It displays a map based on the vehicle's GPS location.

Clicking on the navigation tile opens the home screen of the navigation app.

7.3.6 Fun and Work Tile

The Fun and Work tile allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications.

On a single touch the Fun and Work tile to open Video, Audio, Games, and Shop apps and user can choose any and use it.

7.3.7 Phone Tile

If no phone is paired, on a single touch to this tile it will says no phone connected and settings menu for Bluetooth connection.

When phone is connected to the CID via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth name will be available in the Phone tile.

Available options in the Phone Tile are

Favorites

Contacts

Settings

Favourites

On selecting favourites will open connected mobile devices favourite contacts.

Contacts

Contacts shortcut will open connected mobile devices contact list.

Setting

Settings shortcut will open connected mobile devices settings.

7.3.8 Calender Tile

Calendar Tile provides a quick overview of Calendar events.

On a single touch of the tile, Calendar application will be opened.

Phone which is configured with Me4U application Remainders, Events which are present in the Phone will be present in the Calendar app of the CID.

7.3.9 Home screen Edit

Widgets on the home screen can be added, removed, and reorganized according to the user's preference.

To do this, long-press any widget on the home screen to enter the "Edit Home Screen" menu.

A list of available widgets that can be added to the home screen will be displayed.

You can drag and drop them into empty slots to create a new widget or drop them into an existing slot to replace the current widget.

Widgets can be resized by tapping the widget resizer icon located at the top of the widget.

Tap the "Done" tab to exit and return to the home screen.

7.4 Quick Access Drawer Functionality

The Quick Access Drawer can be opened by swiping the screen from up to down.

Quick Access Drawer gives the user a swift way to access handy features like User profile, Valet Mode, SOS Call, Ask Mahindra, Roadside Assistance, notifications, Display OFF, Bluetooth, Hotspot, WIFI, Device List, Brightness, Power Saving and Settings.

7.4.1 User Profile

User can switch between various user profile saved in the vehicle.

User can also create and delete a user profile through this function.

Refer “User Profile application “ for more details.

PIN can be set for security purposes.

7.4.2 Valet Mode

To access the Valet, select the current user profile, as shown in the image.

Once you select Valet, the image below will be displayed. If you need to enable Valet, you can confirm the option.

Enter the PIN code if it has already been created; otherwise, you can create a new PIN code and enter it.

Allows the user to park the vehicle in a predefined location while giving the vehicle to valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.

Once the Valet Mode is enabled,

•

Screen feature will be restricted.

•

Media control will be disabled.

•

Speed limiter will be enforced.

•

Geofence will be activated.

•

Above conditions are not applicable, if user disables the valet mode.

•

Don’t activate the valet mode during vehicle service.

•

In the event of any security breach, theft, or unauthorized access while using Valet Mode, the manufacturer bears no liability for loss or damage. Users are responsible for safeguarding their PIN codes and ensuring that the valet function is activated only in secure environments.

7.4.3 SOS

SOS is available in the quick access drawer. It can be accessed by swiping down the CID.

Click on the SOS icon.

After clicking on the icon, a call is triggered from the vehicle to the 108 Emergency service via e-SIM.

The call is connected to a centralized emergency response center in your area.

Based on the information provided by the user, an appropriate emergency vehicle (ambulance, fire truck, or police) will be dispatched to your location.

Some CID features may not work while the SOS call is in progress.

7.4.4 Ask Mahindra

Ask Mahindra is available in the quick access drawer. It can be accessed by swiping down the CID.

Click on the Ask Mahindra icon.

After clicking on the icon, a call is triggered from the vehicle to the dedicated Mahindra Support Center via e-SIM.

A customer care agent will be assigned to the Ask Mahindra call.

User can use Ask Mahindra for guidance or assistance on using the features available in the vehicle, nearby workshops, roadside assistance, etc.

Some CID features may not work while the Ask Mahindra call is in progress.

7.4.5 Roadside Assistance (RSA)

Roadside Assistance is available in the quick access drawer and can be accessed by swiping down the CID.

Click on the Roadside Assistance icon.

After clicking on the icon, a call is triggered to the Roadside Assistance provider’s helpline via e-SIM.

The Roadside Assistance call will be directed to a customer care agent(e.g., the vehicle manufacturer, an insurance company, or an independent service provider).

Based on the problem and location, a technician or towing service will be dispatched to assist you.

The SOS feature operates via an e-SIM connection and depends on network availability. The manufacturer does not guarantee emergency call connectivity in areas with weak or no signal. Users should have alternative emergency contact methods available in case of network unavailability.

Some CID features may not work while the Roadside Assistance Mahindra call is in progress.

7.4.6 Notification

On single touch of Notification all it will display General Notifications, Warnings and Settings.

Clear All Options is provided to clear the Notifications in the screen.

7.4.7 Shortcuts – ON/OFF

Display OFF: If not required, the user can turn off the display (CID).

Bluetooth: The user can enable or disable the Bluetooth connection according to their needs.

On a short press of the Bluetooth icon in the Quick Access Drawer (QAD), it will turn ON/OFF the Bluetooth.

On a long press of the Bluetooth icon in the QAD, it will open the Bluetooth Settings screen.

Hotspot: The user can turn on the hotspot to connect other devices.

On a short press of the Hotspot icon in the QAD, it will turn ON/OFF the Hotspot.

On a long press of the Hotspot icon in the QAD, it will open the Hotspot Settings screen.

Wi-Fi: The user can turn on/off the WiFi.

On a short press of the WiFi icon in the QAD, it will turn ON/OFF the WiFi.

On a long press of the WiFi icon in the QAD, it will open the WiFi Settings screen.

Device List: User can view the list of devices, already connected to CID.

On a single touch to the Device list it will launch connectivity tab of settings screen.

Brightness: The user can adjust the display brightness by selecting the brightness icon.

On every tap the brightness will change by 25%. It has 4 brightness levels 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% .

On long pressing the shortcut will open display brightness tab.

Power Saving: The user can activate/Deactivate the Power Saving Mode.

On a short press of the Power Saving icon in the QAD, it will turn ON/OFF the Power saving mode.

On a long press of the Power Saving icon in the QAD, it will open the battery tab of Energy screen.

Setting: The user can easy access the setting options.

On a single touch Setting icon it will launch settings screen.

7.5 App Drawer

7.5.1 360° Camera

360-degree Camera View System assists the user during parking and during low speed maneuvering. 360 Degree Camera is provided with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the tailgate applique and on both exterior mirrors.

It provides access to the live feed from the 4 cameras mounted on the vehicle.

The 360 Camera automatically opens in 'R' mode.

When click on the 360° Camera icon, the below screen will appear.

Refer “Parking Assist System” chapter for more details.

7.5.2 Alexa

Alexa can be accessed through a single touch of Alexa Application in App Drawer.

Alexa is a virtual assistant AI, designed to perform tasks such as answering questions, playing music, and providing information through voice commands.

Users must have an Amazon account to access Alexa.

To enable Alexa, the user must have an Amazon account.

Refer Alexa under connectivity and Entertainment.

7.5.3 Android Auto

Android Auto - Wired

Android auto can be connected via USB cable using the USB port located on the centre console.

A pop up asking for the Android Auto connection To Launch and Not Now options.

On clicking Launch Android Auto is launched successfully.

Android Auto - Wireless

Both Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must be turned ON to connect wireless Android Auto.

Android Auto can be connected to your vehicle using Android’s Bluetooth and Wi-Fi in wireless mode.

Open the app drawer.

Select Android Auto.

Click on Add devices.

Select ‘Pair New Device’ then choose your Android device.

Select ‘Pair’ on both your Android device and the CID.

Select ‘Launch’ to enable Android Auto.

Android auto has successfully paired with BE 6 FE wirelessly.

Click on the ‘Add Devices’ tab.

It will open the Bluetooth connectivity screen, click on the ‘pair new device’.

List of nearby available Bluetooth devices will be displayed, click and select your required device.

Passkey will be displayed in CID and selected Android device, tap pair on both the screens.

Click on the launch, to enable Android Auto.

Android auto supported applications, installed in paired device can only be accessed through this function.

•

Manual Android Auto pairing is required for the first time pairing only.

•

Already paired Android devices, auto connect with Android Auto if the devices is in vehicles Bluetooth proximity, when the CID is on ON condition.

•

Android Auto supported applications installed in paired device can only be accessed through this function.

7.5.4 App Store

App Store feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

7.5.5 Apple Carplay

Apple CarPlay can be connected to your vehicle using a USB cable in wired mode.

CarPlay is a smarter, safer way to use your iPhone.

You can get directions, make calls, send and receive messages.

Apple Carplay - Wired

Apple CarPlay can be launched via a USB cable using the data transfer USB port located at the centre console.

The CID display updating to the Apple screen indicates the successful pairing of Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay supported applications, installed in paired iPhone can only be accessed through this function.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto rely on third-party updates and device compatibility. The manufacturer is not responsible for connectivity issues or feature limitations.

Apple Carplay - Wireless

Both Bluetooth and Wi-FI must be turned ON to connect wireless Apple CarPlay.

Click on the Apple CarPlay icon from the app drawer.

Click on the ‘Add Devices’ tab.

It will open the Bluetooth connectivity screen, click on the ‘pair new device’.

Select the vehicle Bluetooth name appearing in iPhone Bluetooth screen.

Passkey will be displayed in CID and iPhone screen, tap pair on both the screens.

Click on the ‘Yes’ tab in the CID screen.

Click on the ’Start Apple CarPlay’, to enable Apple CarPlay.

Click on the ’Start Apple CarPlay’, to enable Apple CarPlay.

•

Manual Apple CarPlay pairing is required for the first time pairing only.

•

Already paired iPhone devices, auto connect with CarPlay if the device is in vehicles Bluetooth proximity, when the CID is in ON condition.

•

Apple CarPlay supported applications installed in paired device can only be accessed through this function.

7.5.6 Calender

Calendar can be accessed through application drawer.

User can create the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination and Pickup Remainder by using calendar for their daily activities.

On clicking an event, its summary, location, contact number will be displayed.

Users can tap on the location icon to obtain a route map to that location.

Users can tap on the call icon to initiate a call from the connected mobile device.

Custom notes can be added to each event by tapping on the edit notes icon.

When an event or reminder time is imminent, a notiﬁcation is displayed on the home screen to inform the user about it.

Clicking the details tab will display a short summary.

Phone which is configured with Me4U application Reminders, Events which are present in the Phone will be present in the Calendar app of the CID.

7.5.7 Climate

Climate feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

User can use Climate application to control the Dual automatic temperature control in BE 6 FE.

Refer “Climate Control System” chapter for more detail.

7.5.8 Ecosence

Score

Ecosense provides an Eco score based on users driving habit categorized under 2 main criteria namely Acceleration and brake press.

Eco Coach:

Eco Coach can be turned on, which in turn provides a notiﬁcation in the DID whenever the user provides abrupt brake or accelerator input.

Trips

Trips provide a detailed summary of previous trips, including distance, time, average speed, Co2 saved, eﬃciency, top speed, etc.

Users can tap on the share icon to send a short recap of the trip to their mobile phone or save it as an image in the vehicle's MyDrive.

Analytics

Analytics provide a detailed comparison of various trips taken by the user, comparing data such as distance, time taken, average speed, top speed, energy regeneration, Co2 saved, energy consumed, cruise utilization, harsh braking, harsh acceleration, and overspeed, to achieve more eﬃcient usage of their vehicle.

7.5.9 Energy

Charge

You can check the reachable range, battery power, and expected charging time for each charge type.

•

The distance to empty is calculated based on the real-time electric energy efficiency while driving. The distance may change if the driving pattern changes.

•

Battery performance and range estimation depend on various factors such as driving habits and weather conditions. The company does not guarantee specific battery performance levels under all conditions. Any attempts to modify or tamper with battery management systems may void the warranty and pose safety risks.

Battery preconditioning:

Battery preconditioning adjusts the temperature of a vehicle's battery to optimize performance and eﬃciency, typically before charging or during extreme weather conditions.

Battery preconditioning can be turned ON/OFF for each charging cycle.

Charge Current:

The amount of input current during the charging process can be controlled at three levels: Low, Mid, and High.

Charge Percentage Limiter:

The percentage to which the vehicle can be charged in each charging cycle can be controlled using the slider provided.

If the vehicle reaches the set charge limit, the charging process will be turned oﬀ automatically by the vehicle itself.

The charge can't be limited below 30%.

If the user tries to reduce it below this value, an alert saying, 'Charge limit below 30% not possible' will be displayed.

Stop Charging:

When vehicle charging is in progress, it can be turned oﬀ by clicking the 'Stop Charging' button provided within the Energy app.

Battery:

The Battery section provides a detailed bar chart of energy consumed for functions such as driving, climate control, battery preconditioning, and other dependent functions across each trip and overall runtime.

Accumulated Battery:

It shows detailed values of charge cycles and charged kWh with respect to the share of two diﬀerent types of charging: AC and DC current.

Power saving mode:

Power saving mode provides setting to disable climate control and ambient lights when the vehicle's SOC reaches below 15%.

Manual enabling/disabling of power saving mode:

Power saving mode can be enabled manually by enabling the toggle button.

‘Power saving mode activated’ notiﬁcation will be displayed on successful enabling.

Power saving mode can be disabled manually by using the toggle button.

‘Power saving mode deactivated’ notiﬁcation will be displayed on successful disabling.

Schedule Charging (If Equipped)

Schedule provides user to save 2 pre defined scheduled charging sessions.

To configure a schedule click on the settings icon near respective schedules.

Select the day or frequency in which the charging needed to be performed and click on Next.

Enter the charging start time and charging end based on time or percentage of charge and click on Next.

7.5.10 Fun and Work

Fun and Work app can be accessed through the application drawer.

Fun and work consists of all 3rd party entertainment and communication applications.

User must have a valid account of respective applications to access the contents.

Data network from inbuilt E-sim will be used for the content streaming function.

The apps provided in it as subjected to changes without prior announcements.

The Fun and Work application allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications Such as Video, Audio, Games, and Shop apps.

All Apps

7.5.11 Gallery

Gallery app can be accessed through the application drawer.

The gallery application allows the user to view photos and videos stored on the hard drive and connected USB devices.

User can be able to browse photos/videos or recently added photos, videos and favorites.

The 'Select Source' option provided in the top right corner helps to switch between diﬀerent storage sources.

How to play video through Gallery.

The user can play video ﬁles on the CID screen when the vehicle is in Park Mode.

Select the 'Videos' tab from the library.

A list of available video ﬁles in the selected storage space will be displayed.

Click on the required video ﬁle

It will open in the media player with controls.

When the user tries to play a video while the vehicle is out of Park Mode, the following warning will be displayed, prompting the user to shift the viewing to another screen in the vehicle (BYOD).

7.5.12 Hard Drive

Hard Drive is the type of storage app that can be accessed through the application drawer.

Storage overview provides the ﬁle size occupancy of various types of ﬁles.

The hard drive displays ﬁles under their respective ﬁle type sub folders, namely Audio, Photos, Documents, and Videos.

The source selector provided at the top right can be used to switch between various storage sources.

To connect USB devices, users can use the DVR USB port provided inside the glove box storage.

How to copy ﬁles into Hard Drive:

Users can copy ﬁles to the hard drive from connected USB devices and vice versa.

Select the ﬁle type which you intend to copy into the drive.

Long press on the required ﬁles name and select them.

The 'Select All' option can also be used to select all the ﬁles in that folder.

Tap on the copy icon to initiate the ﬁle transfer.

File transfer progress based upon the progress percentage will be displayed as notiﬁcation.

After the completion of the ﬁle transfer, an 'Items successfully copied' notiﬁcation will be displayed.

How to delete ﬁles from Hard Drive:

Use the source selector option to select hard drive.

Select the ﬁle type which you intend to delete from the drive.

Long press on the required ﬁles name and select them.

The 'Select All' option can also be used to select all the ﬁles in that folder.

Tap on the Delete tab to initiate ﬁle deletion.

Tap 'Conﬁrm' to proceed with the deletion.

File deletion progress based upon the progress percentage will be displayed as notiﬁcation.

After the completion of the ﬁle deletion, an ‘successfully deleted’ notiﬁcation will be displayed.

7.5.13 Media

Media can be accessed through the application drawer.

Media

Shortcuts in the media player:

Volume Control:

The volume slider can be revealed by tapping on the volume icon provided in the top left corner.

The slider can be used to adjust the volume of the speakers.

Audio Settings:

The settings icon in the media application directs to the vehicle's audio settings.

Audio controls:

The media can be started or paused using the pause/play button.

Using the previous and next buttons, audio tracks can be changed.

Long press on previous and next button will help the user to rewind and forward the song.

Library:

The media player displays media ﬁles organized into sections based on Recently Added, Playlists, Genres, Artists, Albums, and Songs.

Click on any section to view the ﬁles organized in that speciﬁc order.

Songs can be played by clicking directly on them from the list.

Select Audio Source:

The media player oﬀers various audio source options, namely FM, AM, Bluetooth, Alexa, hard drive, USB, Amazon Music, and Gaana.

Users must have valid accounts to play music from Amazon music and Ganna.

FM/AM player:

FM/AM radio can be accessed from the audio source selection.

Now playing shows the current active FM station which is playing.

All stations contain a list of stations available for the user based on his Geo location.

The Favorites list consists of the stations that the user has marked as favorites for easy access.

7.5.14 Navigation

Navigation

The navigation system in the BE 6 FE is powered by Mappls Auto.

Mappls Auto will only function when internet connectivity is available.

How to initiate a route map:

The user can search for their desired location using the search bar.

Select the desired location from the search results. The current location will be determined using the vehicle's GPS.

A summary of the searched location will be displayed. By clicking the direction button, a route map with live traﬃc details will be shown.

Click on the 'Start' tab to access the Navigation screen.

If the user wishes to exit the current navigation, they can click the exit button.

Toll cost:

The toll cost section displays a list of tolls along the current navigation route, including the toll fee and the estimated arrival time at each toll.

Send Navigation to vehicle:

Tapping on "Send Navigation to Vehicle" will transfer the current navigation route to the Driver Information Display (DID).

Send Navigation to mobile:

Tapping on "Send Navigation to Mobile" will transfer the current navigation route to the registered Me4U device.

Save Routes:

The "Save Route" option allows you to save the current navigation route.

Traﬃc OFF:

Tapping on this option will disable live traﬃc details on the currently active navigation.

Direction List:

The direction list will show the turn-by-turn navigation of the current route in sequential order.

EV Charging station:

Tapping on the EV charging station will display all available EV chargers along the current route.

Restaurants:

Tapping the Restaurants icon will display all available restaurants along the current route.

Toilets:

Tapping the toilet icon will display all public restrooms along the current route.

GPS:

Tapping the GPS icon will display the current satellite connectivity status, along with the vehicle's latitude and longitude co-ordinates.

Saved Places:

Saved places and routes can be viewed under this option.

Navigation Settings:

Navigation Settings allow users to personalize and adjust preferences for route planning, map displays, and other navigation features.

When the battery percentage feature is enabled, the system will account for the range, excluding the battery state of charge (SOC) at the user-deﬁned thresholds of 30%, 50%, and 70%, by the time the destination is reached.

It will also display available chargers along the route once the set threshold is reached.

Navigation Settings:

When enabled, only fast chargers available along the route will be shown.

Range bound:

When enabled, destinations can only be set within the vehicle's available battery range.

Display nearby charging station:

When enabled, charging stations that are nearby but not along the navigation route will also be displayed.

Avoid in navigation route:

These settings allow users to exclude tolls, highways, and ferries from the navigation route.

Lane guidance:

Lane guidance provides a clear view of upcoming complex intersections, helping users anticipate lane changes.

Junction View:

This feature displays a realistic 3D representation of a highway intersection, highlighting lanes and exits for a clearer view ahead.

Navigation Voice:

The turn-by-turn navigation voice language can be switched between English and Hindi.

Visual Alerts:

The visual alert provides on-screen notiﬁcations for traﬃc, safety, and real-time road condition updates.

Units:

Users can switch the unit from kilometers per hour (Kms/hr) to miles per hour (Miles/Hr).

Manage Maps:

These options allow user to manage and update the maps.

Search Nearby Option:

By selecting "Search Near," users can view nearby locations such as post oﬃces, banks, spas, toilets, hospitals, EV charging stations, transportation facilities, and more.

7.5.15 Notification

Notiﬁcation feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

The Notification Centre displays alerts, updates, and notifications from apps, messages, and system events in one centralized location, allowing users to quickly view and manage notifications.

The notification drawer can be accessed by swiping down on the CID screen.

Tap on the notification count to access the Notification Centre.

General notifications related to the vehicle will be displayed under the notifications tab.

The "Clear All" option can be used to reset the notification list.

Notifications related to alerts and warnings will be displayed under the "Warnings" tab. Tapping on such a notification will show the details of the warning received.

Notification settings, such as notification chime, showing new notifications in the status bar, and displaying incoming notifications, can be turned on or off.

7.5.16 Performance App

The vehicle's acceleration and adventure-related functions can be tracked and monitored through the Performance application.

It has two sections: Racing and Oﬀroad.

Racing:

Racing focuses on displaying the vehicle's acceleration and track-oriented data.

G-Meter:

The G-Meter displays the real-time G-force experienced while driving the vehicle.

TPMS:

The TPMS indicator displays the live values of tire pressure and temperature.

Acceleration time for 0-60 km/h and 0-100 km/h can be measured using this option.

Outdoor:

The Oﬀroad section mainly focuses on aspects of the vehicle other than its performance.

Compass:

The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle is currently traveling.

Power ﬂow:

The Power Flow display shows the live power usage of the HV battery.

TDMS:

The Tyre Direction Monitoring System informs the driver about the current position of the front tires in relation to the steering position.

Altimeter:

The altimeter displays the vehicle's current traveling altitude.

The PAS sensor shows obstacles in the vehicle's proximity.

7.5.17 Phone

Phone feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

Phone app displays contacts, SMS, recants, favourite, contacts, keypad from the connected mobile device.

When no mobile device is connected to the vehicle, the Phone application will prompt the user to connect a mobile device.

When phone is connected to the CID via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth name will be available.

Available Options are,

Favorites

Contacts

Settings Menu

Recents

Keypad

SMS

Recents

It displays the recent call list from the user's mobile device.

Favourites

It displays the contacts that are marked as favorites on the user's mobile device.

Contacts

Contacts displays a list of available contacts from the user's mobile device.

Keypad

The keypad can be used to manually dial phone numbers.

SMS

SMS messages received on the user's mobile device will be displayed under the SMS tab.

7.5.18 User Profile

The user proﬁle allows you to conﬁgure and manage various user proﬁles in the vehicle.

Click on the proﬁle option in the top right corner.

The BE 6 FE can be conﬁgured with up to 3 user proﬁles, in addition to Guest and Valet modes.

Click on "Add Proﬁle" and tap on the "Start Setup" tab.

The system will prompt the user to enter the master PIN from the owner’s manual.

The master PIN is 1234.

After successful veriﬁcation of the master PIN, click on the "Create New PIN" tab.

Create a 4-digit new PIN for the current proﬁle and conﬁrm it.

Enter the desired proﬁle name and set a proﬁle picture.

Click on "Conﬁrm" to complete the proﬁle setup process.

The newly created proﬁle will be activated with the default settings for seats, lighting, climate control, and music.

Re-enter the newly created proﬁle PIN to access the proﬁle.

7.6 My Vehicle

My vehicle contains vehicle controls like TPMS, Carpet lamps, Drive modes, service mode, DRL, etc.

7.6.1 Drive Modes

Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go.

The drive modes can be selected through Centre Information Display (CID) in the below path:

Go to App drawer>> All Apps >> My Vehicle >> Drive Modes

Shortcut: Press drive mode button in ICC.

You can select from multiple drive modes options any time during your Drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode when the situation calls for it. Whether you're looking for an relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive Mode allows you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique driving style.

The system is incredibly easy to use, simply choose your choice of "Drive Mode" and experience 4 different vehicles in one.

•

Default Mode

•

Range Mode

•

Everyday Mode

•

Race Mode

•

Custom Mode

Refer Drive Modes under Starting and driving chapter for more details.

7.6.2 Exterior

Tyres

TPMS-related functions and operations can be turned ON or OFF in the Tyre section.

Tyre Fill Assist:

When Tire Fill Assist is enabled, an audible chime will sound once the desired tire pressure is reached during inﬂation.

Auto Learn:

The Auto Learn function automatically learns the signals from the TPMS sensors whenever the user swaps or changes one or more tires on the vehicle.

TPMS Manual Learning:

TPMS manual learning can be activated using this option, and a chime will sound to prompt the user to begin the manual TPMS learning procedure.

Refer emergencies chapter for more details.

Locks

Controls and functions related to the vehicle's locking system can be turned ON or OFF in the Locks section.

Driver door unlock:

When this function is enabled, a single press of the unlock button on the key fob will unlock only the driver’s door. The remaining doors will unlock with a second press.

Lock Charger:

The charger can be locked in two modes:

•

Always.

•

While charging.

Mirrors

Controls and functions related to the Outer rear-view mirror (ORVM) and Interior rear-view mirror (IRVM) can be managed in the Mirrors section.

Blind view monitor:

When the Blind View Monitor is enabled, the video feed from the respective 360-degree side camera is displayed on the Driver Information Display when the right or left turn indicator is activated.

Auto dimming IRVM:

This option allows the auto-dimming function of the IRVM to be turned ON or OFF.

When enabled, it automatically dims the mirror to reduce the glare from oncoming traﬃc.

Refer “convenience” chapter for more details.

Lights

Functions and features related to the vehicle's lighting system can be accessed in the Lights section.

DRL:

The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can be manually turned ON or OFF using this option.

Carpet lamps (If Equipped):

The function of the carpet lamps provided in the vehicle exterior can be turned OFF and ON using this option.

The carpet lamp in the vehicle can be conﬁgured to project diﬀerent patterns.

The user can switch between the two default patterns provided. Additionally, more patterns can be accessed through the Software Deﬁned Vehicle (SDV) function.

Refer “convenience” chapter for more details.

Service

Settings related to vehicle maintenance and service can be accessed in the Service section.

Service Mode:

Service mode should be enabled when the vehicle is being serviced. It disables all remote functions available in the vehicle.

7.6.3 Interior

Safety

Functions and features related to user safety can be enabled or disabled in the Safety section.

Passenger airbag ON:

The front passenger airbag deployment can be turned ON based on the occupancy of the passenger seat.

A prompt conﬁrming the activation of the passenger airbag will be displayed. Click on "Conﬁrm" to enable the passenger airbag.

The passenger airbag turned-on indicator light will glow on the center console.

Passenger airbag OFF:

The front passenger airbag deployment can be turned OFF based on the occupancy of the passenger seat.

A prompt conﬁrming the deactivation of the passenger airbag will be displayed. Click on "Conﬁrm" to disable the passenger airbag.

The passenger airbag turned-oﬀ indicator light will glow on the center console.

Refer “Seats and Safety” chapter for more details.

Convenience

Features and functions related to user convenience can be accessed in the Convenience section.

Wireless charging system:

Wireless charging pad can be turn ON/OFF using this setting.

Refer “connectivity and Entertainment” chapter for more details.

7.7 Setting

Settings are categorized into four distinct types, such as,

General Setting

Display Setting

Audio Setting

Connectivity Setting

7.7.1 General Settings

System language:

Using system language settings user can change CID interface language.

Units Setting

The user can choose between Metric, Imperial, and Custom units to calculate various values like speed, distance, etc.

In custom mode, the user can set an individual unit system for each value, such as speed, distance, etc.

Time and date Setting

Set time Automatically:

If users have enabled 'Set time automatically,' the time and date will be adjusted automatically based on the vehicle's GPS location.

Set time and date manually:

Users can set the date and time manually according to their preferences.

Set time zone:

Users can manually select a diﬀerent time zone to adjust the time accordingly.

Date Format:

User can fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY format.

24 Hours clock Format:

The user can switch between 24-hour and 12-hour clock formats.

Clock theme

The user can select from 3 predefined clock themes based on 3 different drive modes.

Factory Reset

Factory reset can be used to revert all the CID settings to their default values.

Once factory reset starts it can't be recalled or stopped.

Factory reset is not possible when the vehicle is in running condition.

System Updates

Users can access system updates for their vehicle in this section.

Auto Download updates:

Auto Download Updates allows automatically download the latest software or system updates without requiring manual intervention from the user.

Auto Download is possible when the vehicle is not in Driving state.

7.7.2 Display Settings

Display theme can be set either as day, night or auto based on users' preference.

The Driver Information Display (DID) brightness can be adjusted individually based on the user's preference.

The Center information display (CID) brightness can be adjusted individually based on the user's preference.

The brightness for backlit buttons and switches can be adjusted individually based on the user's preference.

7.7.3 Audio settings

Sound and Volume

Volume of media, warning, phone, notiﬁcation, speech, navigation can be altered and controlled individually.

Vehicle noise compensation (VNC+)

Vehicle Noise Compensation (VNC) automatically adjusts the audio volume in response to road noise, ensuring optimal listening comfort by maintaining consistent sound levels inside the vehicle.

VNC can be adjusted in 3 levels namely low, mid, high.

Feedback on touch:

Users can enable Feedback on touch to receive touch feedback when interacting with CID screens, such as visual changes, sounds, or vibrations, to conﬁrm an action.

Sound Experience

3D Immersive:

Quantum Logic Immersion (QLI) delivers a 3D audio experience with added height and space, improving in-car sound.

It keeps the original recording intact, without adding artiﬁcial eﬀects like reverb.

We can increase or decrease the intensity of the QLI using the slider ( - to +).

Studio:

Studio mode provides an audio experience as if the audience is in a recording studio.

In this mode, the front high speakers are disabled to achieve a studio experience.

VenueScapes:

VenueScapes is an immersive sound technology or audio system designed to simulate the acoustics and ambiance of a speciﬁc venue or environment.

It creates a dynamic, spatial audio experience that replicates the feeling of being in a particular place, such as a concert hall, theater, or stadium, enhancing the listener's sense of presence and realism.

BE 6 FE has 3 VenueScapes locations namely, Boston Symphony Hall.

Royal Opera House, Mumbai.

Wembley Stadium – London.

Sound Field Position:

User can adjust the sound balance of speakers according to their preferences.

Full Cabin mode can be enabled to evenly balance the audio throughout the entire cabin.

Driver mode can be enabled to direct the audio speciﬁcally to the driver’s seat.

The sound ﬁeld position can be manually adjusted to focus on any desired place inside the cabin. The center button can be used to reset it to the default position.

Equalizer:

Equalizer allows the user to balance Bass, Mid, Treble settings.

In addition to this, the subwoofer volume can also be controlled using it.

VESS (SonicSuite):

On turning VESS interior, interior speakers will produce sound similar to IC engines cabin noise to provide a satisﬁed driving experience.

On turning VESS Exterior , exterior mounted VESS speakers will produce sound like IC engines noise to alert the travelers around the BE 6 FE that a vehicle is nearby.

Refer VESS under connectivity and Entertainment

7.7.4 Connectivity settings

Bluetooth Settings:

The vehicle's Bluetooth function can be easily toggled on or oﬀ using this setting.

Pairing devices with vehicle Bluetooth:

Turn ON Bluetooth on your smartphone or device and ensure it is in pairing mode.

Click on the "Pair New Device" option to scan for nearby Bluetooth devices.

Choose your device from the list of available Bluetooth devices.

Click "Pair" on both the CID and your device to complete the pairing process.

The paired device will be listed under the connected devices.

Wi-Fi Settings:

The vehicle's Wi-Fi function can be easily toggled on or oﬀ using this setting.

Available networks:

The list of available Wi-Fi networks near the vehicle will be displayed.

Enter the Wi-Fi password to connect to the selected network.

Click on the settings icon to disconnect and forget the network.

Add networks:

Users can also Wi-Fi network using the SSID.

Saved networks:

The list of all the saved Wi-Fi network can be accessed here.

Wi-Fi Hotspot:

Users can enable the hotspot to share the internet from the vehicle's e-SIM with passengers.

A username and password can be set for the created hotspot and shared in the form of a QR code.

7.8 Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) (If Equipped)

Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) allows customers to connect their personal mobile phones or tablets with their vehicle to enabling features such as mirroring the Vehicle Information Display and controlling the vehicle’s HVAC system.

The front row seats are equipped with a BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) docking station, designed for ultimate convenience. With the included USB Type-C port, you can securely dock your mobile phone or tablet, allowing you to charge your device while enjoying your own content, ensuring a seamless and enjoyable experience.

Users can connect their personal device to the vehicle through the Me4U application, either by logging into their Me4U account or by proceeding without login.

For your safety, please avoid using the BYOD feature with the gripper while the vehicle is in motion.

The BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) is an accessory part and is not provided as a standard feature with the vehicle.

•

Ensure the BYOD unit attachment is securely installed before use.

•

Exposed clamping can cause severe injuries, always use the Magnetic unit with entertainment unit only

•

Do not attempt to install or remove the mobile unit attachment while the vehicle is in motion.

•

Confirm that the device is compatible with Magnetic safe before use.

•

Using incompatible devices may result in damage to the mobile unit or the BYOD attachment

•

Avoid using the mobile unit attachment for holding devices other than mobile units to prevent accidents and damage.

•

Do not exceed the 1.5 kg weight limit for the attachment.

•

Ensure that no items are hung on the mobile unit attachment as it is not designed to support additional weight and may become unstable or damaged.

All the BYOD connection are established over Wi-Fi protocol.

Two BYOD devices can be connected concurrently.

Theatre mode enables to cast the same screen in all devices. When vehicle is in driving condition, theater mode gets disabled for CID.

Connect to vehicles Hotspot:

•

Go to settings >> Connectivity >> Wi-Fi Hotspot

•

Either scan the QR code displayed or manually enter the password to connect your device with vehicles Hotspot.

Enable In-car experience

•

Go to settings >> Connectivity >> Wi-Fi Hotspot >> In-car experience

•

Turn ON the toggle bar to enable BYOD function.

With Me4U Account

•

Open Me4U application on your mobile phone.

•

Click In-Car experience option.

Without Me4U Account

•

Open Me4U application on your mobile phone.

•

Click In-Car experience option.

After select In-Car experience option, the landing screen will visible on your connected BYOD device.

7.8.1 Landing Screen

A	Current Range	D	HVAC Temperature
B	Current SOC value	E	App Drawer
C	Volume Control	F	Return to Mobile App

Return to Mobile App

To return to the Me4U home screen, simply tap on the ‘Return to Mobile App’ tab on the landing screen.

On tapping the centre of landing screen, the Climate Control Screen will open in full screen.

7.8.2 App Drawer

BYOD app drawer can be accessed from the BYOD landing screen.

The following options can be accessed through BYOD app drawer.

•

Climate Control System

•

Screen Mirroring

7.8.3 Climate Controls

HVAC system can be access in the climate control screen.

A	AQI Indicator	G	Rear A/C (ON/OFF)
B	Air Ionizer Indicator	H	A/C (ON/OFF)
C	Auto Modes	I	Power ON/OFF
D	Face Mode	J	SET Temperature
E	Foot Mode	K	Blower Speed control
F	Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode

Power ON/OFF: Touch to turn on/off climate control system

Auto Modes: Touch to turn on/off auto mode. There are 3 auto modes - Auto 1 , Auto 2 and Auto 3. Each auto mode will have different blower speeds in the increasing order. i.e, Auto mode 1 will have lower blower speeds, Auto mode 2 will have medium blower speeds and Auto mode 3 will have higher blower speeds.

In these auto modes, based on the user set temperature, other modes are automatically adjusted to attain desired comfort inside the vehicle.

In extreme high/low ambient conditions, Blower speed will be set higher even in Auto 1 mode, to meet the requirements. Once the set temperature is attained in the cabin, blower speed will be reduced.

AQI Indicator: AQI indicator displays Air Quality Index value inside the cabin.

VR LED Indicatior (If Equipped): “Air filter ON” indicates the air VR LED is working to purify and remove the bad odor from the air.

Recirculation: Touch to toggle between fresh air mode and recirculation mode. In recirculation mode air inside the vehicle will recirculate instead of the outside air, which will help the vehicle cool faster. In fresh air mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to cool/hear the cabin.

Air distribution modes: Touch on the desired mode of face/foot to direct airflow towards face/upper body or foot/ lower body. This adjustment is available for both driver and co-driver shown on respective side in the climate control screen.

2nd Row A/C : Touch to turn on/off air conditioning system for 2nd row seated passengers.

A/C: Touch to turn on/off air conditioning. Turning it off will allow only the blower to run with the existing temperature.

Blower Speed Control: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase the blower speed between 1 to 8.

SET Temperature: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase temperature. This option is available on both driver and codriver side.

The driver and co‑driver HVAC temperature cannot be controlled separately.

7.8.4 Screen Mirroring

Screen mirroring option can be used to control your entire PID screen through connected BYOD device.

The PID screen mirroring will be enable after select the ‘screen mirroring option’ on your device and can be used to access the following PID applications.

•

Fun&Work

•

Gallery

•

LiveYourMode

•

Media

Fun&Work

Fun and Work app can be accessed through the application drawer.

Fun and work consists of all 3rd party entertainment and communication applications.

User must have a valid account of respective applications to access the contents.

Data network from inbuilt E-sim will be used for the content streaming function, Wi-Fi connection can also be used to access it.

For more details, refer CID chapter.

Gallery

Gallery app can be accessed through the application drawer.

The gallery application allows the user to view photos and videos stored on the hard drive and connected USB devices.

For more details, refer CID chapter.

LiveYourMood

Live your Mood can be accessed through the application drawer.

Creating a relaxation mood inside a vehicle can significantly enhance the driving experience, making it more comfortable and stress-free, whether you’re on a long trip or simply commuting.

For more details, Refer CID chapter.

Media

Media can be accessed through the application drawer.

The media application allows the user to control entire Audio system. Example: Sound experience, Volume adjustments, VESS (Sonicsuite), etc.,

For more details, refer CID chapter.

Setting

Vehicle Settings can be accessed throught Media player settings.

for more details on vehicle settings ,please refer CID chapter.

User can access only PID screen setting.

Screen Mirror Refresh

If you’re facing any lagging issue while using screen mirroring feature, just touch the ‘refresh icon’ which is located at top right corner.

If you want to turn OFF the screen mirroring feature, just touch the ‘close icon’ which is located at top right corner.

7.8.5 Theatre mode

Through theatre mode user can cast his video across CID, PID and 2 connected BYOD devices.

It can be triggered through media player playing in any of the vehicle display or connected BYOD displays.

If Theatre mode is triggered from CID display it will turn OFF the media play back when vehicle SBW is shifted to R or D mode..

8 Starting and Driving

8.1 General Driving Precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

•

Please read this manual carefully, before driving your vehicle.

•

Before each driving cycle, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system.

•

While driving, if you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you observe any concerns, or if any telltales illuminate or buzzers sound, park / stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. If unable to identify the cause, vacate the vehicle premises and contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

•

Never overload or improperly load your vehicle.

•

Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices.

•

Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres.

•

Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits.

•

While moving backwards, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle.

•

Your vehicle if equipped with skyroof, it is not recommended for loading on the roof. For variants with normal roof, loading on roof raises the vehicle’s center of gravity, making it unstable.

•

When driving off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury or expensive damage to battery pack and suspension.

•

Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes.

•

If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another
(Eg:. from concrete to gravel / sand / mud / snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs.

•

Be extremely careful when driving on slippery pavements such as loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.

•

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, and avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed and controlled steering. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly while returning to the road surface, you may lose control.

•

In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.

Driving for extended periods in heavy rain without braking can result in delayed reaction times when brakes are finally applied.

While parking and leaving the vehicle for extended period of time in extreme cold or hot environment the high voltage and low voltage battery may experience noticeable energy loss.

So it is responsibility of the user to ensure sufficient battery charge according to the duration of parking. During the such situations it is always recommended to leave the vehicle with minimum 80% charge.

8.2 Safety Tips - Before Driving your Vehicle

Simple steps to get your vehicle started and ready to drive:

Before entering your vehicle:

•

Inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle for any signs of damage, leaks, loose parts, or debris.

•

Ensure all windows, mirrors, lights, and tyres are in good condition.

•

Check the area under vehicle after an overnight parking for brake fluid or other fluid leaks.

Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center if required.

Before Starting your vehicle:

•

Check energy level on SOC bar and digital SOC display. Ensure that there is enough charge for your planned journey.

•

If vehicle is parked for charging, turn off the power supply. Remove charging gun from vehicle and the plug from the wall socket. Roll the cable and keep it in the dedicated slot of the vehicle.

•

Ensure all doors are securely closed, latched, and locked from both inside and outside.

•

Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat / steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion.

•

Ensure that the interior rear view mirror (IRVM) and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.

•

Have someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat.

•

Check for tyres, air pressure before starting the vehicle. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.

Do not ignore the EV warning lamp and service warning lamp. Ignoring the warning lamp may damage the electrical power train components.

Visit the Authorized Mahindra Service Centre at the earliest.

•

Start the vehicle (Drive enable) only when seated in the driver’s seat with seatbelt secured.

•

Press the Start/Stop switch once to turn the ignition ON and then press the brake pedal and Start/Stop switch simultaneously to drive enable the vehicle.

•

Engage D/R mode by referring “shift by wire lever” section.

•

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) will be released once gear shifter is changed from park mode to R/N/D mode. Use only your right leg for applying accelerator and brake pedal.

•

Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will move slowly, when the brake pedal is released, if the selector lever is in any position other than ‘P’ or ‘N‘ This is called the creep function.

Creep function will not work in D/R mode, if EPB is engaged.

•

Before shifting to reverse, ensure your vehicle is stationary. Then, move the shifter lever to reverse [R] mode, gently press the accelerator, and drive backward.

When SOC level of your battery pack reduces to less than 15% SOC, system activates “Power Save Mode” and the vehicle performance is reduced.

Operate brake pedal and accelerator pedal with your right foot only.

While driving, if you remove your foot from accelerator pedal without pressing brake pedal, you will feel partial regenerative braking. This is normal and is attributed to vehicle’s regenerative braking that will re-charge the battery pack for an extra drive range.

Always ensure SOC level is sufficient for desired travel distance. Avoid driving below 15% State of Charge as vehicle might stop at any point. Find nearest charging station to charge your vehicle.

Adapt your driving style to avoid excessive energy consumption. High speeds will reduce your vehicle’s range.

On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep function. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal.

8.3 Start/Stop Switch

The Start/Stop Switch activates or deactivates the vehicle’s electrical systems. Pressing the Switch powers up the vehicle’s drivetrain and dashboard systems.

Start/Stop Switch positions: To operate the start/stop switch to its intended function, key fob should be placed in the key fob tray.

If any fault identified by the system in the start/stop switch, an alert would be provided in the DID. Please visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately to rectify the problem.

If there is a failure in the start/stop switch while driving, that driving cycle can be completed, depending on the severity of the failure. Please visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center to rectify the problem immediately.

•

Ignition ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the start/stop Switch when it is in OFF condition, without depressing the brake pedal and with the key fob inside the vehicle.

Status LED in the start/stop Switch will turn Red to indicate the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for drive enabling.

•

Drive enable the vehicle: After turning ignition ON, press the brake pedal. SSS LED illumination changes from red to green colour. Now press SSS to drive enable the vehicle.

If start/stop Switch is pressed without pressing the brake pedal, drive will not enable and the ignition turns OFF.

If the start/stop Switch is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the drive enable. This is normal and not to be taken as a fault.

Never press the start/stop Switch while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the vehicle turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.

Once the drive is enabled, it would not stop even if the key fob is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat, always ensure start/stop Switch is in OFF position and always take the smart key with you. Vehicle safety and security would be affected if these precautions are not followed.

•

Ignition OFF: To turn off the ignition stop the vehicle and press the start/stop Switch once. LED in the start/stop Switch illuminates in white color for few second and turns OFF to indicate the OFF position.

If the vehicle or drive enable is not switching off by pressing the start/stop Switch (one press), press and hold the start/stop Switch for more than 5 second. On doing so, the vehicle’s ignition will turn off. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center at the earliest.

•

Emergency stop: To turn the ignition OFF in an emergency, press and hold the start/stop Switch for more than 5 second. On doing so, the vehicle ignition off will happen.

Repeatedly using the emergency stop may cause the switch or other components to malfunction. Please contact a Mahindra Authorized Dealer for assistance.

8.3.1 Back Up Start

When start/stop Switch is pressed in a key fob battery low condition, the key fob may not be detected, then system will display the below error messages in DID (even with key fob inside the vehicle) and SSS LED blinks in red colour for 5 times.

Keep the key fob in the dedicated tray (beneath the arm rest) and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the IGN and LED changes to permanent red.

•

In case of key fob battery low alert, change the key fob battery by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.

•

If vehicle is parked near to electric charging stations / Transformers / High-tension lines, key fob may malfunction like key not detecting warning, even when key is inside and user is unable to start the vehicle due to radio frequency interface.

•

Do not keep the key fob on wireless charger.

8.3.2 Start Stop Switch and Smart Key Warning

•

If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the Start/Stop Switch while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.

•

Still, if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Centre.

•

If the electronics Steering Wheel not getting lock even all locking conditions are satisfy then ESCL will display this warning.

•

This warning will be displayed in the DID, if ESCL unit has system learning failure. Pease contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center to have the system checked.

•

A warning would be displayed in the DID, if the steering wheel lock unit has system failure, in this case please contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center to check system failure.

Avoid trying to forcibly unlock the steering wheel.

•

In ignition ON or drive enabled condition this alert would be displayed in the DID, if the key is not detected inside the vehicle or far away from the driver which is not in detectable position.

When this alert is displayed in DID, chirp sound is heard 5 times along with hazard blinking 5 times.

•

In ignition OFF condition this alert would be displayed in the DID, when key fob is not getting detected by the system. Users need to keep the key in the armrest key fob tray and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.

When this alert is displayed in DID, SSS LED blinks in red color for 5 times.

•

The warning will be triggered when key fob battery is low.

8.4 Electronic Steering Column Lock (ESCL)

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock.

The steering wheel locks when the start/stop Switch is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened or vehicle locking or 30 second after start/stop Switch changes to OFF position.

If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you close the driver door, on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by toggling Start/Stop Switch).

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to take the vehicle to nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

8.5 Shift by Wire Lever

Shift by wire lever enables you to choose your desired drive direction. Shift pattern is integrated in the gear shifter and selected gear illuminates in vehicle ON condition.

To change the mode, press the brake pedal and shift the lever to the desired position.

8.5.1 Park Mode (‘P’ Mode)

•

Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting into Park mode.

•

To shift the mode to P mode, press the P button while pressing the brake pedal.

•

The vehicle will automatically go to ‘P’ mode from R or D or N modes, once the ignition is turned off.

Do not press the park button when the vehicle is in motion unless it is an emergency situation. This can cause serious mechanical failures.

After the vehicle is stopped, always ensure the vehicle is in park mode, and turn the vehicle OFF.

Park Mode Auto Shift:

The vehicle shifts to P mode for safety reasons under the following conditions:

•

When the vehicle is turned OFF with the gear in R or D or N modes.

•

When the driver door is open with the shift by lever in Neutral mode and the vehicle is turned OFF.

•

Vehicle is standstill in ignition ON condition, drive is enabled/disabled, gear is out of P position and driver door is open.

•

Vehicle is standstill in ignition ON condition, drive is enabled/disabled, gear is out of P position and bonnet is open.

8.5.2 Reverse Mode (‘R’ Mode)

This mode is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction.

To engage the reverse mode directly from D mode, press the brake and then push the lever forward twice.

When the vehicle is stopped in R mode, if the driver door is open the gear will automatically shift to P mode.

However, if the vehicle is in motion, the gear will not automatically shift to P mode to prevent gear damage.

Always come to the standstill condition before engaging the R mode.

Regeneration won’t happen in ‘R’ mode.

8.5.3 Neutral Mode (‘N’ Mode)

To engage the Neutral mode directly from D mode, push the lever forward once.

Always press the brake pedal, when you are shifting from N mode to other modes.

When the vehicle is stopped in N mode, the gear will automatically shift to P mode.

In this mode, accelerator pedal won’t respond.

Refer Emergency chapter for the procedure and precautions to be taken, if the vehicle has to be manually pushed in Neutral.

Pushing the vehicle in N mode may permanently damage the electric motor.

In neutral mode, always engage park mode before leaving the vehicle to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.

8.5.4 Drive Mode (‘D’ Mode)

This position enables you to drive in forward direction.

To engage the D mode from P mode, press the brake and then push the lever twice in backward direction.

When the vehicle is stopped in D mode, if the driver door is open the gear will automatically shift to P mode.

However, if the vehicle is in motion, the gear will not automatically shift to P mode for safety reasons.

In gradients, when the vehicle brake is released and accelerator is not pressed, there might be a slight roll back before the creep is able to push front.

Always press the accelerator pedal in gradients for moving the vehicle, usage of creep function in gradients is not recommended.

When the drive is enabled and “R”/”D” mode is engaged, be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed, otherwise the vehicle will move.

It is not recommended to drive down slopes in “N” or “P” mode, even if the motor is not running.

To prevent the vehicle from inadvertently moving, engage the parking brake and press the “P” button after the vehicle has stopped.

Abusing the gear shift lever will result in the warranty being voided.

8.5.5 Parking the Vehicle

After stopping the vehicle, select Park (P) position (confirm by checking the gear indicator in the DID) while depressing the brake pedal.

Turn the ignition OFF.

Check any warning message / chime while moving out of the vehicle.

8.5.6 Gear Shift Pattern

Current Gear	Target Gear	Action	Drive Enable Status	Other Pre-conditions
P	N	Pull or Push once	Yes/No	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 5 km/h
R	P	Press Park Switch	Yes	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 2 km/h
	N	Pull once	Yes	Brake pedal pressed
	D	Pull twice	Yes	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 2 km/h
N	P	Press Park Switch	Yes/No	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 2 km/h
	R	Push once	Yes	If vehicle speed < 5 km/h, brake pedal pressed If vehicle speed > 5 km/h, previously vehicle in R (brake pedal pressing not required)
	D	Pull once	Yes	If vehicle speed < 5 km/h, brake pedal pressed If vehicle speed > 5 km/h, previously vehicle in D (brake pedal pressing not required)
D	P	Press Park Switch	Yes	Brake pedal pressed, vehicle speed < 2 km/h
	N	Push once	Yes	-
	R	Pull twice	Yes	If vehicle speed < 5 km/h, brake pedal pressed
Shifting from D to R or R to D modes is not recommended when the vehicle is in motion. If the gear lever is moved from D to R or R to D when the vehicle is in motion, neutral mode will be enabled, which is normal.

Do’s and Don’ts:

Do’s	Don’ts
Moving from Static to R or D mode
When moving out of “N” position, press brake pedal and then gently move the shift forward or backward	Please avoid placing your body weight on the shifter lever
Operating Shifter Lever
The shifter lever should be gently operated for drive mode change	The shifter lever should not be operated with excessive force, unlike in conventional vehicles
The shifter lever should only be pulled or pushed in forward or backward direction to change the drive modes	Do not push or pull the shifter lever towards left or right
	Do not press the park button and shift to any other modes simultaneously
Operating Park Switch
Press the park button only when the vehicle is completely stopped and brake pedal is pressed	Do not press the park button when the vehicle is in motion
	Do not allow children to operate the shifter
	Don’t keep liquid items near shifter. Liquid spillage may result in shift lever malfunction or damage

8.6 Creep Function

Creep function helps in easy movement of the vehicle in heavy traffic, when the following conditions are met:

1. Vehicle is in stand still condition and drive is enabled.

2. Gear mode is in either Drive (D) or Reverse (R) mode.

3. Parking brake is released.

4. All doors and bonnet is closed.

Vehicle starts moving as soon as the driver releases foot from the brake pedal without any accelerator input.

On a steep gradient, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep function. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal.

Creep function won’t work if EPB is turned ON.

Creep function won’t work if:

Any doors are open.

Bonnet open.

Electronic parking brake is engaged.

Gear shifter is in N/P mode.

To re-enable creep

In D/R mode turn OFF the EPB by pressing the switch.

Tap and release the accelerator pedal.

Press and release the brake pedal.

8.7 Extending Your Driving Range

Always drive the vehicle using right foot only.

Select appropriate drive mode depending on the traffic condition.

In bumper-to-bumper traffic, we suggest to use one-pedal drive to enhance convenience and reduce fatigue. However, avoid using one-pedal drive in situations requiring higher speeds or sudden acceleration, as it may not provide the responsiveness needed for safe driving.

Suggest to use Auto regen mode. It helps in optimizing the regen level based on the traffic ahead and also keep a safe distance.

To achieve optimal range from your battery, always drive in Range mode.

Use Everyday or Race mode only when you require an additional boost for enhanced performance.

Pre-cool your vehicle cabin remotely (If equipped) by turning on air condition when still plugged in for charge. This will ensure that battery will charge 100% with cabin temperature preconditioned.

Use air-condition with desired level of cooling set during drive. This will help in consuming less energy for cooling.

If driving alone, its recommend using the ‘Driver Only’ AC setting (If equipped). This helps conserve energy by focusing climate control on the driver, improving overall efficiency.

10.

If the weather is not too hot or during long drives, its recommended to use ECO mode in the AC. This setting reduces energy consumption while maintaining a comfortable cabin environment, enhancing overall efficiency.

11.

One technique which should be used only if required. Enable the Power Saving Mode manually. Please note that this will limit the vehicle speed to 80 km/h. Have reduced overtaking capability. Also, AC performance is reduced.

12.

By anticipating and applying gradual braking, ensures vehicle battery is recharged for extra range. Vehicle is assisted with electrical regenerative braking, also a motor assisted hydraulic brake for complete stop.

13.

Always maintain the tyre pressure to the recommended value. A lower tyre pressure will increase the rolling resistance and impact the range.

14.

Do not add any additional accessories. This may lead to drop in the range.

8.8 Do’s and Don’ts

Driving Condition

Do’s

•

If the “Stop and Leave the Vehicle” alert appears, leave the vehicle immediately. Keep a safe distance (in opposite direction of the wind) and alert the fire brigade.

Don’ts

•

Avoid driving the vehicle below 10% SOC.

•

Avoid driving the vehicle through stagnated water.

Breakdown Vehicle

Do’s

•

Call the breakdown assistance. This vehicle is having a high voltage system.

•

Only trained breakdown technician should work in the electric vehicle.

•

This vehicle should be towed only in flat bed towing.

•

In case of an accident, call RSA / Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

Don’ts

•

Do not allow any local electrician to work in the breakdown vehicle.

•

Don’t switch ON the ignition, if the vehicle is stuck in floods.

•

Don’t do any underbody treatments.

8.9 Good Driving Practices

•

Never shift the lever from ‘P’ (Park) or ‘N’ (Neutral) to any other position while the accelerator pedal is pressed.

•

Never shift the lever into ‘P’ (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Ensure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into ‘R’ (Reverse) or ‘D’ (Drive).

•

Do not shift the gear into ‘N’ (Neutral) while driving, as it may increase the risk of an accident.

•

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. Even light, continuous pressure can cause the brakes to overheat, wear out prematurely, and potentially lead to brake failure.

•

Always ensure the parking mode is engaged when leaving the vehicle.

•

Exercise extreme caution when driving on slippery surfaces. Be particularly careful when braking, accelerating, or shifting mode. Abrupt changes in speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction, leading to a loss of control and increasing the risk of an accident.

•

Optimal vehicle performance and maximum range are achieved by smoothly pressing and releasing the accelerator.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

•

Always wear your seat belt. In the event of a collision, an unbelted occupant is far more likely to be seriously injured or killed than one who is properly secured.

•

Avoid driving at high speeds when cornering or turning.

•

Do not make sudden steering movements, such as abrupt lane changes or sharp, fast turns.

•

The risk of rollover is significantly higher if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

•

Loss of control often occurs when two or more wheels drop off the roadway, and the driver over-steers while attempting to return to the road.

•

If your vehicle leaves the roadway, avoid steering sharply. Instead, slow down first, then gently steer back into the travel lanes.

•

Mahindra recommends that you always adhere to posted speed limits.

8.10 Best Practices for Maximizing EV Range

Range (DTE Distance to Empty): The Range indicated is an estimate of how far the vehicle can travel before the battery is completely drained. Range is estimated based on a combination of various factors, including but not limited to vehicle’s battery capacity, energy consumption and driving habits. Several factors can significantly impact the range including Battery State of Charge, Driving pattern, Terrain and Elevation, Usage of Air Condition/ Heater, Vehicle Load, Temperature and Weather conditions.

Below is an indicative list of the best practices that can be implemented by the customer to get a good range. For further information, the customer may contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Further, please note that the points mentioned in this document are the more critical points affecting range. For a comprehensive understanding of all points that can affect range and the best practices to operate the vehicle, please refer to the Owner’s Manual and the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

Driving Techniques:

•

Avoid frequent and rapid acceleration, as this drains the battery faster which would ultimately impact the range.

•

The recommended Drive Modes for better range are Default or Range mode.

•

Regeneration level settings to Level 1 or Level 2 for optimum range.

•

Use “Power Saving Mode” in low SoC i.e. less than 20% State of Charge.

•

Maintain a steady speed (Adaptive cruise control can help) and max speed is limited to less than 100 km/h especially on highways for best range.

AC (Air Condition) settings:

•

Cabin setting: Recommended AC temperature settings are 24 °C with Auto mode 1 or 2.

•

Avoid very low cabin temperatures, keep ‘Economy’ setting for AC when the vehicle is idle for best range.

•

Driver Only mode (If Equiped) to be enabled in the Climate settings, when only the driver seat is occupied.

•

It is recommended to use AC in SYNC mode (If Equiped) and avoid different temperature settings between Driver and Co- driver.

•

If Dual AC (If Equiped) settings are necessary, avoid keeping more than 3 °C temperature difference between Driver and Co-driver.

•

Avoid parking the vehicle under hot sun directly. It is recommended to use covered parking as much as possible.

•

If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the AC filter checked which needs replacement every 10 000 km at the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Centre.

Error state:

•

When either of the EV Warning, Service or Electronic Stability Control telltales are active, visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center and get the problems fixed. Range gets affected during such error states.

Battery charging:

•

Do not drain the battery to less than 5% state of charge frequently, as deep discharges can harm to the battery health.

•

Do not expose the vehicle to contact with a direct flame.

•

Avoid vehicle charging and parking in extreme ambient temperatures (hot or cold).

•

Use normal charging (Home) even when vehicle is driven less, to 100% state of charge for long term benefits on battery life and range.

•

Allow Normal charging up to 100% SOC once after 3 fast charge cycles. Use of fast charging can accelerate battery degradation must be minimized to help prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

•

Always charge to greater than 50% SOC, before leaving the vehicle for long resting period.

•

Ensure that the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment i.e. charger, charging cable (“EVSE”) is always stored in a safe place. Do not expose the EVSE to rain or wet conditions. Avoid pouring or dripping water or other liquids over the EVSE.

Maintenance:

Please note that the points mentioned in this section are the critical points affecting range. For a comprehensive understanding of all maintenance related requirements, please refer to the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Maintain recommended vehicle tyre pressure, refer the TPMS indication.

•

Check tyre health periodically and rotate them as per Warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Check wheel alignment and wheel balancing periodically. If necessary, adjust with help of Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

Follow the tyre rotation every 10 000 km as per Warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Wash your wheels regularly to remove road salt, grime and brake dust.

Awareness points:

•

BE 6 FE is a powerful SUV, they accelerate much quicker than what is felt. To ensure best range, the driver should gradually accelerate the pedal and for consistent drive, the pedal should be operated with a light foot.

•

Avoid driving on bumpy, rough and slippery roads to improve range.

•

Remove unnecessary loads or roof racks when they are not in use.

•

Extreme ambient conditions (<15 °C or > 35 °C) can impact the range adversely.

•

Short distance trips with long stop times or long idling with Air Condition switched ON can have negative impact on range. This is due to increased energy used from climate control (AC consumption) and other onboard systems.

•

Use of fast charging should be minimized in order to help prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

General Guidelines for Range Reference under Standard Conditions

Parameter	Value
Load	D+1
Vehicle Drive Mode	Default Mode / Range Mode
Recuperation Level Setting	Level 1 / Level 2
AC Setting	23 to 24 deg C
AC Blower Setting	Auto
City Profile	Up to 45 km/h (Typical Average Speed 20 - 25 km/h)
City Range*	450 – 500 km
General Highway Profile	Up to max speed of 110 km/h (Typical Average Speed up to 70 km/h)
General Highway Range*	350 – 400 km
Extra Highway Profile	Speed >120 km/h for a significant portion (10% or more duration)
Extra Highway Range*	< 300 km

*subject to driving pattern, environmental conditions

Factors Impacting Range:

•

Vehicle Load - Typically, D+4 conditions can reduce the range by 10 – 15%.

•

Temperature impact

•

> 35 ° C – Range impact up to 25% in city and upto 15% in Highway.

•

< 15 °C – Range impact up to 15%.

•

Terrain

•

Uphill driving increases energy consumption significantly. Impact of 20 – 25% depending on the grade and duration.

•

Rain and Snow - Rain and snow conditions can have negative effect on the range due to regeneration interruption.

8.11 Regenerative Braking System

A regenerative braking system is an energy recovery mechanism used in your electric origin vehicles. It converts the kinetic energy produced during braking into electrical energy, which is stored in the vehicle’s battery for future use.

•

When the driver applies the brakes, the system engages an electric motor in reverse mode. Instead of consuming energy, the motor acts as a generator.

•

The kinetic energy of the vehicle, which would otherwise be lost as heat in traditional braking systems, is converted into electrical energy.

•

The generated electricity is stored in the vehicle’s battery pack, increasing its overall efficiency and range.

Advantages:

•

Improved Efficiency: Increases vehicle range by reusing energy.

•

Reduced Wear and Tear: Minimizes the reliance on traditional friction brakes, extending their lifespan.

•

Environmentally Friendly: Reduces energy waste and enhances energy recovery.

8.11.1 Regenerative Braking (Paddle Shifter)

A regenerative braking system is an energy recovery mechanism used in your electric origin vehicles. It captures and converts the kinetic energy produced during braking into electrical energy, which is stored in the vehicle’s battery for future use.

The paddle shifter allows you to adjust the regenerative braking level from 0 to 3 while decelerating.

•

Left side (Regen +): Increases regenerative braking and enhances deceleration.

•

Right side (Regen –): Decreases regenerative braking and reduces deceleration.

•

Press and hold the left paddle shifter for more than 0.5 second to activate the brake via paddle function, which increases regenerative braking. In this mode, you can stop the vehicle by continuing to press the paddle shifter.

Refer the following pages on “Brake via Paddle”.

•

Press and hold the right paddle shifter for more than 1 second to toggle the AUTO Recuperation system ON or OFF.

For more details, refer the following pages on “AUTO Recuperation System”.

The paddle shifter does not operate when:

•

The (Regen +) and (Regen –) paddle shifters are pushed the same time.

•

The vehicle is decelerating when the brake pedal is depressed.

The selected regenerative braking level is shown on the DID.

8.11.2 Brake via Paddle

The driver can stop the vehicle by pressing the left paddle shifter Regen +.

To operate:

•

Press and hold the left paddle shifter while coasting to maximize regenerative braking.

•

Release the paddle shifter to return to the preset regenerative braking level.

•

If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using brake via paddle then the vehicle would continue to be stationary even after releasing the regen + button.

Limitations

The vehicle may still move even when Brake via Paddle is functioning normally. Therefore, the driver should exercise caution when using this function in the following circumstances:

•

Driving on icy, snowy, wet, sandy, or muddy roads, or on manhole covers/pothole surfaces.

•

When the wheels are not properly aligned.

•

Conditions where wheel slip or spin occurs.

•

When the vehicle is heavily loaded.

•

When the vehicle is leaning to the left or right.

•

In the case of uneven or worn-out tyres.

•

When driving uphill or downhill.

•

When driving on areas where the slope begins or ends.

•

When repeatedly stopping and starting on a ramp.

Stopping the vehicle may not be possible depending on the vehicle and road conditions. Be attentive to the road ahead and apply the brakes if necessary.

Please refrain from using the Brake Via Paddle function when road conditions are poor, such as wet, icy, or snow-covered surfaces.

When the vehicle is stopped or parked on steep hills using One-Pedal Driving, be sure to depress the brake pedal.

8.12 Auto Regen Mode

The Auto Regen mode automatically adjusts regenerative braking based on the road gradient and the driving conditions of the vehicle ahead. By minimizing unnecessary brake and acceleration pedal inputs, the system enhances energy efficiency and assists the driver.

The Auto Regen mode automatically adjusts the regenerative braking level while coasting, but it is only a supplemental feature designed for the driver’s convenience.

The system cannot fully stop the vehicle or prevent collisions. Brake control may be insufficient in certain situations, such as when the vehicle ahead is traveling at high speed, suddenly stops, or when a vehicle cuts in unexpectedly, or when driving on a steep slope.

Always remain vigilant and maintain a safe distance to prevent unforeseen and sudden situations.

8.12.1 To activate Auto Regen mode

How to operate –

Push and hold the paddle shifter (Regen —) for 1 second or more to activate the Auto Regen mode. The regenerative braking indicator will switch from the current level to ‘AUTO’.

When the Auto Regen mode is enabled, ‘A’ will be displayed for the regenerative braking level on the DID.

The system automatically controls the regenerative braking when one of the following conditions is met:

•

The road gradient changes. (Ex. Uphill or Downhill drive).

•

The distance to the vehicle ahead increases or decreases.

•

The speed of the vehicle ahead increases or decreases.

The Auto Regen mode relies on the front-view camera in the vehicle. Any obstruction or foreign substances on the camera lens may impair the system’s function. Ensure the front-view camera remains clear for optimal performance.

The Auto Regen mode will not operate if the Auto Emergency Braking System malfunction alert illuminates on the DID. In such cases, the driver must manually adjust the vehicle speed using the accelerator or brake pedal, depending on the road and driving conditions ahead.

8.12.2 To de-activate Auto Regen mode

The Auto Regen mode will be temporarily disabled in the following situations,

Manually Cancelled:

Push and hold the right-side paddle shifter for more than 1 second to toggle ON/OFF auto regen.

The ‘AUTO’ indicator will be replaced with the regenerative braking level indicator.

Automatically Cancelled:

The Auto Regen mode will be automatically disabled when:

•

The Cruise Control system (including the Smart Cruise Control system) is active.

•

The Auto Emergency Braking System Malfunction alert illuminates on the DID.

When the Auto Regen mode is automatically deactivated, manually adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal, depending on the road and driving conditions ahead.

8.12.3 System Malfunction

Check Auto recuperation system

The above message will appear if the system is not functioning properly. The system will be deactivated, and the ‘AUTO’ indicator on the DID will disappear, replaced by the regenerative braking level.

Check the front radar for any foreign substances, such as dirt, snow, or debris, that could obstruct the radar sensors.

If the system continues to malfunction, we recommend taking your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further inspection.

8.12.4 Limitations of the System

The Auto Recuperation System may not function properly in certain situations where the driving conditions exceed the capabilities of the front radar sensor.

On Curves: When coasting on a curve, the system may not detect the vehicle in your lane, causing the regenerative braking level to reduce automatically. As a result, you may feel as though the vehicle is not decelerating.

Similarly, if the system suddenly detects the vehicle ahead, the regenerative braking level will increase automatically, making you feel as though the vehicle is decelerating more.

The driver must maintain a safe braking distance and, if necessary, press the brake pedal to reduce speed and ensure a safe distance is kept.

Your vehicle speed may decrease due to the presence of a vehicle in the adjacent lane.

On inclines: When coasting uphill or downhill, the system may fail to detect the vehicle in your lane, causing the regenerative braking level to reduce automatically. This may give the sensation that the vehicle is accelerating.

Similarly, if the system suddenly detects the vehicle ahead, the regenerative braking level will increase automatically, creating the sensation that the vehicle is decelerating.

The driver must maintain a safe following distance and, if necessary, apply the brake pedal to reduce speed and ensure a safe distance is maintained.

Lane changing

•

A vehicle moving into your lane from an adjacent lane will not be detected by the sensor until it enters the sensor’s detection range.

•

The radar may not immediately detect a vehicle that cuts in suddenly. Always remain attentive to traffic, road, and driving conditions.

Vehicle recognition

Some vehicles in your lane may not be detected by the sensor, including:

•

Narrow vehicles, like motorcycles or bicycles, may not be detected.

•

Vehicles that are offset to one side may not be detected.

•

Slow-moving vehicles or vehicles that decelerate suddenly may not be detected.

•

Stopped vehicles (the system may not detect a stopped vehicle until the vehicle ahead begins to move).

•

Vehicles with a small rear profile, such as unladen trailers, may not be detected.

A vehicle ahead may not be recognized correctly by the sensor if any of the following occur:

•

When the vehicle is tilted upwards due to overloading in the luggage compartment.

•

While the steering wheel is being turned.

•

When driving toward the edge of the lane.

•

When driving on narrow lanes or around curves.

•

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal as needed.

When using the Auto Recuperation System, please observe the following precautions:

•

If an emergency stop is required, you must apply the brakes manually.

•

Maintain a safe distance based on road conditions and vehicle speed. If the distance between vehicles is too short at high speeds, a serious collision may occur.

•

Always maintain a sufficient braking distance and apply the brakes to decelerate if necessary.

•

The Auto Recuperation System cannot detect stopped vehicles, pedestrians, or oncoming vehicles. Always remain vigilant and look ahead to avoid unexpected or sudden situations.

•

Vehicles frequently changing lanes in front of you may cause a delay in the system’s response or may lead the system to react to a vehicle in an adjacent lane. Always drive cautiously to avoid unexpected or sudden situations.

•

The Auto Recuperation System may not recognize complex driving situations, so always stay alert to road conditions and control your vehicle speed accordingly.

•

In unfavorable conditions Auto recuperation systems may not function properly and the driver is required to always use their own judgment while driving and never fully rely on vehicle systems.

The Auto Recuperation System may be temporarily disabled due to:

•

Electrical interference.

•

Modification of the suspension.

•

Differences in tyre wear or tyre pressure.

•

Installing tyres of a different type.

8.13 One Pedal Drive

One Pedal Drive is controlled by the accelerator pedal, allowing you to control the vehicle’s speed (acceleration, deceleration, and stopping) without the need to manually operate the paddle shifter.

Releasing the accelerator pedal will result in strong deceleration. We recommend using One Pedal Drive in bumper-to-bumper traffic. Once the traffic clears, switch back to the desired mode by pressing the one pedal drive switch again.

This is not a replacement for the brake pedal. Application of brake pedal might still be required for emergency stopping.

To operate:

•

Press the one pedal shifter in steering wheel to activate the one pedal drive function.

•

During ‘one pedal drive’ activation, the vehicle will come to a stop when the accelerator pedal is released, even if the brake pedal is not pressed.

When the vehicle is stopped or parked using ‘one pedal drive’ on steep hills, be sure to press the brake pedal.

To deactivate

•

To come out of one pedal drive press the one pedal drive button or Regen – button, then regen will set to level 3.

•

The ‘one pedal drive’ is deactivated when the vehicle is turned OFF. Upon restarting the vehicle, the regenerative braking is automatically set to level 1.

•

When the gear is shifted to ‘R’ (Reverse), One Pedal Drive is turned off and regenerative braking is set to level 3.

•

Creep will not function in one pedal drive.

Limitations

Even when One-Pedal Driving is functioning normally, the vehicle may still move. Therefore, the driver should exercise caution when using this function in the following circumstances:

•

Driving on icy, snowy, wet, sandy, or muddy roads, or on manhole covers/potholes.

•

When the wheels are not properly aligned.

•

Conditions where wheel slip or spin occurs.

•

When the vehicle is heavily loaded.

•

When the vehicle is leaning to the left or right.

•

In the case of uneven or worn-out tyres.

•

When driving uphill or downhill.

•

When driving on areas where the slope begins or ends.

•

When repeatedly stopping and starting on a ramp.

8.14 Power Save Mode

Auto Activation:

When the vehicle’s State of Charge (SOC) reaches 15%, the power-saving mode is automatically activated to maximize the remaining driving range. Alert will be displayed on the Driver Information Display (DID) to inform the driver that the mode is active, ensuring efficient use of battery power.

Also PSM will be displayed at the bottom of the DID which will be permanently ON. Until vehicle is charged above 15% or PSM mode is deactivated manually.

Manual Activation:

When charging options are not available nearby or if they have some range concerns, you can manually enable Power Saving Mode.

To Enable/Disable the Power Saving Mode:

Select App Drawer >> Energy >> Battery >> Power Saving Mode (Enable/Disable).

Certain features of the vehicle get disabled / get into an ECO state to conserve energy.

Key changes when Power Saving Mode is on

•

Climate Control in Eco mode.

•

PID screen turns off.

•

Changes to Range drive mode.

8.15 Boost mode

When boost switch is pressed additional maximum power will be available for next 10 second.

This option should be used while over taking another vehicle when you are in Range or Everyday modes.

Boost mode can’t be used continuously.

Boost mode can’t be activated continuously, since there is a time gap to reactivate.

Boost mode will not get activated when you are in race mode or power saving mode.

In boost mode temporarily the maximum performance of the power train is released and the vehicle becomes super responsive to the accelerator and brake inputs, hence we would urge to use this mode only in open roads and use it responsibly. Always mindful of traffic regulations.

8.16 Drive Modes

Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go.

The drive modes can be selected through Centre Information Display (CID) in the below path:

App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Drive Modes >> Default / Range / Race/ Everyday / Custom / Snow.

Shortcut: Press drive mode button in ICC and select Default / Range / Race/ Everyday / Custom / Snow.

You can select from multiple drive modes options any time during your drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode when the situation calls for it. Whether you’re looking for an relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, drive modes allow you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique driving style.

The system is incredibly easy to use, simply choose your choice of "Drive Mode" and experience 6 different vehicles in one.

•

Default Mode

•

Range Mode

•

Everyday Mode

•

Race Mode

•

Custom Mode

•

Snow Mode

Selected drive mode displays in the DID.

ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in Default mode.

Default Mode

The vehicle will be by default in Default mode every time the vehicle ignition is turned ON.

In this mode vehicle will drive like a ICE (Internal Combustion Engine) vehicle and hence we do not recommend overtaking maneuver at high speed in this mode (For overtaking it is better to be in Everyday or Race mode).

•

In default mode the vehicle speed is limited to 140 km/h. This is ideal for the normal city drives and normal highway.

•

Suspension, steering and Accelerator pedal response is modified to have comfortable and easy control in fast moving traffic and highway condition.

•

It is designed for default driving on typical road conditions to deliver a comfortable ride while ensuring stability and control, making it ideal for urban commutes and suburban journeys.

Range Mode

Range mode offers regular everyday city drive and is optimized for day-to-day use. We do not recommend overtaking maneuver at high speed in this mode (For overtaking it is better to be in Everyday or Race mode).

•

In Range mode the acceleration response may be slightly reduced if the accelerator pedal is depressed moderately.

•

The vehicle speed is limited to 135 km/h. This mode is ideal for city traffic and better driving.

•

Range mode enhances passenger comfort by softening the suspension to provide a smoother and more relaxed ride.

•

Range mode reduces the damping force, making the suspension more compliant. This adjustment allows the system to absorb road irregularities more effectively, resulting in a smoother and more comfortable ride for passengers, particularly on uneven or rough surfaces.

•

It is ideal for long-distance highway cruising or driving on uneven roads. By reducing the damping force and making the suspension more compliant, it ensures a smoother, more relaxing ride while minimizing passenger fatigue over extended journeys.

Race Mode

The Race mode is when you want the adrenaline rush. We would urge this only in open roads and use it responsibly.

This mode is for a more spirited driving and when you want the adrenaline rush. In this mode, accelerator will become more responsive, i. e. the vehicle accelerates more readily. The steering efforts and response is tuned for better handling.

•

In race mode there is no vehicle speed limit.

•

Race mode enhances handling and cornering stability, optimizing the suspension for spirited and dynamic driving.

•

Race mode increases the suspension damping force, stiffening the suspension to enhance performance. This setup minimizes body roll and maximizes road feedback, providing precise control and confidence for spirited driving or track use.

•

Race mode is ideal for dynamic driving on smooth roads or during high-performance maneuvers. By stiffening the suspension and minimizing body roll, it delivers precise control, enhanced stability, and maximum responsiveness for an exhilarating driving experience.

In race mode the maximum performance of the power train is released and the vehicle becomes super responsive to the accelerator and brake inputs, hence we would urge to use this mode only in open roads and use it responsibly. Please also be always mindful of traffic regulations.

Everyday mode

•

In Everyday mode the vehicle speed is limited to 165 km/h. This mode is ideal for the normal day-to-day city and highway drives.

•

Accelerator pedal response is modified and regeneration is made passive so as to have comfortable and easy control in fast moving traffic and highway condition.

•

Everyday mode offers a balanced setup that optimally blends comfort and handling. It ensures a smooth ride for daily commutes while maintaining responsive suspension dynamics for confident control and stability in various driving conditions.

•

Everyday mode adjusts the suspension damping characteristics to an intermediate level, providing a mix of stability and comfort.

•

It is designed for everyday driving on typical road conditions. By balancing damping characteristics, it delivers a comfortable ride while ensuring stability and control, making it ideal for urban commutes and suburban journeys.

Custom Mode

Using the Custom Mode, use can customize his driving behavior by adjusting various driving parameters.

Select Custom mode and tap on edit.

User preferred settings can be selected under power, steering, suspension and climate.

Snow Mode

Snow mode in vehicles help improve traction and control on snowy or icy roads by adjusting throttle response, transmission settings, and torque distribution.

This snow mode can be activated along with any of the drive modes (Default, Range, Race, Everyday mode).

Driving modes changes in DID:

Once any of the modes is selected, an ALERT message will be displayed in DID. Based on the mode selected the alert message would vary for.

Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the DID. For each mode the theme in the DID and CID changes accordingly.

ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in Default mode.

DEFAULT MODE ACTIVATED

RANGE MODE ACTIVATED

EVERYDAY MODE ACTIVATED

RACE MODE ACTIVATED

CUSTOM MODE ACTIVATED

SNOW MODE ACTIVATED

8.17 Brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with hydraulic brakes with Integrated Electronic Booster assisted with ABS and ESP in the front and rear wheels.

Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduce stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After a vehicle wash or driving the vehicle through water, apply and release brake pedal mildly while driving to remove the water film from the brake disc.

Front brake Pad: The front brake pads are equipped with Electronic Pad Wear Indicator Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, the brake warning lamp on DID (Driver Information Display) will turn ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible.

Rear Brake Pad : The rear brake pads are equipped with Electronic Pad Wear Indicator Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, the brake warning lamp on DID will turn ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible.

If the IGN is turned off while running, the power assist for the brakes may not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with the power brakes.

Driving with wet brakes is dangerous and it can lead to accident on the road. Stopping distance increases considerably while braking.

Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop, while pressing the brake pedal, squeal can occur from rear end. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern.

Brake Creep-Groan occurs as a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise when D/R mode is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the vehicle.

Above conditions are normal phenomenon and does not affect the braking performance.

8.17.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline

If you have to park the vehicle with the front side facing downhill, select Reverse (R) mode and turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

Always ensure that the vehicle is in Parking (P) mode before leaving the vehicle.

A – When parking on an uphill, turn the front wheels away from the kerb/pavement.

B – When parking on a downhill, turn the front wheels towards the kerb/pavement.

8.17.2 Electric Parking Brake (EPB)

The EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is a safety feature with enhanced comfort, the parking brakes are applied / released by simple switch operation.

The EPB system replaces the conventional manual parking brake which requires high effort to apply and release.

In addition to the switch based application, EPB also provides additional safety / comfort features like EPB auto apply, auto release, auto vehicle hold, controlled deceleration for parking, rear wheel un-locker and roll away re-clamp.

To apply EPB – Park the vehicle in a safe place and pull up the EPB switch.

To release EPB – Press down the EPB switch with the brake pedal depressed. In addition using shifter move from P mode to any other mode.

Applying EPB

Releasing EPB

The parking brake warning lamp on the DID and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.

8.17.3 AUTO Apply EPB

For added comfort and for safety reasons the EPB will get automatically applied in the following conditions.

Ignition is turned Off.

Park mode engaged.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is active and driver seat belt is unbuckled.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is active continuously for more than 10 minute in less than 20% gradient.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is active continuously for more than 5 second in greater than 20% gradient.

In any mode, if driver door is opened, EPB will get automatically engaged.

Whenever possible, refrain from using forced braking. Use the emergency braking function only in extreme cases, for example, when the brake pedal fails or is blocked.

In case of any switch related failure when vehicle in standstill, the EPB auto release feature must be used to release EPB. If EPB Auto release feature doesn’t work, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to release the EPB.

8.17.4 AUTO Releasing EPB/Drive Away

Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.

Shift the SBW selector lever to the D / R / N position.

Release the brake pedal slowly to move the vehicle. (Creep function available in L1, L2 and L3 Regen levels).

When vehicle is in one pedal drive, press accelerator pedal slowly to move the vehicle.

The red illumination on the EPB switch and the brake telltale on DID turn off, indicating that the parking brake is released.

The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated, if driver door is not closed or if the driver seat belt is not fastened. The driver will get message on DID to ensure the same.

If the EPB is being released using the accelerator pedal, be cautious if the vehicle is parked uphill. In this scenario if an aggressive accelerator pedal input is given, it can also result in wheel spin. The wheel spin will cause ESC to intervene.

8.17.5 EPB Warning Lamp / Parking Brake Warning Lamp

	This telltale turns ON in the DID when the EPB is applied properly.
	This telltale turns ON in the DID when there is a malfunction in the EPB system.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Centre.

Do’s

Driving Conditions

•

For EPB auto release and drive away always wear driver seat belt and ensure that the driver door is closed.

Don’ts

Driving Conditions

•

If the EPB malfunction lamp is ON and the brake is engaged. Do not drive.

•

Avoid using EPB after doing water wading. Please get the vehicle checked at a Authorized Mahindra Service Centre.

Servicing: Avoid getting your vehicle serviced at unauthorized service center to prevent potential hazards or part failures.

•

The EPB can also be used in cases of emergency braking. Release the accelerator and pull and hold the EPB button until your vehicle comes to standstill and EPB gets applied. This should be done only in emergency condition and not as a regular action.

•

The braking process is interrupted when the EPB button is released or the accelerator pedal is actuated in dynamic condition.

•

The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the driver door is open or the seat belt is not fastened.

•

Motor noise can be heard during the EPB operation, this is normal behavior.

•

If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Centre.

•

Do not let children or other people who are not familiar with the EPB system operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accident depending on the parking / stationary state of the vehicle.

•

If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related components after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle checked and serviced.

8.17.6 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)

The AVH is a comfort feature offered with electric parking brake (EPB).

The function of AVH is to hold the vehicle in standstill condition with the applied driver brake pressure.

Once AVH switch is pressed, it remains in memory and thus driver doesn’t have to press the AVH switch every time.

AVH Off – AVH switch is not pressed, thus AVH is not available.

The AVH feature can exist in 4 states in the vehicle, which are as follows.

	AVH Standby – AVH is available but is in standby mode.
	AVH Active – AVH is available and is controlling/holding the vehicle in standstill condition.
	AVH Faulty – Indicates some fault in AVH, because of which AVH not available.
	AVH Failure – Auto Hold system in red color indicates Auto Hold Not Working/Fail State.

For the AUTO HOLD to function, the following conditions should be met.

•

Ignition ON.

•

Driver door is closed and driver seat belt is buckled.

When AVH is active, and driver door is opened / driver seat belt is unbuckled, the EPB gets automatically applied for safety reasons.

For AVH to be activated, the conditions of the automatic parking function must be met at the same time.

Do not rely solely on AVH to keep the vehicle stationary on steep slopes, inclines, slippery roads, or uneven surfaces.

Never exit the vehicle without confirming that the AVH and parking brake are fully engaged.

Activation/ De-activation of AVH

Ensure driver door is closed and driver seat belt is buckled.

Turn on the ignition and enable drive mode then press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch to activate it. Make sure the vehicle is stationary.

To deactivate depress the AUTO HOLD switch again.

The LED indicator on the AUTO HOLD switch illuminates in amber color when it is active.

Operating Auto Hold

Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO HOLD indicator on DID (white).

Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the vehicle.

The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the DID is changed from white to green and the brake is applied.

Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off.

The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the DID is changed from green to white and the brake is released.

If the Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is active continuously for more than 10 minute in less than 20% gradient or for more than 5 second in greater than 20% gradient or if the driver door is opened / driver seat belt is unbuckled the EPB applies automatically and AVH is disabled.

•

When driving off on a downhill by depressing the accelerator pedal, be careful as the vehicle can accelerate suddenly and on uphill sufficient accelerator pedal input to be provided for overcoming the gradient.

•

Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the AUTO HOLD function activated. Otherwise, the parking brake is released, and the vehicle can accelerate suddenly.

•

If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in the EPB system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Centre. If parking the vehicle is required in an emergency, pull over the vehicle on a flat surface and chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector lever to the P position.

Controlled Deceleration for Parking (CDP)

•

The Controlled Deceleration for parking is a safety feature.

•

The CDP functions can be made used in any case such as Brake pedal / Integrated Electronic Motor / Boost failure because of which sufficient brake force can’t be achieved through the brake pedal.

•

In such conditions, pulling the EPB switch triggers the ESC Control unit to generate a pressure build up in the brake system which produces the braking force at individual wheels to bring the vehicle to an emergency stop.

•

At the end of vehicle stop, parking brake will engage. Move the shifter to D / R / N to release the EPB.

•

For unintentional application, if the codriver or any other person pulls the EPB switch without driver’s notice in dynamic condition. The CDP function can be overridden by the driver by pressing accelerator pedal.

•

The CDP functionality having a high rate of deceleration, anyone other than the driver is advised not to pull the EPB switch in any case while driving.

•

The CDP function is a safety feature and must be used in case of emergency only.

EPB Roll Away Re-clamp

•

If the EPB system detects any rolling after EPB is applied, the motor on caliper re-clamps the disc to avoid any rolling.

•

As an added feature, to avoid roll away due to the reduction in clamp force due to decrease in temperature, the EPB motor on caliper re-clamps the disc multiple times based on the temperature.

Servicing and Repairing

The EPB is a complex system involving electrical and hydraulics, it is strictly advised to get it repaired or serviced at a Authorized Mahindra service Centre.

8.17.7 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert

Display	Operating Conditions
	This message is displayed on the DID when the EPB switch is released without depressing the brake pedal to deactivate EPB.

8.17.8 Hazard on Panic Braking

Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 second when the following conditions are met:

•

Ignition is ON.

•

Vehicle speed is greater than 60 km/h.

•

Panic / sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed.

8.18 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.

ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over and prevents wheel lock.

You may also hear motor noise from the motor compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake pedal.

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.

The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should go out after a few second. If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:

•

Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

•

Driving with tyre chains installed.

•

Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.

•

Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height.

Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the anti-lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active.

If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti-lock brake system will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up.

8.19 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, it prevents least loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus allows the wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it identifies any slip, the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.

A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

8.20 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel automatically.

ESC uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle, compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.

Over-steer - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Under-steer - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The ESC cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to the prevailing road conditions. The ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that could endanger the user’s safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ON:

Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be by default active. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.

When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator lamp will blink in the DID.

When the ESC is operating, you may also hear motor noise from the motor compartment.

When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESC system controls the RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.

ESC OFF:

In some driving conditions, to maximize traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESC.

Such conditions are:

•

To start in deep snow or on a loose surface.

•

Driving in deep sand.

•

Driving through deep mud etc.

To de-activate ESC, press ESC OFF button on the driver side switch bank. Once ESC is selected, the ESC function will remain deactivated. A warning indicator will be illuminated in the Driver Information Display.

Press ESC OFF button to activate ESC function.

For safety reasons, ESC will be automatically re-activated once the vehicle speed crosses 65 km/h.

Mahindra recommends that ESC be operational in all normal driving conditions.

When ESC is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be available.

ESC by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.

If the ESC indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESC is working. However, if this lamp is blinking continuously or remains ON, it indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. During that time vehicle speed will be limited to 25 km/h. Drive carefully to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center and get the ESC system checked.

8.21 Hill Descent Control (HDC)

This system assists the driver to descend a steep slope by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed without driver’s input on brakes. This does not replace cruise control.

During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.

HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.

The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 4 km/h to 40 km/h. Above 40 km/h the HDC feature will go to ready mode. The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if vehicle speed is more than 60 km/h. (For activating the HDC feature again, the driver needs to press the HDC button once again within the specified speed limits).

The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient in OFF road condition. It is not recommended to be ON in plain road to avoid accidental intervention.

While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal and brake pedal.

To set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed below:

•

SET Speed: This is the driver desired speed at which vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch or brake / accelerator pedals. (example: when the driver activates HDC at a speed of 30 km/h, then set speed will be 30 km/h). HDC will limit the vehicle descent speed to set value).

•

If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the speed from 30 km/h to 34 km/h and then releases the accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 km/h.

•

Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the speed from 30 km/h to 10 km/h and then releases the brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 km/h.

•

If the vehicle cruise speed is within the HDC active region, similarly the set speed can be modified using cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET —” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 km/h).

The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.

8.22 Hill Hold Control (HHC)

Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.

Hill Hold Control function uses the inbuilt acceleration sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2 second after the brake pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.

For the Hill Hold Control (HHC) system to activate, the following conditions must be met:

The vehicle must be equipped with HHC.

The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient.

The parking brake must not be applied.

HHC is designed to function for both uphill and downhill scenarios, as long as the correct gears are selected. This feature enhances control and stability when starting on an incline or descending a slope.

•

Vehicle facing Uphill: Drive (D) mode is engaged for the vehicle forward movement.

•

Vehicle facing Downhill – Reverse (R) mode should be selected to facilitate controlled descent.

•

In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling may occur.

•

The safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling.

8.23 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC)

Due to continuous brake operations, the temperature of the brake disc may get raised, due to which the friction between the brake pads and the brake disc may get reduced alarmingly, this is known as Brake Fading.

HFC provides an additional braking-force boost to the driver, based on the pad temperature model, brake pressure and deceleration rate, to reduce the braking distances in such cases.

The HFC will activate only during high brake pedal force application.

•

The HFC system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HFC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety.

•

The safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HFC feature to prevent road accidents.

8.24 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)

Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the motor power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.

Minimum vehicle speed for ROM = 25 km/h.

Maximum vehicle speed for ROM = 120 km/h.

•

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.

•

The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs, thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

8.25 Brake Disc Wiping (BDW)

When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition, the accumulated wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake response time.

The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, such that the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating brake disks, creating a wiping action, thereby removing the moisture from the brake disks.

For the Brake Disc Wiping function to get activated, the following conditions must be met.

Vehicle speed above 70 km/h.

Accelerator Pedal must be pressed.

The wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed).

BDW may not get activated while driving through sharp corners.

The pressure generated in the BDW function is very small and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving conditions.

•

The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc from situations such as water wash or water puddles.

•

It is suggested that the driver, dry the brakes in the above said conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.

8.26 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP

EBP is a value-added feature in ESC, the target of the function is to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low brake pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in close proximity to the brake disc.
The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of accelerator pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.
By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle deceleration is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter stopping distance.

8.27 Secondary Collision Mitigation System (SCM)

The SCM feature in the ESC system is an autonomous braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle after the first collision by means of autonomous braking interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.

For the Secondary Collision Mitigation feature to get activated, the following conditions must be met.

There must be a collision detected with a certain severity, where airbags gets deployed.

The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10 km/h.

The brakes and ESC system should remain functional after impact.

The accelerator pedal must not be actuated.

The SCM system is designed to reduce secondary impact severity but does not replace safe driving practices. Vehicle damage resulting from excessive speeds or negligent driving will not be covered under warranty.

8.28 Cooperative Regeneration

Cooperative Regeneration is an advanced feature designed to enhance energy efficiency in electric vehicles. This system works in tandem with the vehicle’s regenerative braking system, it maximizes energy recovery during driving and braking phases. It helps to extend the vehicle’s driving range and improve overall performance, providing a smoother and more sustainable driving experience.

Below are the working procedures, feedback on co-operative regeneration:

Regenerative Braking

•

When you apply the brakes or release the accelerator pedal, the cooperative regeneration system engages, activating regenerative braking.

•

This process converts the vehicle’s kinetic energy into electrical energy, which is stored directly in the battery.

•

By capturing and reusing this energy, the system helps recharge the battery, extending driving range and enhancing overall energy efficiency.

•

The system intelligently adapts the level of regenerative braking based on real-time driving conditions, vehicle speed, and battery charge level.

•

This dynamic adjustment maximizes energy recovery, ensuring that the system captures the optimal amount of energy while maintaining a smooth and responsive driving experience.

Driver Feedback

•

As you drive, the cooperative regeneration system provides feedback on how efficiently you are using energy. This may be displayed through visual message encouraging smoother driving to maximize regeneration.

•

Adopting smooth acceleration and deceleration habits significantly enhances the effectiveness of the cooperative regeneration system.

Cooperative Features

•

The Cooperative Regeneration system can also integrate with other vehicle systems, like Adaptive Cruise Control and Navigation, to anticipate and adapt to upcoming traffic conditions and terrain. For instance, when nearing a downhill stretch, the system can proactively increase regenerative braking to capture additional energy. This predictive adjustment allows for smarter energy recovery, enhancing efficiency by aligning regeneration with real-time driving conditions.

Driver Awareness

•

Although Cooperative Regeneration enhances energy efficiency, it’s crucial to remain attentive to road conditions and traffic. This system supports energy recovery but does not replace the need for careful, responsible driving. Staying focused on the road ensures both safety and optimal performance, allowing the system to assist effectively within safe driving practices.

Environmental Factors

•

Regenerative braking performance can vary with external conditions, such as weather or road surfaces. On wet or slippery roads, traditional braking may be needed to ensure safe and reliable stopping. Staying prepared to use conventional brakes when necessary ensures safety and maintains consistent performance in all driving conditions.

System Alerts

•

Pay attention to any alerts or notifications on the vehicle’s display regarding the regenerative braking system or battery status, as these can indicate important updates on system performance. Regular vehicle maintenance is key to keeping all systems running optimally, ensuring maximum efficiency, safety, and the full benefits of regenerative technology.

•

If you notice a decrease in regenerative braking performance, check the vehicle’s display for any warnings or alerts. These notifications can help identify potential issues and guide you toward any necessary adjustments or maintenance to restore optimal function.

•

Make sure the battery is adequately charged and that there are no obstructions affecting the vehicle’s braking system. This ensures that regenerative braking can operate effectively and maintain optimal performance during your drive.

•

For ongoing issues, refer to the vehicle’s service manual or contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance. They can provide expert guidance and support to address any concerns related to the regenerative braking system or overall vehicle performance.

Cooperative Regeneration is a driver-assistance feature designed to enhance your vehicle’s efficiency and overall driving experience. However, it’s essential to prioritize safe driving practices and remain fully attentive to road conditions at all times. This ensures both safety and optimal performance, allowing the system to support you effectively without compromising control.

8.29 Semi Active Suspension (If Equipped)

A semi-active suspension system is a type of automotive suspension that dynamically adjusts the damping characteristics of the shock absorbers to respond to changing road conditions, vehicle dynamics, and driver inputs.

There are different damping modes available as standard equipment, which can be selected via Drive modes in CID,

Default

Range

Everyday

Race

If the semi-active suspension warning light appears on the DID, it indicates a potential issue with the suspension system. It is recommended to contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to resolve the issue.

The semi-active suspension system operates according to the selected drive mode, optimizing performance and comfort based on the driving conditions. Refer “Drive Mode” section for more details.

8.30 Cruise Control

Cruise control is a feature, that allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions.

A	Cruise ON/OFF	D	DID Menu
B	Cruise Set +/-	E	Toggle Up/Down
C	Resume	F	Enter

Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.

Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 20 km/h in ‘D’ mode. The cruise lamp turns ON once cruise control is active.

Cruise control will function only all the following conditions are met:

•

The vehicle speed is cruising above 20 km/h.

•

Brake pedal released.

•

Cruise main switch is turned on by ON/OFF switch followed by pressing Set + button.

•

Shift lever is in D.

•

No EV warning / Service tell tale.

•

Power saving mode is not active.

Maximum speed for cruise control operation applicable for the different drive modes are:

Range mode – 130 km/h

Everyday mode – 160 km/h

Race mode – 170 km/h

Cruise control will be deactivated if any of the following conditions are met:

•

CRUISE ON/OFF button is pressed.

•

Brake pedal depressed.

•

Hand brake is engaged.

•

Power saver mode is engaged.

•

Cruise switch is pressed for more than 30 second.

•

Vehicle speed is greater or lesser than the set speed by 10 km/h for more than 30 second.

•

Vehicle speed is greater or lesser than the set speed by 30 km/h.

•

Hand brake engaged.

•

Shift lever changed from D or L to N/R/P.

•

Safe mode is active.

•

ESC is active.

•

EV warning / Service tell tale.

•

Drive disabled.

•

Vehicle speed has exceeded the permitted cruise speed in the active drive mode.

8.30.1 Cruise Control Activation

Enable Cruise control by pressing the CRUISE ON/OFF button. Once enabled, Cruise control will mode to Standby. Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 20 km/h), press the SET+ button to activate cruise.

If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button. If cruise control fails to engage or disengage as expected, avoid continued operation and contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately. Unauthorized modifications to the vehicle’s cruise control system may impair functionality and void the vehicle warranty.

Cruise control is a comfort function and it is the responsibility of the driver to safely and attentively drive the vehicle.

It is suggested not to use cruise control in high traffic conditions involving frequent braking.

It is suggested not to use cruise control in hilly and winding road conditions.

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the Driver Information Display (DID).

8.30.2 SET + Button

SET + Button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.

To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 km/h.

To increase the speed in very big amounts (20 km/h), press the SET + Button for longer time.

8.30.3 SET - Button

To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2 km/h.

To decrease the speed in very big amounts (20 km/h), press the SET - Button for longer time.

If any of the cruise switch is pressed for more than 30 second, the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality will be deactivated. To activate / resume cruise functionality, ensure all cruise switches are in not pressed state and switch off the ignition. Once ignition is turned ON, cruise can be engaged as per the conditions in the “Cruise control Activation” section.

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.

Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery, etc).

8.30.4 RESUME Button

With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained with the following example:

Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 km/h.

Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode by pressing the brake pedal.

Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.

When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 km/h.

The vehicle will accelerate / decelerate gradually to the set speed from the vehicle speed.

To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 20 km/h.

Resume button function will not work if the CRUISE OFF button was pressed to deactivate cruise in the same cycle.

8.30.5 Override Function

This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.

The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 second, to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 second limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.

8.30.6 Standby Mode

If the brake pedal is pressed while cruise control is active, the DID will display “Cruise Standby”, the driver can resume cruise control by simply pressing the RESUME button at any point during the current driving cycle.

8.31 Special Driving Conditions

Driving Through Water:

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are several precautions that must be considered before entering the water.

Never attempt to start the vehicle.

•

Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line.

•

The water surface should not be higher than the lower edge of the underbody.

•

High voltage battery and electrical/electronics components will get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water.

•

Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient of friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tap the brake pedal while driving to remove the moisture in brake disc surface.

•

You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, obstructing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.

•

The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the vehicle to move further down while driving the vehicle through it.

•

It may also enter the transaxle reducing the oil’s lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center or RSA.

•

Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated around brake drums / discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Dryness of brakes can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

•

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water.

•

Do not stop the vehicle while in the water.

If any orange-colored cables (High voltage Cables) on the vehicle are visible, in order to prevent electric shock or even death, do not make any contact with any cable.

If water enters inside the vehicle or fully submerged in water, do not drive the vehicle. Contact RSA / Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately. Never touch the orange-colored cables because an electric shock may occur, causing injury or death.

If your vehicle is submerged:

If your stationary vehicle is submerged up to or Lower edge of underbody:

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are several precautions that must be considered before entering the water.

Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately. Have the vehicle towed to nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center to check any entry of water into any electrical/electronics components.

All fluids including transaxle fluids required to be changed in case of water ingress and contamination.

Driving Through Flowing Water:

If the water is swiftly flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.

Driving at night:

Night driving indeed poses more risks than daytime driving due to reduced visibility, increased glare, and the higher likelihood of encountering drowsy or impaired drivers. Here are some important tips to remember:

•

Reduce your speed and increase the distance between your vehicle and others, as nighttime visibility is often limited, especially in areas without street lighting.

•

Adjust your mirrors to minimize glare from other vehicle’s headlights.

•

Ensure your head lamps are clean and correctly aligned. Dirty or misaligned headlights can significantly reduce your visibility and make it harder to see obstacles, road signs, and other vehicles at night.

•

Avoid staring directly at oncoming headlights, as the glare can temporarily impair your night vision and make it harder to see the road.

Driving in the rain

Driving in rain and on wet roads can be hazardous due to reduced traction and limited visibility. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slack pavement:

•

Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop your vehicle.

•

Turn OFF your Cruise Control.

•

Replace your windshield wiper blades as soon as they show signs of streaking or leave sections of the windshield unswept.

•

Ensure your tyres have sufficient tread depth. Worn tyres with inadequate tread can reduce traction on wet pavement, increasing the risk of skidding, making it difficult to stop quickly and possibly lead to an accident.

•

Turn on your headlights to increase your visibility to other drivers, especially in rain, fog, or low-light conditions.

•

Driving too quickly through large puddles can wet your brakes, reducing their effectiveness. If you need to drive through puddles, do so slowly to avoid splashing water onto the braking components and maintain better control of your vehicle.

If you suspect your brakes are wet, gently apply them while driving to help dry them out and restore normal braking function.

8.31.1 Winter Driving

Winter’s harsh weather condition can accelerate tyre wear and lead to various vehicle issues. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:

Snow or icy conditions

Enable the snow mode in the right side of the page in Drive modes.

Keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the one ahead to ensure you have enough time to react to sudden stops or obstacles.

Brake gently to stay in control, particularly on snowy or icy roads. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking, and sharp turns are especially hazardous in winter conditions. Sudden braking on slippery surfaces can lead to skidding, so maintain a smooth, steady approach to all movements for safer driving.

Always carry emergency equipment in your vehicle to be prepared for unexpected situations. Essential items to include are tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand or kitty litter for traction, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, a ground cloth, coveralls, and a blanket. These supplies can help you manage emergencies, especially in harsh weather conditions, and ensure your safety while on the road.

Snow tyres should be the same size and type as your vehicle’s standard tyres to ensure proper safety and handling. Using mismatched tyres can compromise traction, stability, and control, especially in winter conditions, potentially affecting your vehicle’s performance and safety.

When installing snow tyres, ensure they are radial tyres of the same size and load range as your vehicle’s original tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four wheels to maintain balanced handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that snow tyres may provide less traction on dry roads compared to your vehicle’s standard tyres. Always consult with your tyre dealer for maximum speed recommendations to ensure safe driving.

Before installing studded tyres, be sure to check local and municipal regulations, as some areas may have restrictions on their use.

9 Parking Assist System

This chapter outlines the driver-assist features related to parking Assistance System (PAS). While this feature enhance convenience and safety, drivers must remain attentive and adhere to the guidelines in this chapter.

These features cannot detect or prevent all hazards. Mahindra does not guarantee flawless operation under all conditions and assumes no liability for system malfunctions, whether partial or complete. For detailed information on feature-specific constraints and driver responsibilities, refer to the Limitations sections throughout this manual.

Periodic software updates may be required to maintain or enhance the reliability of parking-assist features. By using these systems, the owner acknowledges having read and accepted all disclaimers and agrees to operate the vehicle responsibly while ensuring compliance with recommended updates.

9.1 Parking Assistance System (PAS) – RPAS and FPAS

Parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse and in front. While Parking, PAS will detect the obstacles at the rear and front side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors and windshield. The PAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.

APAS is an aiding/ assistance system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

•

System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level.

•

Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system.

Front Sensor Location

Two PAS sensors are located in the front bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking.

Rear Sensor Location

Two PAS sensors are located in the rear bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking.

RPAS and FPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less than 8 km/h.

Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water, etc, for proper working of the system.

Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.

Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurate.

9.1.1 PAS (RPAS and FPAS) Information on Center Information Display (CID) Screen

RPAS display on Information Display

RPAS screen gives the following information in CID either 360° Camera (if enabled in settings) . It also appears in DID:

•

Left zone indicates obstacle on left side.

•

Right zone indicates obstacle on right side.

•

If obstacle is in center then left and right both zone will get highlighted.

Two bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper. The red bar indicates obstacle is very near and there could be an impact with vehicle further movement.

FPAS display on Information Display

FPAS screen gives the following information in CID either 360° Camera (if enabled in settings). It also appears in DID:

•

Left corner zone indicates obstacle on left side.

•

Right corner zone indicates obstacle on the right side.

•

If obstacle is in center then left and right both zone will get highlighted.

2 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle front bumper. The red bar indicates obstacle is very near and there could be an impact with vehicle further movement.

9.1.2 Operation of PAS

Activation and De-activation of PAS

•

The vehicle must be in Ignition ON state to activate the parking assistance system.

•

RPAS will be activated automatically when the park mode is disengaged and reverse mode is engaged.

•

FPAS will be activated automatically in D and R mode when park brake is disengaged and the vehicle speed is between 1 to 8 km/h or the vehicle is standstill.

•

FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle exceeds 12 km/h (it gets auto enabled when the speed reduces below 8 km/h) or park mode is engaged or reverse mode is disengaged.

•

When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated and beeps alerts.

•

Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.

The beep sound can be heard from the front speaker. Frequency of the beep would increase if the obstacle detected by sensor is closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is near the vehicle.

FPAS warning sound can be disabled using FPAS chime ON/OFF switch, available on the driver side switch bank. PAS switch LED will not glow when FPAS sound is active and LED is ON the PAS sound gets deactivated (indicates FPAS chime is turned OFF).

9.1.3 Pay Attention

1. If bars in any one of the sides are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on Center Information Display (CID), contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

2. If all bars are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on Driver Information Display/Center Information Display (DID/CID), contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. Applicable for all sensors.

4. Please look out for the obstacle behind and in front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the display may not be same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.

5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.

6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.

7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.

8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.

9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get reflected away.

9.1.4 Limitations of PAS

•

System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level.

•

System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by PAS.

•

System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle.

•

System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle.

•

System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded.

•

System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa.

•

System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded.

•

System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions.

•

The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:

–

Sharply-angled objects.

–

Tall or curved curb.

–

Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level).

–

Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle.

•

Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible.

•

Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.

•

Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.

•

Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights.

•

Due to the vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large the vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm.

9.2 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) (If Equipped)

Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8 km/h. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.

RPAS Sensor Location

Activation and de-activation of RPAS

•

The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system.

•

RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse mode is engaged and park mode is disengaged.

•

RPAS will be deactivated when reverse mode is disengaged or park mode is engaged.

•

RPAS display on Driver Information Display / Center Information Display (DID/CID) screen gives the following information:

•

Left zone indicates obstacle on left side.

•

Right zone indicates obstacle on right side.

•

If obstacle is in center then right and left both zone will get highlight.

3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and bar 3rd bar alone being distant.

9.2.1 Operation of RPAS

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the Park brake for RPAS information on Driver Information Display / Center Information Display (DID/CID) screen.

The RPAS will be displayed in the Driver Information Display / Center Information Display (DID/CID) screen during obstacle detection.

3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction.

4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.

5. The Beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.

Pay Attention: If Driver / Center Information Display (DID/CID) gives 3 seconds continuous beep alert tone whenever reverse mode is engaged, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances will Mahindra accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

9.3 360° Camera

The 360° Camera assists in parking and low speed maneuvering by displaying different views of the vehicle’s surroundings on the screen to the driver with the help of 4 Cameras located in the front grille, tailgate, and both exterior mirrors. Driver can activate 360° Camera through app drawer (soft button) or 360° Camera switch or on engaging reverse mode. The 360° Camera app exits automatically when the speed is exceeded.

Once activated, it delivers a detailed 360° surround view, helping the driver navigate tight spaces and obstacles with ease and confidence.

Before using the system, ensure that all camera lenses are clean and free from dust, dirt, or any obstructions that may impair the system. External mirrors shall be fully unfolded. Regularly inspect and clean the lenses to maintain optimal functionality. Ensure the camera lenses are not damaged and are fully functional/ operational.

Disclaimer

•

The 360° camera system provides a visual display of the surroundings but does not detect or alert the driver about obstacles. It is the driver's responsibility to carefully observe the environment and check for potential collisions with obstacles.

•

There is an approximate blind area based on the mounting where the cameras cannot see around the periphery of the vehicle. Driver must be careful to check manually these blind spots for potential obstacles to ensure safe maneuvering.

•

The 360° camera system creates a seamless view by stitching images from four cameras aligned to specific geometric orientations. If the position or installation angle of any camera is altered, such as following a collision, the stitching accuracy may be compromised. For safety reasons, avoid using the system until it has been inspected and recallibrated.

•

If the exterior mirror is folded or misaligned, the image stitching for the 360° camera system may become inaccurate.

•

Use the 360° camera only when all the doors, hood and the tailgate is closed.

•

The area around the vehicle is shown using camera stitched images and the car image is a standard graphic shown by the system. Hence the car image shown on the screen is not real and may not represent your actual vehicle.

•

Objects and obstacles above the camera height or out of the field of view of the cameras are not displayed.

•

Camera lenses provide a wide coverage of surroundings which results in objects appearing slightly different from the actual and may not be dimensionally same as real as on the screen.

9.3.1 360° Camera Activation and Deactivation

Use any of the following methods to activate 360° Camera

•

Select “360° camera” Icon from CID screen app drawer.

•

Engage reverse mode using shift by lever.

•

Select “360° camera” from the roof console.

360° camera deactivates when one of the following action is performed

•

Driver presses “Close button” in 360° camera app in CID screen.

•

360° camera switch is pressed again.

•

Vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h while driving forward unless 360° camera activation was done above 20 km/h.

•

Vehicle is changed from non-park (N/D/R) to park mode (P) and no operation has been performed for 8 seconds.

Under any circumstances, Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons do not accept any responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

When reverse mode is engaged, 360° camera cannot be deactivated by 360° camera switch or close button.

360° Camera is a supplementary driving assist function therefore under any circumstance it cannot replace vigilance or responsibility of driver. Always pay attention and check the vehicle's surroundings for safety. Do not solely rely on what is displayed on the screen. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location and surroundings.

9.3.2 360° Camera Views

360° camera provides various features for assistance such as

•

2D front (panoramic view, normal view, top view)

•

2D rear (panoramic view, normal view, top view)

•

Corner views

•

3D view

•

Parking guidelines

•

Transparent view

•

Blind view monitor

The system allows for enhanced interaction, enabling the driver to swipe, zoom in, and zoom out on 3D view. The respective 2D/3D view can be displayed on the left side of the top view for convenience.

Refer to the following sections for detailed instructions on using each feature effectively.

How to select views

•

For the ease of the driver, names of all the views have been provided in the app along with the icon rib.

•

The small car icon on the top left corner of the top view panel is the transparent view icon.

•

When in 3D view touch the car model on top view screen to enable 8 oval touch points around the vehicle and by selecting each touch points 3D surrounding of the vehicle can be seen from 8 different angles.

•

3D View will not be available at vehicle speed above 20 km/h.

•

8 Oval touch points in top view will be automatically hidden if no operations is performed for 8 seconds.

•

Transparent view will not be available on speed above 20 km/h.

•

The video feed displayed beneath the vehicle in transparent view is not a real-time feed.

•

Maintain sufficient distance to the obstacles so that the exterior mirrors or the corners of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.

Sl. No	Icons	Description
1.		Front 2D View: Assists the driver to view front surrounding in 2D.
2.		Front Wide View: Assists the driver to view panoramic surroundings.
3.		Front Top View: Assists the driver to view zoomed-in front top of the vehicle.
4.		Rear 2D View: Assists the driver to view rear surroundings in 2D.
5.		Rear Wide View: Assists the driver to view panoramic surroundings.
6.		Rear Top View: Assists the driver to view zoomed-in rear top of the vehicle.
7.		All Corner View: Displays the view close to all four tyres i.e, front left, front right, rear left, and rear right.
8.		Front Corner View: Displays the view close to front two tyres ie, front left and front right.
9.		Rear Corner View: Displays the view close to rear two tyres ie, rear left and rear right.
10.		3D View: Assists the driver to view stitched 360° surroundings equipped with swipe, zoom-in, and zoom-out functionality.
11.		Transparent View: Assists the driver to view the road beneath the vehicle.

•

A pop-up message on the screen appears

When:

- The front door is open.

- The rear door is open.

- The frunk is open.

- The tailgate is open.

360° camera displays the combined images from the four cameras. Therefore, the displayed image may be different from the actual vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the vehicle.

9.3.3 Static and Dynamic Guidelines

Static and dynamic guidelines can be used as reference for parking and maneuvers only and may differ if camera orientation is altered due to passenger occupancy.

•

Static Guidelines provide indicative distance of the objects with reference to vehicle.

•

Color coding (Red = 0.5 m, Orange = 1 m, Green = 3 m) on the static lines help in assessing the distance of the obstacles [at the leveled ground] from the vehicle’s boundary.

•

Dynamic Guidelines (Blue) indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with reference to the current steering angle.

9.3.4 Swivel Mode

Feature assists by providing additional left or right view area along with dynamic guidelines (Blue colour) when driver rotates the steering wheel anti-clockwise or clockwise respectively.

Left Side

Right Side

9.3.5 Blind View Monitor (BVM)

Blind View Monitor provides left and right rear views which are in blind area and assists the driver during switching lanes or cutting in to another road. The view will be visible on driver display and by turning the indicator up or down, the view can be changed to left and right respectively.

Pre-Conditions

•

For BVM to work, all doors should be closed.

•

BVM should be enabled in CID.

Steps to Activate/Deactivate:

•

BVM can be activated/deactivated in My Vehicles >> Exterior >> Mirrors >> Blind View Monitor (Enable/Disable).

•

To turn off BVM, switch off turn indicator.

Left Side

Right Side

Other warning messages on driver display take priority over BVM hence BVM may not be available always when you activate it.

BVM view may not be visible clearly during nighttime due to camera limitations.

BVM only provides view assistance and may not detect, alert or control any vehicles in blind area. Like all assistance functions, BVM has limitations. Sole reliance on the system may result in a collision. The driver must remain active and take control of the vehicle at all times during use of this feature.

Objects are closer than they appear. Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change the lane before doing so may result in crash and serious injury or death.

9.3.6 Parallel and Perpendicular Parking Assistance

Disclaimer

Parallel and Perpendicular Parking are only assistance and driver should take care of surrounding for collisions.

A. Perpendicular Parking

Step 1: Select the Perpendicular Parking Mode under parking tab of 360 camera application.

Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the parking slot view.

•

It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely.

Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking.

•

Move the vehicle either forward or backward so that the end point of the shortest arc [either blue or green, based on the side in which the vehicle will be parked], is coinciding with the parking slot line. (Blue arc line as shown in the image )

•

Once it is done, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking slot, till the rack end/extreme end move of steering wheel.

Step 3: Parking the Vehicle

•

Start Reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and reverse car until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete.

•

Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping.

B. Parallel Parking

Step 1: Choose the Parallel Parking Mode under parking tab of 360 camera application.

•

Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that Camera can have the parking slot view and choose Parallel parking icon from settings.

•

Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side as below image.

Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking

•

Move the vehicle forward or backward, so that the one of the rectangular box is placed inside the parking slot.

•

Make sure there are no obstacles in the green parking slot after orange pole.

•

Turn the steering wheel in the direction in which parking is intended.

Step 3: Park the Vehicle

•

Hold the steering in the current position once selecting the parking area after turning the steering wheel as the area color turns green as in below image screens.

•

Now start reversing the vehicle. An arc will appear on the screen . Stop reversing the vehicle when the arc touches the end of parking slot.

•

Now turn the steering in the opposite direction until the rack end/ extreme end move of steering wheel [i.e, full rotation] and start reversing the vehicle.

•

Continue reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and keep reversing the vehicle until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is complete.

•

Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping.

9.3.7 Recording

Recording provides ability to save video output from all 4 360° camera available in the vehicle. Recording can be directly invoked through 360° camera application available in App drawer.

Recording will be enabled only when a USB drive is connected in vehicles DVR port.

The USB drive used should have minimum standard of USB 2.0 and can be of any storage size.

For smooth recording USB 3.0 drives are recommended.

Use the following method to activate recording

1. Select “360° camera” icon from CID screen app drawer.

2. Tap on the record button provide in bottom left corner of the screen.

•

The saved video file name is as per date and time of recorded video. Video files are saved with MP4 file extension.

Eg. File Name:

Video File Name Format Eg: VID_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS_XX; where XX corresponds to the Type of Recording — personal recording:

01Mar23 - DDMMYYYY (D-Day, M-Month, Y-Year)

163028 - HHMMSS (H-Hour,M-Minute, S-Second)

View the Recording files:

Recordings saved in USB drive can be viewed only when it is connected with vehicle through Media port.

The user can play video ﬁles on the CID screen when the vehicle is in Park Mode.

1. To view the recordings open CID app drawer and Select “Gallery” application.

2. Then 'Select Source' option provided in the top right corner and select USB.

3. Select the 'Videos' tab from the library. A list of available video ﬁles in the selected storage space will be displayed.

4. Click on the required video ﬁle to play.

9.3.8 360° Camera Settings Menu

1. Default View: Driver can select default view for 360° camera as per convenience.

2. Brightness control: Driver can adjust brightness for 360° camera as per convenience.

3. Swivel Mode: Driver can enable/disable swivel mode for 360° camera as per convenience.

4. 3D:

a. 3D Surround Scan: Driver can enable/disable 3D surround scan for 360° camera as per convenience.

b. Automatic side view based on turn indicator: Driver can enable/disable automatic side view based on turn indicator for 360° camera as per convenience.

5. Overlays:

a. Parking Sensor: Driver can select the type of view in parking sensor for 360° camera as per convenience.

b. Guidelines: Driver can select the type of view in guidelines for 360° camera as per convenience.

6. Automatic top view based on parking sensor: Driver can enable/disable the feature for 360° camera as per convenience.

9.3.9 360° Camera Troubleshooting

•

When there is any error in system/camera or any connection is loose, the displayed screen will be either blue or green screen with pop up as "Please contact service center". Visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

9.3.10 System Limitations

•

360° camera is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc).

- At night or in very dark places.

- Display may flicker, if the area around cameras is lit by LED or any fluorescent lighting.

- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot.

- If the vehicle is damaged or/and if any camera position or/and the settings is changed.

- When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres in front of the camera lens.

- When strong light rays fall on the camera. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset).

- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge).

•

Video may get blur if camera is exposed to bright light and area around is dark/shadowed.

•

360° camera images are reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing and stitching.

•

If video file is corrupted, you may observe black screen while replaying the video and system will reset to default view.

•

If the USB is corrupted or disconnected, recordings may not be available/saved.

•

360° camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective.

•

Driver should avoid using 360° camera in case of color blindness or impaired color vision.

•

Objects above the ground or hanging objects may appear to be farther away than they are. However, in reality, objects may be closer to the car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increases the risk of collision with your car.

•

360° camera video is shown based on driver activation, but it cannot be used to see a complete surrounding view. The feature cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors.

•

Some obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognize due to stitched images, hence sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.

•

When 360° camera parts need to be replaced due to damage/ non-functioning / any other reason, the app will not open on clicking and gives a pop up as “360° camera app not available.”.

System Maintenance

•

Always keep all camera lens clean & scratch free. Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error and reduced visibility.

•

Always use clean water and soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.

•

Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the cameras with a power washer.

•

Avoid direct contact of camera lens to high temperature areas, materials, etc.

•

Avoid camera lens damage due to car polish or solvents.

•

Always clean camera lens smoothly and don’t apply much pressure.

10 Climate Control System

Climate Control System provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically / manually adjust the air flow distribution pattern, air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment,
by appropriately selecting the options provided on the Center Information Display (CID) touchscreen, located on center console and occupant’s comfort can be ensured.
Climate control system also helps in defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of the blower.
PTC type electric cabin heater is used to heat the cabin air, when hot air is needed. For cooling the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil.
Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change.

Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure.

The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite.

They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service Climate control system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling. Mahindra shall not be liable for any loss or damage result from such self-servicing. Further, such self-servicing will void the warranty.

If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, you may suffocate to death due to lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.

Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by blower, throughout the passenger compartment.

To ensure sufficient air flow and adequate Climate control system performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions. Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also, keep the area in front of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.

During charging of the vehicle in ignition OFF condition, sometimes it can be observed that the A/C touch control panel lights turning ON. This is a normal behavior and happens since the A/ C compressor is active for battery cooling. However, cabin A/C will not turn ON unless it is turned ON by the user either through the ICC switch input or through the app.

10.1 Air Vents

A	Front Defogger	D	Front Foot Vents
B	Side Defogger Vents	E	Rear AC Center Vents
C	Front Vents

Front Vents: User can adjust the direction of the airflow by adjusting the louvers.

Rear AC Center Vents: Rear AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console. They can be closed if not required.

10.2 Climate Control through Center Information Display (CID) Screen

•

Press App Drawer >> Climate >> Classic/Smart.

10.2.1 Climate Controls – Classic

A	AQI Indicator	J	Power ON/OFF
B	Air Ionizer Indicator	K	Sync Mode
C	Auto Modes	L	Driver Only
D	Rear Defogger	M	Face Mode (Driver)
E	Front defogger	N	Foot Mode
F	Auto Defogger	O	Blower Speed control
G	Recirculation/Fresh Air mode	P	SET Temperature — Co-driver
H	Rear A/C (ON/OFF)	Q	Blower Speed
I	A/C (ON/OFF)	R	SET Temperature — Driver

Sync mode, Driver Only mode, Individual temperature control for driver and co-driver is applicable only if the vehicle is equipped with Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC).

Power ON/OFF: Touch to turn on/off the climate control system.

Auto Mode: Auto mode controls the blower speed automatically. There are 3 auto modes - Auto 1, Auto 2 and Auto 3. Each auto mode will have different blower speeds in the increasing order,
i.e, Auto mode 1 will have lower blower speeds, Auto mode 2 will have medium blower speeds and Auto mode 3 will have higher blower speeds.

In these auto modes, based on the user set temperature, other modes are automatically adjusted to attain desired comfort inside the vehicle.

In extreme high/low ambient conditions, blower speed will be set higher even in Auto 1 mode, to meet the requirements. Once the set temperature is attained in the cabin, blower speed will be reduced.

If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by pressing the dual mode icon and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control. When user adjusts the blower speed or air mode or defogger settings during auto mode, AUTO indicator on the display turns off (auto mode exits) and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.

AQI Indicator : AQI indicator displays Air Quality Index value inside the cabin.

VR LED Indicatior (If Equipped): "Air filter ON" indicates the air VR LED is working to purify and remove the bad odor from the air.

Rear Defogger: Touch to turn on/off the rear defogger. The rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist.

If the rear defogger icon is not turned OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on ambient temperature. If user needs rear defogger still, turn it ON again.

On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will reduce to half the duration of the first activation.

Front Defogger: Touch to turn on/off the windshield defogger. The windshield defogger heats the windshield clearing the fog / mist.

Auto Defogger: Touch to turn on/off auto defogger. Auto defogger will heat the front windshield upon detecting mist/fog, it will turned off automatically once fog/mist is cleared.

Fresh Air / Recirculation Mode: Touch to toggle between fresh air mode and recirculation mode. In recirculation mode air inside the vehicle will recirculate instead of the outside air, which will help the vehicle cool faster. In fresh air mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to cool/hear the cabin.

Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen.

Air Distribution (Face / Foot) Modes: Touch on the desired mode of face/foot to direct airflow towards face/upper body or foot/lower body. This adjustment is available for both driver and co-driver shown on respective side in the climate control screen.

Individual mode controls for driver and co-driver is applicable only if vehicle is equipped with Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC).

Rear A/C : Touch to turn on/off the air conditioning system for second row seated passengers.

A/C: Touch to turn on/off the air conditioning. Turning it off will allow only the blower to run with the ambient temperature.

Sync: Touch to turn on/off the sync mode. Turning it on will keep same set temperature settings on both driver and co-drive side.

Driver Only: Touch to turn on/off the driver only mode. In driver-only mode, the airflow and air conditioning will be directed only to the driver’s side vents. This can be used if the vehicle is occupied by driver alone with no passengers.

Blower Speed Control: Touching -/+ will decrease or increase the blower speed between 1 to 8.

Set Temperature: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase temperature. This option is available for both driver and co-driver.

10.2.2 Climate Control – Smart

Climate Control - Smart

Tap on smart tab available at the top of CID screen to enter smart mode selection. under it following Smart modes can be activated:

Keep (If Equipped)

Pawpal (If Equipped)

CampMe (If Equipped)

Clear view

A/C max

ECON

Keep Mode (If Equipped)

Keep temperature prevents overheating of the cabin in scorching heat. When you leave your car parked in the sun, keep mode will ensure more comfortable interior when you return to it. Using this mode requires energy from the battery, which may decrease range. Keep mode will not activate if the battery charge is lower than 35%

PawPal Mode (If Equipped)

PawPal maintains comfortable cabin temperature for your pet. Using PawPal requires energy from the battery, which may decrease range. PawPal will not activate if the battery charge is lower than 35%

The screen will display the current cabin temperature to inform people passing by your pet is safe. You are responsible for the safety of your dog or pet!

CampMe Mode (If Equipped)

CampMe is designed to maintain cabin temperature while you remain in your vehicle. When enabled, Along with climate control, it keeps the infotainment system accessible so you can power electronics through the USB ports, play music or watch videos. While CampMe is active, Sentry mode and the vehicle alarm system are disabled. Using CampMe requires energy from the battery, which may decrease range. CampMe will not activate if the battery charge is lower than 35%

Clear View Mode:

Clear view helps to get rid of ice and misting of the windscreen quickly by automatically turning on the defog/defrost features and Fresh air intake.

A/C Max Mode:

A/C max is designed for maximum cooling effect. When activated climate control will start cooling the interior to the lowest temperature by operating HVAC in full efficiency with active recirculation, and maximum blower speed.

ECON Mode:

ECON mode allow you to save energy and range by lowering the efficiency of the cooling unit and will reach the targeted temperature in the cabin longer than expected. It's recommended to use when battery charge is low (under 30%). You can turn ECON mode automatically together with power saving mode.

In ECON mode ON, Blower speed will be lower and cooling effect will be reduced.

Quiet Mode:

When an incoming call is received on the connected Bluetooth device, Quiet Mode will be enabled by default. When its is enabled HVAC blower speed will automatically reduce to level 3, (if running above it)

Quiet mode can be disabled by tapping on the “reduce fan” button on CID active caller id screen.

10.2.3 Climate Control – Schedule (If Equipped)

Schedule climate allows user to save 2 pre defined scheduled HVAC operation.

To configure a schedule click on the settings icon near respective schedules.

Select the day or frequency in which the HVAC to be turned ON and click on next.

Set the HVAC temperature, departure time and click on finish setup.

10.2.4 Auto Operation Mode

Press the AUTO icon.

Select the desired Auto mode based on the blower speed requirement (Auto1, Auto2 or Auto3).

Set the desired cabin temperature with the set temperature controls.

The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature.

If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by turning OFF the sync mode and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control.

When you adjust blower speed or change any other modes, climate control comes out of auto mode and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.

Individual temperature controls for driver and co-driver is applicable only if vehicle is equipped with Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC).

10.2.5 Manual Operation Mode

Press AC ON icon.

Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature controls.

Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed controls.

Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution mode icons.

Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode icon.

In manual mode, you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling the temperature, blower speed and other mode buttons in the climate control screen.

To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO icon.

10.2.6 Climate system controls - Floating bar

The climate system control floating bar can also be accessed through the following methods:

1. HVAC button in ICC switch	2. Blower Fan symbol

Floating bar

1. Expand Icon: Pressing this icon will take you to the climate control screen.

2. Recirculation Mode Icon: User can toggle between the fresh air mode and recirculation mode by pressing this icon.

3. Auto Mode Icon: User can turn ON auto mode and toggle between different auto modes by pressing this icon.

4. Rear Defogger Icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF rear defogger.

5. Front Defogger Icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF front defogger.

6. Blower Controls: User can increase or decrease the blower speed by pressing +/- buttons.

7. Driver Seat Air Ventilation: User can turn ON driver seat air ventilation and toggle between different fan speeds by pressing this icon.

8. Foot Mode Icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF foot mode.

9. Face Mode Icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF face mode.

10. Set Temperature Controls: User can increase or decrease the set temperature by pressing +/- buttons.

10.3 Remote Cabin Cooling/Heating

Remote Cabin Cooling/Heating feature allows user to turn ON and control air conditioning from outside the vehicle.

•

During remote cooling operation, cabin temperature settings will be changed to default 22 deg C in Auto mode 1. User can decide whether to heat or cool the cabin by increasing or decreasing the set temperature from Me4U app.

•

The vehicle cabin will be cooled or heated before you enter, making it more comfortable when you get in after the car has been parked in the hot sun or in cold weather.

Remote Cooling Activation

Remote cooling starts automatically once the user presses "ON/OFF" icon in the Me4U mobile app.

When using the mobile app, the user will have access to control the following settings under "Climate" tab.

Duration Time: Users can select the time duration for which remote cooling must be active using the Me4U mobile app. The duration can be set from a minimum of 5 minutes to a maximum of 15 minutes.

Cabin Temperature Settings: Users can change the temperature settings during remote cooling.

Front Defrost: Users can activate or deactivate the front defrost during remote cooling by selecting the front defrost option in the Me4U mobile app.

Rear Defrost: Users can activate or deactivate the rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting the rear defrost option in the Me4U mobile app.

Auto Defrost: Users can activate or deactivate the auto front defogger during remote cooling by selecting the auto defrost option in the Me4U mobile app.

Remote cooling can be de-activated using mobile app. If the vehicle is already in remote cooling/heating condition, by pressing ON/OFF button, remote cooling will be deactivated.

In mobile app customer will get notification, if Remote cooling is failed.

Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while the vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration.

10.4 Points to Remember

•

For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of the front windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/washer for few times intermittently.

•

If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to remove it before using wiper.

•

In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the defogger before using the windshield washer. Also, use a washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. This will help in preventing the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield.

•

Dirty / contaminated windshield would make misting / fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of the windshield clean.

•

Reduced air flow because of clogged AC filter or any other obstructions in air flow path may lead to inadequate defogging / de-misting performance. If air flow seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned or replaced immediately at an Authorised Mahindra Service Center only. Air flow path should be kept free of obstructions.

•

Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may lead to inadequate defogging / de-misting. If cooling effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air conditioning system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

Your vehicle is equipped with an AC filter. If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the AC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor cooling.

Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This may result in premature failure of system components.

10.5 Replacing Air Conditioner Filter

Replace the air conditioner filter when

Unpleasant odor is experienced at the first AC operation after a long unused period.

Cooling and blower capacity have decreased.

•

Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10000 km of driving at an Authorised Mahindra Service center only. However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.

•

When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heating capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.

AC filter replacement procedure:

To replace the AC filter, the frunk needs to be removed first. After that follow the steps below.

For frunk removal, Refer “Frunk Removal” section in Maintenance chapter for more details.

Remove the filter lid screw which is shown in the image

Slide and remove the filter lid and then pullout the HVAC filter from the blower housing.

Insert the new HVAC filter to the blower housing.

Ensure to install the HVAC particulate filter as per air flow direction (air flow direction arrow engraved on the filter must be pointing downwards while installation).

Slide back the filter lid and refit the filter lid mounting screw to the blower housing.

11 Connectivity and Entertainment

11.1 Software Update

Mahindra determines how, when, and where to send the updates to vehicles based on various factors unique to each release. In settings, user can choose how quickly to receive the updates that are available for the vehicle.

Online System Update:

With the online system update, user can update the software directly in the vehicle.

Requirement: The vehicle must be connected to the Internet.

Downloading Updates:

Online system updates are downloaded automatically and without prior notice, and will resume if necessary once the ignition is turned on again. A message will be displayed in the center screen after the download is complete.

Installing Updates:

Requirement: An online system update must be downloaded, and a notification must be shown in the center display.

•

Park the vehicle safely.

•

Switch the emergency flashers off, if necessary.

•

Make sure that the high-voltage battery is not being charged and that no charging connector is connected to the charging port.

•

Select the notification, or

•

Open the software update notification in the notification center and press on it.

•

Follow the system instructions.

The MAIA will start the installation. When the update has ended, a notification will be displayed.

If the touchscreen displays a message indicating that a software update was not successfully completed, contact nearby Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Your vehicle comes with certain features as subscription and based on the user subscription the feature will be enabled as online software update. The necessary preconditions to be met for the updates and the feature will be enabled in the next drive cycle to the user. The feature applicability will vary according to the vehicle variants and the as per the package selected by the user. Service will automatically stop at the end of your subscription.

To ensure the installation is completed successfully, the ignition must not be switched on during the installation.

The software update screen persists until you install the update. Install a software update as soon as possible. Any harm resulting from failure to install a software update is not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Failure or refusal to install updates can cause some vehicle features to become inaccessible or digital media devices may become incompatible.

Mahindra may update or reinstall your vehicle's software as part of the normal diagnostic, repair, and maintenance process within Mahindra Service.

11.2 Me4U

The Me4U mobile app offers real-time information about your vehicle's location and status.

It enables you to control certain vehicle features and monitor battery health, all in a secure manner.

The app is available for both Android and iOS platforms, it provides a seamless connected car experience. For access to connected car features, please use the Me4U app.

All the connected car features can be accessed through the Me4U mobile app.

11.2.1 KYC (Know Your Customer) Registration

To activate connected car features including access to Me4U mobile app, KYC process must be completed successfully.

•

Customer must produce valid mobile number, communication address and email ID for KYC registration.

•

Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process will be the login for Me4U mobile app.

•

After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “Me4U” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store.

In the event the customer does not download and accept the terms of use of the Me4U app or revokes the consent during the use of the vehicle as a result of which Mahindra cannot access the vehicle data during the warranty period, the warranty shall lapse.

Subscription for the connected car is free for a specified period, depending on the model variant. Post expiry of the free subscription, the same can be renewed by the user for an extended period from the Me4U app.

11.2.2 Login & Registration

Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:

•

Select sign up option in the login page. It will redirect to sign up page.

•

Then enter the registered mobile number given in the KYC form, for connected services. Then click on the Next.

•

OTP with a time validity will be sent to the registered mobile number.

•

If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on "Resend OTP".

•

After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account”.

•

On successful verification you will be notified with a message “Account Verified”.

•

You will be directed to “Terms and Condition” with “I Agree” option on successful authentication.

11.2.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin

This feature allows the existing user to change Password and PIN.

In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.

Forgot your password

In case you forget your password:

•

Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page.

•

In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP.

•

Enter the OTP and click on Submit button.

•

Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button.

Change your password

To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:

•

Tap on the top left corner from home screen to go to hamburger menu.

•

Click on profile and tap on the profile settings Change Password.

•

Tap on the access protection and select Change password.

•

Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm password fields.

•

Fill all the required field and tap on save button.

11.2.4 Me4U Connect Features

FEATURE	DESCRIPTION
Alerts
Over Speed Alert	When your car exceeds the set speed limit.
Tyre Pressure Alert	Alerts on high/low tyre pressure. Please correct the tyre pressure.
Personalized Safety Alert	When the vehicle crosses the set speed (Set in the mobile app). Then it gives a voice alert to the occupants.
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert	Notifies when vehicle start /stop event is detected.
Door Open Alert	It notifies when any of the doors is open while vehicle is moving. When you trigger for door lock and the door remains open unintentionally.
Geo-Fence Alert	When the vehicle moves out of the defined boundary. Then it gives an alert. It helps to create a virtual boundary for any region. Each time the vehicle moves out of the boundary, the app will get a notification.
Unauthorized Vehicle Entry Alert	Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected.
Route Deviation Alert	Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path.
Time Fencing Alert	Notifies you when any movement of the vehicle is detected during set time fence period.
Seat Belt Alert	Notifies in the app whenever any of the occupant in the car is not wearing the seat belt during the vehicle movement.
Insurance Expiry Alert	Suggests and notifies the user to renew in advance, when the insurance is about to expire.
Service Reminder	This feature alerts the user for periodic service due.
Key Fob Battery Low Alert	This feature alerts the user when the key fob battery is low.
Brake pad wear alert	This feature alerts the user when front/rear brake pad is worn out. Visit to nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Center.
LV Battery Drain Alert #	Alert the user in mobile app when LV battery is getting discharged continuously. Contact Authorised Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Critical Malfunction Alert	Alert the user in mobile app when any critical malfunction is detected in the vehicle. Park the vehicle and contact Authorised Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
High Motor Temperature Alert	Alert the user via mobile app when motor temperature is high. Park the vehicle and contact Authorised Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Low Charge Alert #	Notify the user through the mobile app when the charge is low. Charge at the earliest.
Battery Charger Connection/Disconnection Alert	Notify the user when the battery charger is connected or disconnected.
Energy Save Mode Alert	Notify when the energy saver mode is enabled.
De-rating Alert	Notifies the user when power de-rating is activated.
Critical Battery Concern Alert	Alerts the user when there is a critical concern observed in HV battery.
External Charger Malfunction Alert #	An alert will be sent to the mobile app, if the external charger is faulty.
Battery High Temperature Alert	Alerts the user when there is high battery temperature. Park the vehicle and contact Authorised Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Energy
Charge Assist	The battery charging assistant provides insights like wait times, charging speed, tariff-based charge recommendations, and nearby charge locations.
Battery Charge Reminder	Notifies the customer to charge the vehicle when SOC goes below a defined threshold.
Set Charge Limit	Allows user to set the charging limit.
Charging Insights	Allows user to view charging insights, including the charging rate, battery percentage, remaining time to full charge, and charging efficiency report.
Location Based Service
Live Tracking	GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time. Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when the vehicle is in movement. Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time with your family and friends.
Save Place	Provision to save a place.
Find My Car	Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate the vehicle.
Share My Car Location	Helps to share the car location with friends and family.
Push to Car	Allows the user to push routes / location from the mobile app to the vehicle.
Ecosense	Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip.
Trip History	Provides detailed information about the trips.
Weekly Report	Provides details about Ecosense parameters for a defined time period.
Pit Stop	Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra Dealership etc.
Journey Planner	Plan your trip by entering destination.
Real Time Traffic Update	Provides real-time traffic information for the set destination in CID/DID.
Locate My SUV	Enable user to navigate to vehicle parked location from mobile application.
Follow My Car	Allows to follow the car by providing navigation of other user in CID.
Travelogue	Enables user to create a story about places visited in the form of short video with option to add photos. The travelogue video can be shared to social media platforms.
Last Mile Navigation	The navigation from CID shall be pushed by the user to mobile app to assist the user to smoothly navigate to the required destination.
ETA	Allows the user to know the Estimated Time of Arrival of your vehicle at your current mobile location.
APK Feature
Vehicle to Home/Smart Home Control	Allows user to link home Alexa to the vehicle's Alexa and able to control the smart devices from vehicle automatically, by configuring a boundary location.
System Updates	Provides a notification about software updates.
Remote Features
Remote Climate Control	Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app.
Remote Window Up/Down	Allows the user to remotely control the driver window using mobile app.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock	Provides access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary.
Remote Lamp On/Off	Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app.
Remote Tailgate Control	Allows user to remotely control tailgate.
Remote Drive Enable	Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app.
Remote Start and Stop Charging for EV	Enables the user to remotely start and stop battery charging.
Remote Charger Lock/Unlock	The user can remotely lock / unlock the charger.
Read Vehicle Status
Check Door Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door.
Check Tyre Pressure	Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure.
Check Lamp Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp.
Check ODO	Allows the customer to check the odometer reading of the vehicle.
My SUV Info	Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant etc.
Check AC Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the AC.
Seat Belt Status	Helps the user to check the seat belts are buckled or not.
Read Charging Status	Allows user to check the charging status.
Safety
Valet Mode	Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access the valet mode is 1234, which can be reset by the user.
SOS (e-Call) #	By pressing the SOS icon or in case of accident, emergency call will be triggered from vehicle to the 108 emergency service, SMS will be sent to Me4U app and emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
Safety Sense	Safety insights of all the ADAS events and reports shall be pushed to cloud and mobile app.
Personal Health Monitoring	Provide insights by monitoring the health vitals through the smart watch during the driving.
Speed Limiter	User can set the vehicle speed limit using mobile app which shall restrict the vehicle speed below the user defined speed limit.
Others
Do Not Disturb	Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any notification when the mobile is detected in the vehicle.
Eco Contribution	Provides data about the user’s contribution to sustainable future.
Contact Us	Any query / enquiry about the product, get info on Mahindra. Send an inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details.
My Documents	Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance etc.
Service booking	Allows the user to schedule a service.
Maintenance Alert	Help user to track the maintenance of the component and provides alert.
Vehicle Digital Passport	Generates a vehicle passport after analyzing the vehicle's maintenance history.
App Store	The user app offers various applications, allowing users to purchase SDV packages from the app store.
Service Reminder	Users can set reminders to receive alerts for the vehicle servicing.
Request App access	Allows the user to share the application access to two more users.
Profile Manager	Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby providing sync between both.
Smart Wearable	Me4U app for the watch allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch (In Android and iOS).
Toll Dairy	This feature helps to check the toll amount for the selected route and toll amount can be recharged via Me4U app as well. It also provides you alert whenever your toll balance is minimal.
Personalized Greetings	Personalized welcome message, which are configurable by the user, when the vehicle is unlocked and driver door is opened, audio configured runs in the vehicle (Ex: Kids voice, Favorite music, Favorite hero dialogues).
Feature Auto Suggestion	This feature analysis the user last 3 months feature usage pattern and suggests the user on the non-utilized features.
MLens	Using this feature additional information about the telltale in the DID.
Ask Mahindra #	By pressing the Ask Mahindra icon, a call is triggered to the dedicated Authorised Mahindra Service Center. This feature helps the customer to connect with the Mahindra executive for any queries/ support related to vehicle.
Road Side Assistance (RSA) #	By pressing the RSA icon, a call is triggered to the Roadside Assistance provider’s help line.
In - Home Alexa	Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands).
Dynamic Screen Saver	Allow to push a screen saver to vehicle from mobile app to CID.
Share in vehicle moments via social media	Allows user for face time and taking selfies and share the same to social media and mobile app.

11.3 Power Outlet

Front Row USB Type C Port

A	LH - Charging USB Port (if equipped)
B	RH - USB Port

USB (A) can be used only for charging.

USB (B) as per the image provided can be used as an input to the music system. You can connect iPod, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input and listen to the music through the vehicle speakers.

It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while driving may distract your attention and lead to an ACCIDENT.

Rear row - 65W ‘C’ type charging ports	A 65W 'C' type charging port is available on both the rear of the front seats.
12V Power Outlet	The 12V power outlet socket is located on the right-hand side of the boot area as shown in the image. It can be used to power electrical equipment and appliances such as mobile chargers and cigarette lighters.

The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ON positions.

The power socket and attached accessory can become hot.

Precautions while using Accessories trough 12V power socket

To avoid serious injury:

•

Close the power outlet cap when not in use.

•

Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.

•

When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer's instruction manual.

•

Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.

•

Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet.

•

Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances.

•

Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.

Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Service Center for any necessary repairs. Unauthorized modifications or improper use of the power outlet may result in electrical hazards, fire, or system malfunctions. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered your warranty.

To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:

•

Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.

•

Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating.

•

Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed.

•

Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V.

•

Do not exceed the maximum power of the sockets.

•

Do not hang any accessory from the socket. Always keep the power socket caps closed when not in use.

•

Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle.

11.4 Wireless Mobile Charging (If Equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with two wireless mobile charging units positioned below the front USB ports in the center console.

Please ensure that the phone is compatible to the charging standard “Qi”.

Wireless Mobile Charging Unit - Front

To access the front wireless mobile charging unit, place the smart phone on the wireless charging pad as per the orientation recommended by manufacturer. Once charging is complete close the door.

To Enable/Disable the Wireless Charging System in CID

App Drawer C>> My Vehicle >> Interior >>
Convenience >> Wireless Charging System (Enable/Disable).

Enable Wireless Charging: Enables wireless charging for compatible devices when placed on the charging pad.

Disable Wireless Charging: Disables wireless charging to support power-saving preferences, manage heat, or extend battery lifespan.

The wireless charging will work only when the ignition is ON. It will not work when the vehicle is in accessory mode or in ignition OFF condition.

Follow the below steps to charging mobile in wireless mobile charger:

To start wireless charging, place the smart-phone equipped with wireless charging function on the wireless charging pad and turn the ignition ON.

For best wireless charging results, place the smart phone in the center of the charging pad. Phone charging indication will appear on the CID screen.

The wireless charging system is designed for one smart device confirming to QI standard only. Please refer to your smart phone’s user manual or the website of the manufacturer to check whether your smart phone supports QI wireless charging.

Do’s and Dont’s

Do’s

Please ensure that the phone is compatible to the charging standard “Qi”.

Place the smart phone on the center of the charging pad for best results.

User shall clean charging pad/mat periodically to avoid dust accumulation.

In case of water / liquid spillage on charging pad, dry out the pad surface area properly by removing anti-skid mat. Do not charge the smart phone until surface is completely dry.

The smart phone may become hot while charging. Please be cautious about the high temperature while picking up the smart phone from the charging pad. Please do not force cool the phone by placing it before the AC vent. The forced cooling causes the phone charging to shut off as a protective measure by few phone manufacturers.

Wireless charger works on principle of magnetic induction, i.e. it converts electrical energy into magnetic energy to transfer energy from charging pad to phone. Please maintain safe distance from the charger most of the time as it may cause irritation to sensory organs or active implants if implemented in the body. Please consult medical specialist in case implant organ in the body of the user.

Cooling fan will turn ON during wireless mobile charging to cool the mobile and support charging.

If the wireless charging does not work gently pick and place your smart phone towards the center of the charging pad until charging will start (specifically for small size phone) and charging pop-up appears on head unit.

Dont’s

Do not use metallic smart phone covers as it would halt the wireless charging function. The wireless charging may not function properly when there is a heavy and thick accessory cover on the smart phone.

Do not use Magsafe covers with the phone while charging on wireless charger as the extra magnet in the covers interferes with the charging and does not allow the phone to charge.

Do not place smart phone up-side down on charging pad or do not misalign mobile phone on charging pad in such case smart phone charging will not happen.

Please remove any objects such as metallic objects like coins, smart keys, electronic cards e.g. credit card, debit card, smart card from the charging pad as it may disrupt the charging process and/or may damage the card in such case, ‘Foreign object detection’ alert shall be displayed in Driver Information Display (DID).

Please do not put any liquid (e.g. water, cold drink, and sanitizer), dust particles or flammable object on anti-skid mat.

Do not cover the wireless charger with a cloth or other object while charging. It may heat up the device and reduce the charging efficiency.

Do not disassemble, modify or remove the wireless charger. Do not apply force or impact to the wireless.

It is recommended to place the phone on the center of the charger’s pad to start charging.

Before charging remove the phone cover / case to improve charging efficiency.

When the ignition is off and a door is opened, if a mobile phone is left on the wireless charging pad, a 'Mobile Left Over' alert will appear on the DID.

If any metallic object such as coins is placed between the wireless charger and the smart phone, the charging will be stopped and a warning “Foreign object detected’ will be displayed on the DID. Kindly remove the coin or the metallic object. This is done to stop heating of the metallic object which might hurt the driver or the passengers.

If the phone is misaligned in the charging pad, it may not charge. It may give you a warning in DID.

Do not place any smart key on the charging pad.

Keep the charging pad clean and dry.

Do not keep any Debit / Credit card between the phone and the charger. It may damage the card. A warning is displayed on the DID for the same in such case "Please remove NFC card" alert is displayed in DID.

11.5 Vehicle Engine Sound Synthesis (VESS) – SonicSuite

VESS in electric vehicles, artificially generates audible vehicle sounds to compensate for the absence of noise produced by internal combustion engines. Since electric powertrains operate with minimal acoustic output, VESS plays a critical role in enhancing pedestrian safety, improving driver feedback.

Interior

In this interior tab, by clicking the Sound ON, we can choose various in-built driving sounds inside the car.

Types of signature lamps in Interior:

Drive mode

Range

Everyday

Race

Technosynth

Formula E

Interior - Drive mode

Characteristic sound emitted from the internal speakers based on the selected drive mode.

Interior - Range

Characteristic sound of the ‘Range’ drive mode emitted from the internal speakers.

Interior - Everyday

Characteristic sound of the ‘Everyday’ drive mode emitted from the internal speakers.

Interior - Race

Characteristic sound of the ‘Race’ drive mode emitted from the internal speakers.

Interior - Technosynth

A fusion of techno and synthwave, reimagined.

Interior - Formula E

A custom sound mode inspired by Formula E, merging the raw thrill of electric motorsport with the bold presence of the BE 6 FE.

Exterior

All the modes, listed in the interior tab is available in Exterior also, by clicking the Sound ON, user can hear the driving sound outside the car.

Types of signature lamps in Exterior:

Range

Race

Formula E

Exterior - Range

Characteristic sound of the ‘Range’ drive mode emitted from the external speakers.

Exterior - Race

Characteristic sound of the ‘Race’ drive mode emitted from the external speakers.

Exterior - Formula E

A custom sound mode inspired by Formula E, merging the raw thrill of electric motorsport with the bold presence of the BE 6 FE.

11.6 Alexa Reference Guide

Alexa Built-in is your in-car voice assistant that helps you stay connected, entertained, and in control hands-free. With Alexa, you can play music, get directions, control smart home devices, and even operate certain car functions using simple voice commands

11.6.1 Registering / Signing In to Alexa

•

Have an active Amazon account which can be created using below URL
https://www.amazon.in/

•

Install Alexa App in your mobile device and sign in with same account.

•

Follow the Instruction on the mobile app to complete the account settings before Sign-in into Car.(Refer Alexa Companion app section)

Alexa sign in

•

Open Alexa application from CID app drawer.

•

Click on the “Sign-in” button.

•

Wait for the QR code to be generated.

•

Scan the QR code with your mobile and sign in using your Amazon account. Make sure you create an account at https://www.amazon.in/ before scanning.

•

After signing in, you must grant permissions for Navigation and Contacts. These permissions are required to use navigation features as well as make calls and send messages.

•

Alexa can be triggered using the wake word “Alexa”,

Alexa wake word will be enabled by default.

•

To disable it further open the Alexa app and go to the Alexa settings.

•

Use the toggle button to disable Alexa Wake Word.

11.6.2 Alexa Calls and messages

Alexa Supports Calling and Messaging options.

Follow the below steps to enable Alexa calls and messages.

• Enable Bluetooth in Your Vehicle through App drawer >> Settings >> Connectivity >> Bluetooth, and pair your Phone via Bluetooth.

• Grant Access to Contacts on both CID and mobile device.

• Open the Alexa App from CID → Go to Settings.

• Under Calling & Texting verify whether your Phone Name is Listed under it and Enable Contacts & SMS.

• Go to vehicle Bluetooth Settings and Tap on the setting icon near to the connected device.

•Tap on sync messages and contacts toggle bar.

• Ensure Your Phonebook is Synced in the Vehicle under Home Screen → Phone tile → Contacts).

Sign in to the Alexa Companion App using the same account linked to your vehicle (This is required for sending messages.) refer companion app sign-in process under Alexa.

11.6.3 Alexa Utterances

The basic format for giving a command to Alexa is: Wake Word + Action + Module + Value

Examples:

•

Alexa, turn on the air conditioner

•

Alexa, set the temperature to 25 degrees.

Vehicle control utterances

•

Alexa, turn on Aircon / Air conditioner / AC

•

Alexa, turn off Aircon / Air conditioner / AC

•

Alexa, set to AUTO mode

•

Alexa, turn on fan / blower

•

Alexa, turn off fan / blower

•

Alexa, set fan/blower speed to 6 (any number up to 8)

•

Alexa, set the fan to maximum / set the blower speed to maximum

•

Alexa, decrease the fan speed to minimum

•

Alexa, turn ON/OFF air-recirculation/re-circulation

•

Alexa, Increase Driver temperature (works when HVAC in Dual mode only)

•

Alexa, decrease Driver temperature (works when HVAC in Dual mode only)

•

Alexa, Increase passenger temperature

•

Alexa, decrease passenger temperature

•

Alexa, Increase temperature

•

Alexa, Increase temperature by 2

•

Alexa, open sunroof

•

Alexa, close sunroof

•

Alexa, open window

•

Alexa, close window

•

Alexa, open sky roof

•

Alexa, close sky roof

•

Alexa, set brightness to (1 to 8)

(Only CID brightness can be adjusted).

•

Open home page

•

Open settings page

•

Open Navigation page

Media/Music utterances

•

Alexa, play music

•

Alexa, pause song

•

Alexa, Sing a classical song

•

Alexa, resume

•

Alexa, next song / Alexa, previous song

•

Alexa, increase volume / Alexa, decrease volume

•

Alexa, play 93.5 FM

•

Alexa, play from Bluetooth / Alexa, play from USB

•

Alexa, mute

•

Alexa, unmute

•

Alexa, switch to USB

•

Alexa, switch to Bluetooth/Bluetooth to FM

•

Alexa, switch from Bluetooth to FM

•

Alexa, switch to alexa music

Communication utterances

•

Alexa, call “contact name”

•

Alexa, call (Number)

•

Alexa, send message to “Contact Name”

•

Alexa, read my new messages

Navigation Utterances

•

Alexa, navigate to “Any desired place” (This utterance will redirect to navigation page with the location. Manually start the navigation).

•

Alexa, what is my ETA to “Any desire place”?

•

Alexa, How is the traffic to “Any desire place”?

•

Alexa, cancel navigation

•

Alexa, find nearby parking

•

Alexa, find nearby coffee shop/ restaurant

General assistance utterances

•

Alexa, I am bored

•

Alexa, play with me

•

Alexa, when is Gandhi Jayanthi

•

Alexa, open chat GPT and plan me an itinerary in Chennai

•

Alexa, what’s the weather now?

•

Alexa, what’s the news today?

•

Alexa, what’s the time now?

•

Alexa, Good morning

•

Alexa, what’s the latest news

•

“Alexa, how many stars are there in the universe?”

•

“Alexa, what is the oldest living thing on Earth?”

•

“Alexa, how big is the observable universe?”

•

“Alexa, what is the hardest non material?”

•

“Alexa, when is the next leap year?”

•

“Alexa, how many days are there in this year?”

•

“Alexa, when was the last solar eclipse?”

•

“Alexa, what major scientific discovery happened in 1915?”

11.6.4 Alexa Companion app

Alexa Companion mobile app can be used to manage Alexa-enabled devices, control music playback, shopping list on the go, keep track of upcoming remainders.

Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:

•

Open the application and Select ‘Create Account’ to register a new Amazon account or click on sign in to use your existing Amazon shopping account.

Ensure that you log in with the same Amazon account for Alexa in your vehicle and in this companion application.

•

Click on continue

•

Follow basic set up guidelines.

•

Now Alexa companion is application is ready to be paired with Me4U.

11.6.5 Personalization via Alexa Companion App

Music & media services configuration

•

Open the Alexa Companion App on your mobile device and tap the menu icon (three lines) located at the bottom of the screen.

•

Navigate to Settings and Select Music and Podcasts under Alexa Preferences.

•

Choose Link New Service and select your preferred music application from the list and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the linking process.

Enabling Mahindra Skill for Alexa

If you want to check your vehicle’s status using Alexa devices, you need to enable the Mahindra Skill. By enabling this feature, you can check your vehicle’s status using your mobile device or in-home Alexa-enabled devices. Ensure that you are logged in with the same account on your vehicle system, the Alexa companion app, and your smart home Alexa devices.

There are two ways to do this:

1. Using the Me4U App

2. Using the Alexa Companion App

1. Using the Me4U App

Me4U and Alexa companion application must be installed and logged in before following the below steps.

•

Open the Me4U app on your mobile phone and Tap the three lines (menu) at the top left.

•

Scroll down and select Settings and Go to the In-home Alexa section.

•

Under Amazon Alexa, Tap on Start to link your account with Alexa.

•

You will be redirected to the Alexa companion application with Mahindra skills, Tap on the Link button.

2. Using the Alexa Companion App

•

Open the Alexa companion app and tap the three lines icon at the bottom.

•

Select Skills & Games and search for Mahindra in the search bar and Tap on the Mahindra Skill.

•

You will be redirected to the Mahindra Skill page, Tap Setting and complete account linking.

•

Tap on launch and select your vehicle from the device list.

Enabling Chat GPT skills for Mahindra

• Open the Alexa companion app. Tap the three lines icon at the bottom.

•

Select Skills & Games and Search for Mahindra in the search bar and Tap on the Mahindra Chat GPT Skill.

• Click on enable to use.

• Now Chat GPT is integrated with your vehicles Alexa,

• To disable the chat GPT click on the ‘Disable skill’ tab.

How to use Alexa with Mahindra’s Chat GPT:

• On Using the voice comment —> “Alexa, Open Mahindra’s chat GPT” – Mahindra, chat GPT welcome page will be loaded, then follow with the required request like,“Alexa, tell me about BE 6 FE.”

• In CID Alexa will display about BE 6 FE content pulled from Chat GPT with audio.

Manage Alexa Voice History

Alexa processes your voice commands to provide responses. Voice recordings are securely stored in your Amazon account and can be reviewed or deleted at any time.

To delete recordings or manage privacy settings:

• Open the Alexa Companion App on your mobile device and tap the menu icon (three lines) at the bottom.

• Navigate to Alexa Privacy and select ‘Review Voice History’ to view or delete recordings.

11.6.6 Alexa Animations and Status in Center Information Display

• Listening: A blue chrome bar at the bottom of the screen means Alexa is active and will listen after user says the wake word.

• Processing: A blue chrome bar at the bottom of the screen with pulsing animation means Alexa is processing your request.

• Speaking: A blue chrome bar at the bottom of the screen will pulsate when Alexa speaks back to user. Sometimes Alexa does the action directly by showing a toaster message or display card or by performing the intended action directly.

Connectivity Status

• Alexa icon displayed at the top-left corner of the centre screen indicates that Alexa is signed in and connected.

11.6.7 Alexa Pre-requisites

Required Internet Connectivity Sources

Alexa requires an active internet connection to function properly. You can connect using:

•

Embedded SIM (eSIM) in the vehicle for direct connectivity.

•

Mobile Hotspot from your smartphone or another device.

•

For smooth performance, ensure a stable connection (4G / 5G). Ensuring the optimal speeds improves the overall Alexa experience.

Supported Services and Regional Availability

– Music Services Supported Alexa supports popular music streaming services such as Amazon Music and their Partners based on sometime

– Navigation Providers Supported Alexa supports Navigation features with in-built MAPPLS / Map My India application, making your journeys enriched with voice commands.

– Features Not Available in Certain Regions For the latest list of supported services and regional availability, visit: https://www.amazon.in/alexa

FAQs and Known Limitations

General FAQs

Alexa not working

1. Sign-out and sign-in (also try with other accounts)

2. Set the date & time

3. Sleep/ Ignition cycle or Battery Reset

4. Connect to Wi-Fi

QR Code not generating

– Check ESIM Network:

•

Ensure your device has a stable mobile network signal.

•

If the signal is weak, move to an area with better coverage.

– Verify Internet Connectivity:

•

Open apps like Times Now or Weather to confirm internet access.

•

If these apps load properly, your internet is working.

– If ESIM Network is Fine but QR Code is Not Generating:

Switch to a Wi-Fi connection and try again.

Sometimes QR code generation requires a strong and stable internet connection

If Issue Persists Visit the nearest service Center for assistance.

Troubleshooting

– Alexa not responding or offline

Check if your car is connected to the internet via eSIM or hotspot

– Frequent disconnections

Ensure your hotspot remains active and within range. Disable battery-saving modes on your phone that may turn off the hotspot.

– Slow response or buffering

Verify network speed. Switch to a stronger Wi-Fi or mobile data connection if possible.

Common Issues and Solutions

– Alexa Not Waking Up

Check internet connectivity

– Navigation Not Launching

•

Confirm that the navigation app is installed and linked

•

Restart the CID system and try again.

– Skills Not Responding

•

Ensure the skill is enabled in the Alexa Companion App.

•

Update the app and retry the command.

– Limitations

•

When there is a transition between network to no network zone Alexa icon disappears and will not work

•

“Tell me a story” playback can be controlled only via voice not via display touch.

•

Brightness cannot be set to maximum and minimum via Alexa voice

•

Waypoint cannot be added to Map via Alexa voice

•

Kindle has known limitations. For more details kindly contact service center

•

Controlling Alexa when in USB source or making Alexa to perform in USB mode is not supported.

11.6.8 De-registering / Signing Out of Alexa

De-registering from the CID:

• Open the Alexa application from CID.

• Tap on Settings located at the Top-right corner.

• Scroll down to the bottom of the settings menu and click on Sign Out to de-register your account.

De-registering using Alexa Companion App

• Open the Alexa Companion App on your mobile device.

• Tap on the three lines (menu icon) at the bottom and select Settings.

• Under settings select ‘Device Settings’.

• Choose the account or device you want to de-register.

• Scroll down and tap De-register.

De-registering using Amazon Web Portal

• Go to Devices under your account settings.

• Select the device you want to de-register.

• Click on De-register to remove the device from your account.

12 Charging and Energy Consumption

An electric vehicle operates using a battery and an electric motor. Unlike conventional vehicles, which rely on an internal combustion engine and gasoline as fuel, electric vehicles are powered by electrical energy stored in a high-voltage battery. As a result, electric vehicles are environmentally friendly, as they do not require fossil fuels and produce no exhaust emissions.

Electric Vehicle Characteristics:

•

EVs are powered by electrical energy stored in a high-voltage battery, eliminating the need for traditional fuels like gasoline. This method significantly reduces air pollution, as there are no exhaust emissions, making EVs a cleaner, more environmentally friendly transportation option.

•

EVs are equipped with high-performance motors that provide smooth, efficient power delivery. Unlike traditional ICE vehicles, EVs produce minimal noise and vibrations, offering a quieter and more comfortable driving experience. This contributes to a more serene ride, with less mechanical noise and less vibration felt inside the cabin.

•

When decelerating or driving downhill, regenerative braking is utilized to charge the high voltage battery. This minimizes energy loss and increases the distance to empty.

•

When the battery charge is low, there are several charging options available:

AC Charging: This is the most common method. It is slower but convenient for home charging or public charging stations.

DC Fast Charging: This method uses direct current (DC) to rapidly charge the battery at high power levels, often found at fast-charging stations. DC fast charging is ideal for long trips or quick recharges.

Battery Information:

•

The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage battery that powers the motor and systems like the air conditioning, while a separate 12V auxiliary battery powers components such as the lights, wipers, and audio system.

•

The auxiliary battery is automatically charged when the vehicle is in the "Ready to Drive" mode or when the high-voltage battery is being charged.

12.1 Charging System

A	Normal Charging Port-AC
B	Charging Indications
C	Fast Charging Port-DC

The below chargers comes with selected variants of the vehicle.

12.2 Combined Charge System 2 (CCS2) - Charge Port

Charge Port is located on the rear left side of the vehicle, on the wheel housing assembly.

Unlock the vehicle and gently press on the charging port to open the charging lid.

Normal Charging and Fast Charging are integrated in single port.

Normal Charging Port

Fast Charging Port

Time to charge the battery pack varies based on the state of charge (SOC), ambient and battery temperature. Hence charging time specified is an estimate and may vary.

12.3 Charge Port LED Indication

The Charging port LED will indicate the charging status based on the charging condition.

Indication	Condition
White (Continues ON)	Battery Status
White (Blinking )	System Verification
Blue (Blinking )	Scheduled for Charging
Red (Continues ON)	Low Battery SOC < 10%
Red (Blinking)	Charge Error
Amber (Blinking)	Gun Stuck
Green (Animation)	Charging in Progress

12.4 Normal charging

Power coming from electric grid is in AC, whereas electric power in battery is in DC. Thus, for charging the electric vehicle, power must be converted from AC to DC. Hence, an on-board charger is used for converting AC to DC. AC charging is mostly recommended for usual charging of the vehicle.

The Electric vehicle can be charged by using household electricity with the help of an EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment). The electrical outlet at your home must comply with regulations and must safely accommodate the Voltage / Current (Amps) / Power (Watts) ratings specified on the portable charger.

12.5 Wall Mounted Charger – 11 kW / 7.2 kW (If Equipped)

11kW / 7.2kW AC wall mounted charger comes along with selected variants only.

Charger Specifications
Tentative Time (h) to charge 20 – 100% SOC
Charging Speed	79 kwh Battery
7.2 kW	9
11 kW	5.5

12.5.1 LED Indication

Below are the different color LED’s provided for indicating the status of charging 11 kW / 7.2 kW.

Condition	LED Glow Strategy (X Pattern)
Power OFF	Smoke White
Mode 1: Power ON	Blue Solid
Mode 2: Connected/ Charging not Started	Blue Blink
Mode 3: Charging	Blue running Pattern
Mode 4: Faults	Solid Red
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth Connected	White Blink 3 times and go to intended mode
RFID logo
RFID Logo/ Power OFF	White Background Unit
RFID Logo/ Power ON	White Solid
RFID Connected	White Blink 3 times
Detection Fail	Red Blink 3 times
Infinity logo
Infinity Logo/ Power OFF	White Background Unit
Infinity Logo/ Power ON	White Solid

12.5.2 Charging Procedure:

•

Ensure the charging cable is correctly and securely connected to both the charger and the vehicle.

•

Never plug in or unplug the charger in wet or damp conditions. Moisture can cause electrical shorts or even shock hazards.

Park the vehicle near the charging area.

Engage ‘P’ mode and turn OFF the ignition.

Ensure MCB Main supply is turned ON. First infinity logo will glow then X pattern LED will glow for booting.

Press the charging flap located at the rear side of the vehicle, to open the charging lid (when vehicle is in unlocked condition, flap open with gentle press).

Remove the dust cap in vehicle charging port. Ensure white color LED is glowing in unplugged condition.

After plugging the gun to charger White LED remains ON.

Prepare for charging, blue LED on charger (X pattern) continuously glowing until start charging.

Tap valid unique RFID tag on the card reader to initiate the charging.

After 3 time of RFID LED blinking, charger will initiate charging and X pattern Blue LED will glow in running pattern until reach 100% SOC.

10. After RFID authentication, charging gets initiated and blue color LED running pattern will glow in charger and white LED on vehicle charging port will start blinking one time and then Green LED will glow in tidal pattern until it reaches the target SOC (100%).

Wall Mounted charger

charging port

Charging in Progress, Blue color LED running pattern will glow on the charger once the charging is initiated.

11. Once the charging process gets initiated, the following indications will happen.

Telltale

Current battery level

Charging message

•

Charging alert comes in the DID for few second and charging indication telltale lamp will blink until completion of charging. Refer "Driver Information Display” chapter for more details.

•

The LED indicator light present at the vehicle charging port will starts glowing in green color tidal moment until it reaches target SOC 100%.

12. Once the SOC reaches 100%.

•

The green color LED at the vehicle charging port remains ON.

•

Blue color LED X pattern on the charger remains ON.

Charge indication telltale turns OFF.

Charge finish alert will come in DID after 100% SOC. Green LED indicator of Charge indication telltale lamp in the DID will turn OFF after remove gun from charge port.

•

If the wall mounted charger is in static condition it will go into sleep mode after 5 minute of inactivity.

•

It is recommended to use Mahindra DB box for wall mounted charger and EVSE.

12.5.3 How to Disconnect Normal Charging

Tap RFID tag on card reader to stop charging and disconnect the charger from the vehicle.

Charger gets disconnected and blue X pattern LED starts glowing.

Gently pull-out the charging gun once the charging session is over and fix it on the charger.

Close the charging port dust cap and charging port lid.

If the gun lock is not released, please don’t pull-out the charging gun forcefully out of the vehicle charging port, it may damage the charging port.

As a first step press the “Charge port disconnect switch” in the driver side switch bank to unlock the gun.

If the gun is still unable to release, follow the manual over ride procedure for releasing it.

During charging of the vehicle in ignition OFF condition, sometimes it can be observed that the A/C control panel lights turning ON. This is a normal behavior and happens since the A/C compressor may be active for battery cooling. However, Cabin A/C will not turn ON unless it is turned ON by the user either through the switch input.

Battery Pack	Charger Capacity	Charge Timing (approximate)
79 kwh	11 kw (16 A)	8 hrs
79 kwh	7.2 kw (32 A)	11.7 hrs

Normal Charging: Always charge vehicle to 100% state of charge. Time to charge the battery pack varies based on the state of charge, ambient and battery temperature. Hence charging time specified is an estimate and may vary.

12.5.4 Wall Mounted Charger Installation-
7.2W/11kW

Simple 3 steps of installation for free*

Wall Mounted charger Support to customer

Inhouse dedicated Charge_IN team for Installation, Free Consultation, Free home visit.

Dedicated support centre: 18002679900

Mail: [email protected]

Mandatory DISCOM Approval:

•

Ensure you have capacity approval from the DISCOM (Distribution Company) for installing a 7.2 / 11 kW charger.

•

Using more load than sanctioned may attract penalties from DISCOM and is unsafe.

Check Existing Electrical Infrastructure:

•

Verify if your current electrical wiring size, MCB and EB meter can support the 7.2 / 11 kW charger.

•

Upgrades may be necessary if not as per the recommendation.

Green Meter Installation:

•

Installing a green meter with DISCOM approval can help in reducing the cost per unit of electricity consumption.

•

It is applicable for selected cities, please connect with DISCOM to check.

Society Approval:

•

It is mandatory to get the NOC (No Objection Certificate) from the Society / Concerned Authority, if Charger needs to be installed in Housing Society / Government Premises / Commercial Premises.

•

It is not applicable for individual houses.

Safe Mounting Location:

•

Choose an accessible and safe (preferably covered) place for mounting the charger.

•

Finalize the location early to avoid extra visits.

Effective Earthing:

•

Ensure healthy and effective Earthing.

•

Voltage between neutral and earth should be less than 5V.

Standard Free Installation:

Includes installation of Charger, Distribution Box with Cable Laying- Max Up to 15 metres. Any additional materials / services over and above 15 metres will incur extra costs.

12.5.5 Advantages of Home Charging

•

Convenience: Overnight charging, plug-schedule-forget.

•

Cost: Charges for the units consumed in home charging will be less, since it is subsidized. Please note, State-wise per unit cost may vary depending on EV meter or residential slab category.

•

No Dependency: No peak surcharge, no queue / booking, use it with any EV.

It is highly recommended to use the Mahindra Charger which comes with the vehicle to enjoy its’ features, high charging speed and to keep your battery healthy.

Note: The charger is high power equipment, almost equivalent to 7 ACs, when equipment is designed with highest standards of safety and we also ensure highest standard of safety while installing it, which follows below process.

Process

•

Expect a call from us after booking to take an appointment site survey of the installation site.

•

During site survey our engineer checks electrical load requirement, cabling route / length from meter to installation place, proper earthing to ensure safe installation of charger.

•

Post survey, survey report will be submitted with the activities to make the site fit for charger installation.

Electrical Load Enhancement

Earthing

Approval from Housing Society

Additional paid works for site preparedness

If excess needed.

If not proper.

If you live in RWA.

If needed or requested by you.

Application to DISCOM for 3 phase connection with enhance load or to install an EV meter.

To arrange to make an earthing pit.

An approval letter from Society for the cable routing, installation permission.

•

Additional Cable.

•

Changing any electrical item.

•

Civil work like drilling, foundation.

•

Metallic stand, enclosure box etc.

Will guide you how to do.

Services available with us with nominal charges.

Will accompany you if need support to convince.

Except cable all are optional, can take from us or arrange yourself.

To avoid any short circuit leading to fire hazard, fine from DISCOM, safe guard your home appliances.

To avoid body current (shock), safe guard the charger.

To avoid any conflict, cable cut, hassle free installation.

Safe to avoid joint in cable. Safe to replace sub-par electrical item. To make the site stable for long term usage and aesthetic.

•

Will be in touch till you site is ready for installation and extend any support if needed.

•

Post vehicle retail engineer will visit before delivery to complete cabling work and DB installation.

•

Post vehicle delivery engineer visits for charger installation, online activation and usage demo.

Charger comes along with charger: Charger Unit, Distribution BOX, 15 meters cable, installation.

12.6 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) – 3 kW Charger

Charging Point Requirements

1. Power requirement: 3 kW, single phase AC.

2. Plug Point requirements: 230V AC, 16A, Single Phase, Normal electrical socket.

Make sure to use only high-quality socket.

3. Socket wiring should be a multi-stranded copper wire with a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm²

Ensure your domestic electrical system is in compliance with the applicable standards.

It is recommended to use Mahindra DB box for wall mounted charger and EVSE.

Always ensure, that the power socket (16A) used for charging your vehicle has proper earthing, protected by a circuit breaker and a surge protection device.

Do not open, tamper or modify the internal components of the charger.

Do not use worn, damaged, or uncertified charging equipment, as this could result in fire, electrical shock, or damage to your vehicle.

Before charging, always inspect the cable, plug, and socket for any signs of wear or damage.

Do not store any combustible materials near the charger vicinity.

A portable 3 kW 13A AC charger is provided along with the vehicle.

12.6.1 LED indication Status:

Below is the different color LEDs provided for indicating the status of charging – 3 kW.

Mode Description	Use Case	Power(Blue)	Charge(Green)	Fault(Red)
Turn Off Mode		OFF	OFF	OFF
Start-Up Mode (Self-Test)		ON	ON	ON
State A, only connected to mains		ON	OFF	OFF
State B, connected to mains and to vehicle		ON	OFF	OFF
State C, Charging		ON	BLINKING	OFF
State Change C -> B, Charging finish		ON	ON	OFF
Mains Failures	Over current error	ON	ON	ON
	RCD leakage detection	BLINKING	ON	BLINKING
	Over temp in ICCB	BLINKING	OFF	BLINKING
	Over-voltage	BLINKING	OFF	ON
	Under-voltage	BLINKING	OFF	ON
	PE of AC Supply is not connected with Earth	ON	OFF	BLINKING
	Relays welding failure	BLINKING	OFF	OFF
	Vehicle Diode error	OFF	ON	ON
Additional Faults	Communication error	ON	OFF	OFF

12.6.2 Charging Procedure:

Park the vehicle near the charging area.

Engage ‘P’ mode and turn OFF the ignition.

Press the charge flap located at LH rear side of the vehicle to open the charging lid (when vehicle is in unlocked condition, opens with gentle push).

Take out the charge cable from vehicle. Remove the dust cap from the vehicle charging port and ensure charger port LED remains ON (white).

Check for no dust or foreign particle present at the charging connector inlet.

Before connecting the charger gun to vehicle, plug the charger end to the power supply and turn ON the power supply and wait for 10 second before connecting the gun. If any fault is detected it is not recommended to charge the vehicle.

Check and ensure that plug is pushed in completely.

Once the supply is turned ON, all the LED’s will glow together for few second indicating self-check and once the charger is ready, only the blue LED indicator will glow (other 2 LED will remain OFF.

Charger

Also, the indicator light present at the vehicle charging port will starts blinking in white color one time then start glowing in Green color tidal pattern to Indicate charging initialization.

Charge Port

Once the charging process gets initiated, the following indications happpens:

•

Blue LED indicator present at the EVSE will remain ON and Green LED indicator present in EVSE will start blinking.

Telltale	Current battery level	Charging message

•

Charging alert comes in the DID for few second and charging indication telltale lamp will remains ON in DID during the charging process. Refer “DID Features” chapter for more details.

•

The LED indicator light present at the vehicle charging port will starts blinking in green color till 100% SOC and changes to green color solid once reached 100%.

Telltale

Charge Port

10. Allow sufficient time for the vehicle to fully charge.

11. Once the vehicle is fully charged,

•

LED Indicator light present remains ON in Solid green color.

•

Green LED Indicator in EVSE remains ON.

•

Charging finished alert will come in once 100% SOC. Green LED indicator of charge indication telltale lamp in the DID will turn OFF after gun is removed from the charge port.

12.6.3 How to Disconnect Normal Charging

The charging session will automatically stop once the vehicle SOC reaches 100%.

Turn the mains OFF.

Unlock the doors to unlock the charger gun.

Gently pull-out the charging gun once the session is over, don’t pull the charging gun during the charging session.

Close the charging port lid.

12.7 Normal Charge Timing

Battery Pack	Charger Capacity	Charge Timing (approximate)
79 kwh	3 kw (13 A)	31 hrs

Charge timings approximately for 100% charging at normal operating condition of the components.

The time for full charging may vary based upon the ambient temperature and durability of the high voltage battery and on the operating conditions.

12.8 Fast Charging

Fast charging uses high-power chargers (DC chargers) to rapidly deliver energy to your EV's battery.

The indicated charging time of 20 minutes (20% to 80% State of Charge (SOC)) applies under optimal conditions, depends on the battery pack variant and DC charger (175 kW with 400A+).

Charging duration may vary based on factors such as charger capacity, ambient temperature, battery condition, and power supply fluctuations. Charging with lower-rated DC or AC chargers will result in increased charging times.

Use CCS type 2 fast chargers only for charging your vehicle.

Fast Charging in a vehicle can be achieved using same charging port. Fast charging can be availed at places where ‘DC charging’ stations are available.

12.8.1 Charging Procedure:

Park the vehicle near to CCS type 2 fast charging station.

Engage ‘P’ mode and Turn-OFF the ignition.

Perform the authorization using mobile app / EVSE RFID.

Press the unlock button on the Key Fob / Mobile App / Central Door Lock (CDL) to unlock the vehicle. Then gently press the charging lid once to release and open it.

Remove both the rubber cap from the vehicle charging port.

Check for no dust or foreign particle present at the charging connector inlet.

Hold the charging gun and push it inside the vehicle charging port gently and lock the vehicle.

Start the charging session using the screen provided in the station, RFID, or Mobile Application. The charge port LED will start blinking in a White color.

Preset charging time and press start button on fast charger.

Turning ON the fast charger locks the charger gun into the charger port in the vehicle

10. Once the charging session starts, the charge port LED will blink in BLUE or GREEN color (depending on the level of vehicle SOC).

11. Check Charging Indicator Light on the DID glows once the gun is connected and charging initiated.

12. When the vehicle SOC reaches 100%, the charging session automatically stops and the continuous GREEN LED will glow on the charge port.

13. In case of failure, the color of the charging port LED changes to RED. The user needs to remove the charge gun and retry the charging session.

14. If charging gets interrupted, Charge Fault Alert will come.

Allow Normal charging up to 100% SOC once in every 4 fast charge cycles. This will ensure optimal battery performance.

Use of fast charging should be minimized in order to prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

If the vehicle is driven less, then it is recommended to charge the vehicle to 100% and keep it overnight connected, once a week on slow charging

12.8.2 How to Disconnect Fast Charging

•

Charging session will automatically stop once the vehicle SOC reach 100%.

•

Whenever the charging session needs to be stopped in-between, perform the same through charger screen, Charge Stop button from the vehicle DID, RFID or Mobile Application.

•

Use the “Emergency Button” on the EVSE in case of any emergency and unable to stop from any of the interface mentioned above.

•

Gently pull-out and remove the charging connector from the vehicle once the charging session is over and the machine is stopped, don’t pull the charging gun during the charging session.

If the gun lock is not released, please don’t pull-out the charging Gun forcefully out of the vehicle charging port, it may damage the charging port.

As a first step press the “Charge port disconnect switch” in the driver side switch bank to unlock the gun.

If the gun is still unable to release, follow the manual over ride procedure for releasing it.

•

Close the charging port lid.

•

Wait for 60 seconds if you want to start the charging again.

•

Charging time will vary based on environmental conditions.

•

In sub-zero condition and high ambient conditions, the heater / chiller will turn ON to cool / heat the battery and then only the charging will initiate.

•

In case you use any medical electric devices like implantable cardiac pacemaker or cardiovascular defibrillator, do check with electric medical device supplier / manufacturer on concerns of effects that EV charging or discharging system may have on implanted devices prior to their operation.

•

It is also advised not to stay in vehicle or access the vehicle during charging as it may affect function of the electric medical devices and could result in personal fatal injury.

•

Make sure that there are no foreign particles or water traces in the charger plug or port as any of these can result in electric short circuit or shock causing serious injury or death. Hence do not touch metal contacts on cable or plug. Ensure to close the charging lid whenever vehicle is not in charging state.

•

Do not drag or keep charge cable close to any heat source.

•

Ensure that power socket is switched off before connecting the charge cable.

•

Do not handle charger cable or port with wet hands as it may cause electric shock resulting in injury.

•

Do not pull or twist cable, always remove it by holding charger port handle after switching off the plug point.

•

Do not modify port or cable as it may cause fire hazard.

•

In case you observe an unusual odor or smoke coming from the vehicle, do immediately stop charging process.

•

Always make sure that the charger cable is disconnected from the charge port prior to drive.

•

Charging may affect operation of worn or implanted electric medical devices and could result in serious injury or death.

•

Do not touch the charge port at the vehicle side without any proper electrical gloves.

•

Ensure you fully uncoil the charging cord to limit its heating.

•

Ensure to use the designated charger for charging the electric vehicle. Using any other charger may cause failure (Refer Charging procedure section for more details).

•

Be careful not to drop the charging connector. The charging connector can be damaged.

The system does HV battery cell balancing and charges the LV system based on the LV battery voltage. So even if the vehicle is fully charged and left for sometime, the SOC may drop slightly. This is normal behavior and not a cause of concern.

Do not wash the vehicle while charging.

Ensure charging port lid is closed before attempting the exterior body wash.

12.9 Gun Locking Feature

Charging gun is locked to the vehicle when the vehicle is in charging condition for safety.

Ensure the below procedure before unlocking the charging gun.

•

Switch off the AC power supply or fast charging machine.

•

Unplug the charging gun from the vehicle.

If the gun lock is not released, please don’t pull-out the charging gun forcefully out of the vehicle charging port, it may damage the charging port.

As a first step press the “Charge port disconnect switch” in the driver side switch bank to unlock the gun.

If the gun still not able to release, follow the manual over ride procedure for releasing it.

12.9.1 Manual Charging Gun Override

Manual Charging Gun override is a feature, that allows the user to disconnect the charging gun from the vehicle when the automatic locking mechanism fails.

This feature ensures that users can safely remove the charger in situations such as system malfunctions, power outages, or emergency scenarios.

Manual override cable is located in left-hand side of the rear luggage compartment.

If you are unable to remove the charging gun, follow these steps to manually release it using the release cable:

•

Open the trunk and locate the trim cover on the LH side quarter trim.

•

Remove the safety cover.

•

To release the charger plug in case the electrical actuator is not functioning, pull the black handled release cable as shown in the image.

•

After pulling the release cable, gently remove the charger plug.

•

After removing the plug, make sure to close the lid.

Do Not Force the Connector: Pulling forcefully without using the override can damage the port or the connector.

Ensure Safety: Confirm that charging has stopped before attempting manual removal.

Do not pull the release cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.

Do Not Touch The Connectors: Never touch the metal connectors during the manual override process, as doing so may result in burns, electrical shock, or serious injury.

12.10 Charging Recommendations

Always use the charge cable provided with the vehicle for charging.

Refer Charging section for more details

Do not charge the vehicle, if power socket and / or charge port are exposed to rain or water.

Do not plug-in with wet hands.

It is recommended not to charge the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Make sure that children are kept away from both on-board and external charge ports, while charging.

Vehicle should be disconnected from power source before getting any services being carried out.

Always carry charger cable provided by the manufacturer. It helps to charge your vehicle at off-sites and in public charging locations when required.

Remote charging option is only applicable for Normal charging.

•

Never allow the vehicle to be discharged to 0% SOC in storage.

•

If the vehicle is kept idle for longer duration with low SOC level, it may not be possible to charge or use the vehicle without jump starting or charging the low voltage battery. If you are not able to charge the vehicle even with a booster battery connected, then contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

•

Always charge to greater than 50% before leaving the vehicle for long resting period, Ensure to charge to 100% SOC after the resting period is over using Normal Charger.

•

If the resting period is greater than 30 days, disconnect the negative terminal of the low voltage battery, This reduces the loss of charge for both low voltage and high voltage batteries.

•

Allow Normal charging up to 100 % SOC once after 3 fast charge cycles. This will ensure optimal battery performance.

•

Use of Fast Charging should be minimized in order to help prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

•

If the vehicle is driven less, then it is recommended to charge the vehicle to 100% and keep it overnight connected, once a week on slow charging.

•

Under certain conditions, the thermal system may produce moisture in the air from the front of your vehicle while charging. This is normal and not to be concerned about.

•

In certain conditions, you may see water droplets below the front end of the vehicle during charging, this is normal.

•

It is normal to hear sounds during charging. The refrigerant compressor and fan operate as needed to maintain the battery temperature.

•

At some circumstances, there will be slighter performance drop in cabin cooling. Air conditioning performance is generally not affected by charging. However, in some circumstances (for example, charging at high currents during a particularly warm day), the air coming from the vents may not be as cool as expected. This is normal and ensures that the Battery stays within an optimum temperature range while charging to support longevity and optimum performance.

12.11 Charging Troubleshooting

Problem	Possible Cause	Remedy
Temperature Light is on while charging.	High battery temperature (or) charger temperature (or) ambient temperature. Effect: Charging time of vehicle may increase.	Check for radiator fan operation. Check whether enough coolant is available or not and charge in shade / cooler temperature or during night when ambient temperature is low. If the issue persists, Contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for further assistance.
Turn ON the Main Switch for Charging.	This alert comes, when charging gun is connected to vehicle and the main power is not turned ON.	Check if power supply is OK and EVSE LED is ON.

12.12 Ideal Time to Charge

Vehicle can be charged anytime with availability of charging facility, however charging can be done at suitable time that has following advantages:

Normally most of requirements for city mobility are during day, hence charging at night will not interfere in daily travel plans.

At night, ambient temperature is less which is ideal for battery charging.

12.13 Brake/Coasting Regeneration

This vehicle is equipped with regenerative braking. The regenerative braking system's main objective is to use unused energy available at wheels during deceleration / braking to charge the battery to help increase the driving range and replenish the high voltage battery

The electric motor converts kinetic energy into electrical energy during deceleration and braking of the vehicle. This energy is used to charge the high-voltage battery.

A secondary benefit is an effect similar to “engine braking” seen in IC engine vehicles. Based on HV battery SOC status, regeneration intensity will vary.

When the accelerator pedal is released while driving, the regenerative brake system provides some deceleration and generates power for charging the high voltage battery.

When you apply the brake and take your foot off the accelerator pedal, more regenerative brake is applied and deceleration is maximum.

During high-speed driving you may feel that regenerative brake provides less deceleration than the engine braking in an regular ICE vehicle.

In order to prevent battery damage, regenerative brake is also automatically reduced when the battery temperature is high or low.

Regeneration will be maximum when vehicle is driven in L3 regen mode.

Regeneration function won’t happen above 95% SOC.

12.14 Do’s and Don’ts

Do’s

•

Engage parking brake for charging.

•

Inspect the charging cable periodically for any damage like crack, cuts, exposed wire and burnt marks on pins in the handle and plug etc. Replace if required.

•

Always charge the vehicle to 100% SOC.

•

Always do normal charging after 3 fast charging.

Don’ts

•

Do not charge the vehicle if the power source or the charge port is exposed to rain or water.

•

Do not carry out charging procedure with wet hands.

•

Avoid charging in extreme hot ambient temperature.

•

Do not wash while the vehicle in charging.

•

Do not use the damaged charging cable, wire, socket and pins.

•

Never do fast charging more than 3 times consecutively.

•

Immediately stop charging when you find abnormal symptoms (odor, smoke).

•

Do not use the battery as a stationary power source, as this may lead to premature battery degradation and affect your warranty coverage.

12.15 Battery life and performance

Due to battery characteristics, the performance of the BE 6 FE battery pack will decrease with usage, surrounding environment, actual usage pattern and ageing resulting in a reduced estimated drive range. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction / defect in the vehicle system or the battery power pack.

The charge storage capacity can also be affected by usage/charging pattern, vehicle storage conditions, battery operating temperature.

For details on battery performance expectations and warranty coverage, including state of health thresholds and eligibility for repair or replacement, refer to the vehicle warranty section.

12.16 Points to remember during Fast Charging

Points to check before/ during charging session

Identify the correct charging station which supports the vehicle protocol (CCS Type 2).

•

Check the vehicle DID before starting the charging session, there should not be any fault telltale / alert.

•

Never try to charge the vehicle on a faulty fast charging station.

•

Properly park the vehicle, therefore there will be no stress on the charge port of the vehicle.

•

Take the charging gun from the charger holder and insert it in the vehicle properly (In case of partial gun insertion, it can cause a gap and might lead to lock failure).

•

Never pull out the charging gun during the ongoing charging session.

•

Once the charging session is done, STOP the charger and remove the charging gun once it is unlocked.

•

Remove the charge gun from the vehicle and place it back in the charger slot.

•

Continued charging after a fault warning may result in fire, electric shock, or battery damage. The company is not liable for any injury, vehicle damage, or property loss resulting from failure to follow proper troubleshooting procedures. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center before attempting to charge again.

Points to check in case of Failure: In case of any charging session failure, the user has to check and note down the "Error Code" displayed in the fast charging station display / mobile application.

•

Retry the charging session.

•

In case of failure again, the user shall report the issue to the Help line number provided on the charging station / mobile application.

Importance of network connectivity: Public charging station uses the mobile application for the “Authorization” of the charging session. If the user is in a weak network area, there will be a delay in completing the authorization process, which may lead to session failure. In this case, the user needs to restart the charging procedure after doing a plug-out and plug-in of the charge gun in the vehicle.

Fault on EVSE: Before starting any charging session, kindly check there is no fault with the charging station. In case of any fault with the charging station there will be a RED fault LED glowing on the charging station. The user is advised NOT to attempt any charging session with a faulty charging station.

In case of session stop

•

The users are advised to retry the charging session in case of the session is not getting initiated or the session is stopped in between.

•

User can re-initiate the charging session by following the steps.

Remove the charging gun from the vehicle.

Reconnect the charging gun to the vehicle.

In case the charging session fails again and again, do report the concern with proper error codes displayed on the charger screen on the help line provided by the charging service provider.

Time To Charge (TTC) Vehicle

•

TTC (Total time to charge) is visible to the user on the vehicle DID. It provides the information about the time remaining to full charge of the vehicle. Users pay attention that this time may vary depending on the charging current / current demand.

•

The current demand of the vehicle depends on multiple factors such as temperature of battery pack, charging gun terminal temperature, fast charging machine temperature etc, therefore in case of higher temperature, the TTC may increase for safety reasons.

13 Emergency Situations

13.1 Hazard Warning Lamp

The Hazard Warning Lamp is activated to alert other drivers during emergencies or when the vehicle is stationery for any reason.

The hazard warning lamp switch is located on the roof console switch.

To activate the Hazard Warning Lamp, press the switch. All Turn Signal Lamps and the DID turn indicator lamps will start flashing. To deactivate, press the switch again.

The Hazard Light should be used when the vehicle’s operation is compromised and creates a hazard to other road users. It is not intended to be used as a parking lamp.

The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps are operational.

Auto Hazard Warning Lamp

Hazard lamps turns ON automatically during bonnet open when vehicle is in stationary condition.

Hazard lamps turns ON automatically for 10 second during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.

Hazard lamps turns ON automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (OFF to ON) or Ignition reset (Ignition OFF and ON).

If incase, the vehicle stalls while driving

•

Shift the mode to N.

•

Press the Hazard switch.

•

Manoeuvre the vehicle to side.

13.2 Tiretronics

Tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.

The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual tyre pressure values.

Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for:

•

Adequate braking

•

Road grip

•

Vehicle handling

•

Vehicle maneuvering

•

Reduced tyre wear and tear

•

Reduced tyre strain and safety

•

Good range of the vehicle

The DID(Driver Information Display) screen displays all alerts related to tiretronics on the DID screen and indicates the visual warnings for all tiretronics alerts.

Whenever low pressure or high pressure or Pressure leakage observed, corresponding tyre shall highlight and Low Pressure/High Pressure/Pressure Leakage message displayed in the DID screen.

13.2.1 Operation of Tiretronics

Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the CID (Center Information Display) screen.

In the CID screen all four tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature except spare tyre.

Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.

Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to sensor damage.

Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.

Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce the vehicle range, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle’s maneuverability and braking ability.

It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.

Tiretronics Warning Lamp

The Tiretronics warning lamp in the DID illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tyre pressure alerts and malfunction.

13.2.2 Functions of Tiretronics System

Key functionalities and Benefits of the system:

•

Low Pressure Alert

•

High Pressure Alert

•

High Temperature

•

Pressure Leakage Alert

•

Sensor Signal Missing

•

Tyre Auto Learn

•

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)

•

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

Low Pressure Alert

Low pressure monitoring is used to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.

•

Low pressure alert will pop up in the DID once, to notify driver, when the alert is triggered and the vehicle is in running condition.

•

If low pressure is detected, inspect the indicated tyre to identify the cause and rectify it before refilling the tyre with air.

•

Once the low pressure alert is triggered due to tyre pressure falling below the threshold, the alert will not clear until the tyre is inflated to the specified pressure value.

High Pressure Alert

High pressure monitoring is used to indicate high tyre pressure. Please note the following points.

•

High tyre pressure alert will be triggered only when the tyre pressure value goes to certain values (>44 PSI).

•

The high pressure alert will pop up in the DID once, to notify the driver when the alert is triggered and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise, the alert will remain displayed on the Tiretronics screen in CID.

•

If a high pressure condition is observed, air must be released from the respective tyre until the pressure is reduced to the recommended tyre pressure value..

•

The vehicle must be driven above 40 km/h for the new pressure value to be updated and for the alert to be cleared.

•

Once the high pressure alert is triggered, the alert will not clear until the respective tyre pressure is reduced to the specified value.

High Temperature Alert

High temperature monitoring is used to indicate high Temperature in the tyre. Please note the following points.

•

High temperature alert will be triggered only when the tyre temperature value goes to certain values (>90°).

•

High temperature alert will pop up in the DID once, to notify the driver when the alert is triggered and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise, the alert will remain displayed on the Tiretronics screen in CID.

•

If a high tyre temperature is detected, stop the vehicle and allow the tyres to cool down to below 85 °C before continuing to drive..

•

Ensure that the tyre pressure matches the recommended value. Do not exceed the load capacity specified in the owner’s manual..

Pressure Leakage Alert:

Pressure leakage monitoring is used to indicate pressure leakage in any one of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.

•

The pressure leakage alert will be triggered only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a high rate (>3 PSI per minute).

•

In the case of pressure leakage, if the tyre pressure drops too low beyond a certain threshold, the low pressure alert will also be triggered.

•

The pressure leakage alert will pop up in the DID once, to notify the driver when the alert is triggered and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise, the alert will remain displayed on the Tiretronics screen in CID.

•

Once pressure leakage is detected, the respective tyre should be inspected for air leaks, and any puncture must be repaired. After rectifying the puncture, the tyre should be inflated to the proper pressure value..

Sensor Signal Missing Alert:

Sensor Signal Missing Alert will be triggered when any one of the sensor fails to transmit signal to the tiretronics system. Please note the following points.

•

When the vehicle is running at speeds between 40 km/h and 120 km/h, the Tiretronics system continuously receives signals from all rotating tyres. Therefore, the tyre pressure values may get updated once the vehicle exceeds 40 km/h during the driving cycle.

•

If there is any issue with signal reception, Tiretronics sensor damage, or if the tyres are changed without performing manual learning, the signal will not be received.

•

Under such conditions, if the vehicle is driven beyond a certain distance or duration without receiving a signal even once, a ‘Signal Missing’ alert will be set for the respective tyre position on the CID screen. The Tiretronics DID telltale will also illuminate to indicate this condition.

•

When the Tiretronics ‘Signal Missing’ alert is set, perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not completed successfully, the sensor of the corresponding tyre position must be checked by carefully opening the tyre.

•

If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual learning should be done.

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) guides drivers to achieve the correct tyre pressure through visual or audible cues and controlled inflation.

Tyre fill assist can be enabled from centre Information Display (CID) App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Exterior >> Tyres >> Tyre fill Assist (Enable/Disable).

During air filling in tyre, hazard lamps will blink until tyre pressure value reaches.

If tyre pressure has reached the tyre pressure value, then horn will activate one time.

If tyre pressure exceeds recommended pressure value, then Hazard lamps will blink at faster rate.

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

During driving, if the system detects a tyre pressure imbalance between the two front tyres or the two rear tyres, the DID will display a ‘Tyre Pressure Imbalance’ warning.

13.2.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation and Removal

Installation:
Sensor	Sensor installation direction

First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the above image A (the diagram is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer’s production line).

Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TPMS fitment tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in.

Ensure the TPMS fitment tool insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it.

The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure.

Place the inner tyre bead over the rim.

Place the outer tyre bead over the rim.

Inflate all four tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle.

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

If the sensor is not properly installed as per the given procedure there is a possibility of improper reading and signal missing error will pop up CID.

Removal

Remove the tyre from the rim.

Remove the valve core to deflate the tyre.

Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tyre at the yellow position shown below and turn the rim clockwise.

To remove the sensor, remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.

Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the valve.

Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TPMS fitment tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb.

Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool.

The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre tool.

Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool.

Remove existing valve stem.

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

13.2.4 Tiretronics Auto Learning

Auto Learn feature in the Tiretronics (TPMS) system automatically identifies and assigns the tyre sensor positions without requiring manual input from the user.Auto learning will be done if it is enabled in CID.

In Centre Information Display (CID), go to App Drawer >> My Vehicle >> Exterior >> Tyres >> Auto Learn (Enable/Disable)

In case of tyres location changed from its original location, Automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and pressure and temperature value for respective tyre shall be updated within 10 min of vehicle driving based on environmental condition & vehicle drive condition auto location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.

In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update the warnings and alert for new location.

13.2.5 Tiretronics Manual Learning

Manual Tiretronics learning has to be performed if Auto learn is not enabled in CID.

After a tyre rotation or tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else the tiretronics warning lamp indicates a malfunction.

Recommended practice.

Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.

Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done.

•

Any sensors replaced.

•

If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics in DID are not correlating with respect to their actual position in the vehicle.

Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres.

Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meter.

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.

It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure < 36 psi before initiating the manual learning process.

Post manual learning, all four tyres should be filled to the tyre pressure value.

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre’.

Tiretronics Learning Procedure

•

Please ensure that the tyre pressure for all four tyres is set to 36 psi before proceeding with the process.

•

Turn the ignition ON.

•

In Centre Information Display (CID), go to App Drawer>> My Vehicle>> Exterior >> Tyres >> TPMS Manual Learning (Enable/Disable).

•

After enabling the TPMS manual learning, wait until the icon changes to the ‘Disable’ form.

•

Then, observe the DID for the Tiretronics telltale blinking, the vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flashing twice along with horn 2 times and the CID screen displaying ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’.

•

The sequence for TPMS manual learning is as follows: Front Left (FL), Front Right (FR), Rear Right (RR), and Rear Left (RL). After all tyres have been learned, perform an ignition reset.

•

If problem still persist, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

Starting from Front Left Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the front left for 10 to 15 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt

If the front left tyre is learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flash once along with horn 1 time and the FL tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

Learning the Front Right Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the front right for 10 to 15 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the front right tyre is learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flash once along with horn 1 time and the FR tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

Learning the Rear Right Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the rear right for 10 to 15 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear right tyre is learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flash once along with horn 1 time and the RR tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 10 to 15 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear left tyre is learned, vehicle hazard lamps flash once and the RL tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

If rear left tyre is also learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flashing one time along with horn 1 time and all tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and ‘TPMS manual learning successful” in the CID screen.

If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90 seconds of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and displays the ‘TPMS manual learning Unsuccessful’ screen.

Also the vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flashing in four times along with horn 4 times.

13.2.6 Limitations

•

Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear.

•

Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance.

•

There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the tiretronics display blinking along with the tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition whenever interference gets cleared.

13.2.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember

•

It is recommended to fill the pressure to 36 psi at a digital gauge station only.

•

Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 36 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature.

•

Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:

–

Atmospheric pressure

–

Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)

–

Air leakage during inflation/deflation

•

Tiretronics measures the absolute pressure of the tyre, not relative pressure (gauge pressure).

•

Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max).

•

If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated.

•

It is mandatory that manual learning should be performed if the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, else the system will give a false alert with respect to false location.

•

If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure.

•

Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems.

•

During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometer depending upon the climatic condition.

13.3 Towing

The tow hook is a screw-on type and is included in the toolkit.

To use, carefully remove or pry off the tow hook cover on the front or rear bumper using a screwdriver.

Front Tow Hook Provision	Rear Tow Hook Provision

Screw the tow hook into place and tighten it by turning clockwise. Attach a cable or chain designed specifically for towing vehicles securely to the tow hook.

Towing has to be done only to move the vehicle from the stationary location to the towing vehicle.

Do’s

Only Flat bed towing is recommended in this vehicle.

You have to “PUSH — RELEASE — PUSH”. Excessive pushing will not move the vehicle.

To ensure the safety of other road users, the vehicle should be pushed at a speed of not more than 5 km/h and for a distance of not more than 50 meter.

Dont’s

Don’t tow the vehicle with a rope and another vehicle not more than 5 km/h and for a distance of not more than 50 meter.

Avoid using a front lift and tow this vehicle.

•

In emergency situation, the vehicle can be moved forward for minimal distance with Ignition ON in Neutral (N) position.

•

You have to “PUSH — RELEASE — PUSH”. Excessive pushing will not move the vehicle.

•

This is to avoid damage to internal components of the motor.

Any damage arising from improper towing, unauthorized roadside repairs, or disassembly of high-voltage components may not be covered under your warranty. Always follow the towing procedures in this manual and use Mahindra Authorized service centers for any post-accident inspection or repairs. Failure to do so may void warranty coverage for affected vehicle systems, including the high-voltage battery pack and motor component.

13.3.1 Towing Equipment

Only flat bed towing is allowed for BE6 FE. This is the safest and best way of towing

Any other type of towing process will cause irreversible damage to high value components and will not be covered under warranty.

Procedure to push the vehicle when immobilized

Incase the vehicle gets breakdown in middle of the road, then the vehicle can be pushed minimal distance only incase of emergency. This is to avoid damage to internal components.

Vehicle should be in neutral with ignition ON condition (Drive not enabled).

Continuous pushing of the vehicle is not possible. The vehicle can be smoothly moved in a “PUSH — RELEASE — PUSH” manner.

Regen lamp may glow in DID while pushing the vehicle.

Compared to conventional diesel/petrol engine vehicle, the force required to push this vehicle would be high and vehicle movement would be very slow.

13.3.2 Emergency Assistance

In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either from the vehicle or through mobile app.

Emergency Assistance from Vehicle

e-Call/SOS:

e-Call is initiated when a valid crash event is registered. Airbags may or may not be deployed based on the severity and direction of the event. For more details on airbags, refer to the safety section.

In an unfortunate event of your vehicle meeting with an accident, triggering the airbags, your vehicle will initiate the following actions -

Call will be triggered automatically from your vehicle to 108* Ambulance Service for medical assistance.

* [108] number is the default option. This number can be changed based on your preference/location. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

SOS call from vehicle

For SOS call, the driver can either operate the switch located in the overhead console near the interior rear-view mirror or through CID.

Precautions in the Event of a Fire

If your vehicle is on fire while driving on the road, then follow the below points:

•

Immediately bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road and turn off the ignition.

•

As soon as you can, exit the vehicle. You should also help the other passengers to exit the vehicle securely. In addition, you can unlock all the windows and doors before turning off the Ignition.

•

Move yourself away from the flaming vehicle. A vehicle could explode because it carries High Voltage Battery Pack. Keep distance from the flaming vehicle accordingly. Additionally, if at all possible, warn approaching vehicles of the hazard.

•

If the fire is small and slow, use a fire extinguisher in ABC type. If it is impossible to extinguish the fire in the early stage, Keep a safe distance from the vehicle and immediately call the fire service. Also, inform them that an electric vehicle is involved.

•

Never open the hood or boot of a burning vehicle to try and put out the fire. If you attempt to open the boot or bonnet when there is a fire in the motor compartment or underneath the vehicle, the flames may flare up and cause burns. Immediately contact the fire service department.

•

Never approach a burning vehicle to collect personal items. If you don’t keep a safe distance from a burning vehicle, an explosion could hurt you since toxic vapours from the burning vehicle are harmful.

•

You can call the Authorized Mahindra Service Center once the fire has been extinguished. To help you move the damaged vehicle, describe the situation and extent of the damage to the service centre or Me4U.

Precautions in the Event of an Accident

•

Make sure the vehicle is in park position “P”, the parking brake is engaged, and the Ignition is off.

•

Do not attempt to restart or move the vehicle if there is visible damage, smoke, or an unusual smell.

•

If any orange-colored cables (High voltage Cables) on the vehicle are visible, in order to prevent electric shock or even death, do not make any contact with any cable.

•

Mahindra is not responsible for any damage, injuries, or liabilities resulting from failure to follow these safety precautions.

•

If you notice any coolant leaks and damage in refrigerant lines, do not drive the vehicle and contact Me4U.

•

If your vehicle is being recovered by a Road Side Assistance (RSA), please contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further guidance.

•

If your vehicle becomes submerged underwater, avoid trying to open the doors immediately due to the water pressure.

Be mindful of potential electric shock risks. Avoid touching any exposed electrical components or wiring while exiting the vehicle. Contact emergency services for assistance as soon as possible.

Precautions while driving the vehicle in water-logged and/ or flooded area

Never attempt to start the vehicle.

•

Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line.

•

The water surface should not be higher than the lower edge of the underbody.

•

High voltage battery and electrical/electronics components will get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water.

•

Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient of friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tap the brake pedal while driving to remove the moisture in brake disc surface.

•

13.3.3 Contacting Mahindra Road Side Assistance

MAHINDRA Assistance (RSA) program is a 24 x 7, 365 days, emergency support service provided in the event your vehicle is immobilized due to mechanical/ electrical fault or collision, the vehicle may not be in a safely operable/ drivable condition. In such a scenario the RSA will provide towing services. The RSA service is complimentary during the warranty period and subscription based post warranty.

The Roadside Assistance services are provided by a third party business partner. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number will be answered by trained RSA service representatives.

The Roadside assistance is covered initially for 3 years from the date of sale.

Contact No. : 18002667070

Based on the information provided, the RSA service representative will determine the type of help required.

1. Dealer Locator Service - RSA will provide the address and contact details of the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

2. Dispatch Service - A service provider will be dispatched to the location of your vehicle for assistance.

3. On-site Assistance including Towing - On-site assistance such as flat tyre change, dead battery will be provided at the location. Customer need to pay for tyre repair charges. If on-site assistance is unable to make the vehicle operable, towing services will be called in.

4. Towing Services -In the event of a mechanical breakdown or an accident, RSA will organize to tow the vehicle to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

5. Key Lost/Key Lock-out - The RSA will deliver a duplicate key from the residence of the user from the same city.

6. Alternate transportation/accommodation - In the event of trip interruption, RSA will assist in organizing for Taxi/ alternate transportation/Ticket and/or accommodation. Taxi /transport is free up to 50 km from the breakdown site, beyond which the user/customer need to pay to the provider.

RSA can be accessed via the ME4U app, mobile phone, RSA toll-free number, and the Center Information Display (CID).

13.4 Changing a Flat Tyre

In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the vehicle and turn ON your hazard warning flashers.

Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.

A flat tyre significantly reduces traction and stability, increasing the risk of losing control of the vehicle and causing an accident.

Driving on a flat tyre can pose serious safety risks to you and other road users, as it increases the likelihood of accidents and breakdowns.

The tyre can become completely shredded, making it impossible to repair and requiring a full replacement and the rim to make direct contact with the road, leading to costly damage.

Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until you reach a safe location. If you cannot reach a safe area, turn on the hazard lights, remain inside the vehicle with seat belts fastened, and call roadside assistance.

Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety equipment and training. The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.

Using a vehicle jack safely during an emergency requires careful attention to several precautionary measures. Here are some important steps to follow:

Ensure the vehicle is on a flat, stable surface to prevent it from rolling or shifting. Avoid soft or uneven ground.

Engage the Parking Brake.

Turn on the Hazard lamps.

Place wheel chocks or large rocks behind and in front of the wheels.

Place the jack under the designated jack points.

Carefully raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle slowly and steadily. Ensure the vehicle remains stable throughout the process.

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack.

Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.

Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic. After changing a flat tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.

The spare wheel is only for emergency situations, speed limit of 80 km/h. Never use it for normal driving. After installing the spare wheel, take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center or a tyre - specialised shop to repair/replace with specified tyre for the vehicle.

With a temporary tyre installed, a vehicle’s handling may be different, requiring careful driving until a full-sized tyre is installed.

The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre.

13.4.1 Spare Wheel and Tool Kit Location

The spare wheel, toolkit organizer, warning triangle, and charger are located beneath the trunk lid.

Unlock the latch provided in the luggage compartment lid to lift the lid.

Lift the luggage floor lid as shown in the illustration.

Afterwards, the spare wheel, toolkit organizer, warning triangle, and charger can be taken out from their storage location.

13.4.2 Warning Triangle

The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.

It is placed in the luggage compartment below the luggage floor lid.

When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Metres behind, Night: 200 Metres behind).

When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving

Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100 Metres, Night: 200 Metres) to warn other vehicles.

Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic. When your safety is secured, contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Centre for your emergency service.

13.4.3 Tool Kit Removal

Refer to the 'Spare Wheel and Tool Kit Location' section for the procedure to remove the trunk lid.

Lift and take out the tool kit organiser from the spare wheel.

The following tools are available in the toolkit organizer:

A	Jack
B	Jack Operating Lever
C	Spanner
D	Stud
E	Screwdriver (+ and -)
F	Wheel Spanner

13.4.4 Spare Wheel Removal

Refer to the 'Spare Wheel and Tool Kit Location' section for the procedure to remove the luggage floor lid.

The spare wheel is mounted below the trunk lid at the rear end of the vehicle.

•

Take out the tool kit (A) from the tool kit organiser (Refer Tool kit removal procedure).

•

Loosen the Lock nut from the Spare wheel (B).

•

Lift the spare wheel upwards from inner side to vertical position and take it out.

The spare wheel is only for emergency situations with speed limit of 80 kmph. Never use it for normal driving. After installing the spare wheel, take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to repair/replace with specified tyre for the vehicle.

Repair or replacement from a non-Authorized workshop shall be undertaken at sole risk of the customer and Mahindra, its Directors, Key Managerial Persons and Officers shall not be liable for any defect or damage due to such repair or replacement by a non-Authorized workshop.

•

When reinstalling the spare tyre, be sure to securely lock it with lock nut.

•

While your vehicle is being raised up with a jack, avoid any impact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured.

•

When taking out the spare tyre, be careful not to damage the body of your vehicle.

Trunk lid to be fitted always at the lower position when removing and refitting again.

13.4.5 Jack Points

Refer to the ‘Spare Wheel and Tool Kit Location’ section for the procedure to remove the floor mat.

•

The jack is located in the toolkit organizer above the spare wheel.

•

Take the jack from the organizer and use it as needed.

Jack up point - Screw jack can be placed in between the two grooves located on the side sill just behind the front wheels for front jack up and in between the two grooves located on the side sill just in front of the rear wheels for rear jack up.

•

Risks associated with incorrectly jacking the vehicle include potential damage to the vehicle’s underbody components.

•

Incorrect jacking can also cause the vehicle to become unstable, increasing the risk of it falling off the jack, which poses serious safety hazards to anyone working around or under the vehicle.

•

Additionally, improper jacking can compromise the vehicle’s alignment and suspension systems, affecting its overall performance and safety.

Make sure to instal the jack so that its upper plate is correctly seated under the vehicle’s positions marked in the figure for the flat tyre side.

Do not place the jack under the Battery box area.

13.4.6 Jack Usage

Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid ground. Ensure no one is in the vehicle.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

A : Flat Tyre

B : Chock Blocks

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the wheel spanner into the jack and turn it clockwise with the jack handle. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, check that it is properly positioned. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can be installed. Remember, you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the underbody of the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

•

Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.

•

Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle.

•

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top or underneath the jack.

•

Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel.

•

Usable extended height of jack is up to the yellow line/mark provided in the jack. Do not raise the jack above the yellow line.

•

Follow jacking instructions.

•

Do not start or run the vehicle while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

Always place the jack on the designated jacking positions on the vehicle and Never on the HV battery area, bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

If there is any damages happen in underbody (HV Battery) area, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

13.4.7 Wheel Bolt Loosening

Wheel cap Removal (if equipped): Please insert the screw driver given in the tool kit near the lugs of the wheel cap and pry the cap away from the wheel.

Do not try to pry off the wheel cap by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cap to avoid unexpected personal injury.

•

Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel bolts counter clockwise to loosen as per the sequence shown. To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt, so that the handle is on the left side.

•

Lift the vehicle using the jack.

•

Once the bolts are loosened, remove all bolts completely from the wheel assembly to allow for easier removal of the wheel.

Wheel Fixing

•

The stud needs to be installed in the designated hole.

•

The stud is available in the toolkit.

•

The stud acts as a guide to locate the wheel. This practice simplifies alignment, it also reduces the load/efforts while fitment.

•

Once the tyre is positioned, assemble the remaining bolts, leaving the stud hole empty. Hand-tighten all the bolts without using a spanner.

•

As the final step, remove the stud, replace it with a bolt, and securely tighten all bolts.

•

In the jacked up condition, do not torque tighten the wheel bolts.

•

Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts, but loosen them by one or two turns.

Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while loosening/tightening the wheel bolts.

Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts, but loosen them by one or two turns.

Do not lift alloy rims with aero bezels during handling. Lifting by the bezels may cause damage to the aero components and compromise the integrity of the wheel.

Never use oil or grease on the bolts. Doing so may lead to over tightening of the bolts, wheel spanner slip, damage the bolts and also may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before installing.

Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.

When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to 140 Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.

If you have rotated, repaired, changed your tyres or changed the wheel rims, check the wheel bolts are still tight after driving about 1 000 km (Torque 140 Nm).

Put the wheel cap (if equipped) into position aligning the nozzle on the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover. Tap it firmly on the sides with your hand to snap it into place.

Check the air pressure of the replaced tyre. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and instal it as soon as possible.

13.4.8 Restore the Tools, Jack and Flat Tyre Securely

Mount the flat tyre to the luggage compartment using the vinyl cover and straps as shown in the image.

Restore the tools and jack back to their respective locations.

Wheel balancing is recommended after tyre puncture rework.

14 Maintenance

14.1 General Owner's Information

Your vehicle is designed for minimal maintenance with extended service intervals, saving you time and money. However, regular maintenance and daily care remain essential to ensure smooth, safe, and economical operation. It is the owner's responsibility to ensure all specified maintenance, including general service is completed. The new vehicle limited warranty requires proper maintenance and care must be ensured. Refer ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for complete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Mahindra technicians are highly trained specialists who stay updated with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and Authorized Mahindra Service Center training programs. They gain expertise on Mahindra vehicles through extensive training before servicing your vehicle, ensuring professional care and precision.

You can trust that Authorized Mahindra Service Center who are dedicated to meet your vehicle's maintenance needs with reliability, efficiency, and cost-effectiveness. Any servicing, maintenance, or repairs related to the high-voltage battery, motor, or electrical components must be conducted exclusively at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Unauthorized repairs or service by non-Mahindra technicians will void the vehicle’s warranty.

Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance: Routine maintenance is key to ensure the vehicle delivers the performance, reliability, longevity, and resale value user expects. That’s why this Maintenance Section is created, to guide you on the necessary services and their recommended intervals. By keeping your vehicle in top condition, you can avoid major repairs and expenses down the road.

Here are a few tips to help you get started with routine maintenance:

•

Familiarize Yourself: Take time to read your Owner's Manual to understand your vehicle better.

•

Review the Maintenance Section: Go through this section to learn about the required services and schedules.

•

Keep Records: Use this manual to log scheduled maintenance in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’.

•

Consult Experts: Rely on your Authorized Mahindra Service Center for all your vehicle’s maintenance and service needs.

Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle

Prepare for the Appointment: If users need to avail warranty work, ensure to have the necessary documents. Keep in mind that not all services may be covered under the warranty. Discuss any additional charges with the service manager beforehand. It’s also a good idea to maintain a log of the vehicle’s service history for future reference.

Prepare a List: Prepare a written list of problems with your vehicle or specific work to avail. If the vehicle has been involved in an accident or has had work done that isn’t recorded in your maintenance log, inform the Service Advisor or Relationship Manager about it.

Be Reasonable with Requests: If the service list includes several items and user needs the vehicle back by the end of the day, discuss priorities with the Service Advisor or Relationship Manager. Organize the list by importance to ensure the most critical issues are addressed first.

Need Assistance? : It is recommended to first discuss any concerns with the Service Manager at your Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Most issues can be resolved through this process. If you are still not satisfied, escalate the matter to the General Manager or the Authorized Mahindra Service Center Owner.

If an Authorized Mahindra Service Center is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They would need the following information:

Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and office), Mahindra Authorized Service Center Name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Vehicle Delivery Date, Vehicle run kms and mileage.

Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information provided in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ to understand the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties for your vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants, and accessories are available at any Authorized Mahindra Service Center, and they will help ensure your vehicle continues to perform at its best.

Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is essential for not only keeping your vehicle performance as intended but also for protecting your warranty. Failure to follow the scheduled maintenance outlined in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ may void warranty coverage for parts affected by insufficient upkeep. It is crucial to keep detailed records of all maintenance performed. Please note that damage or failures resulting from neglect or improper maintenance are not covered under warranty.

Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’.

Keeping a record of your vehicle’s maintenance is essential. To make this easier, scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Each time your vehicle undergoes scheduled maintenance, present this booklet to have the work certified. Be sure to record the service date and mileage at the time of service. This simplifies record-keeping and ensures that, if your vehicle requires warranty coverage, you have the necessary documentation to demonstrate proper maintenance.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Mahindra Authorized Service Center. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Contaminated brake fluid can severely compromise braking performance, leading to increased stopping distances or brake failure. If the brake fluid appears cloudy, contains particles, or has an unusual odor, do not drive the vehicle. Have the brake system inspected and serviced by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not necessary for factory-recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra advises against using such products unless they are specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.

Your vehicle is a highly sophisticated machine equipped with complex performance systems, each designed to meet specific manufacturer specifications and features. For accurate diagnosis and proper repairs, it’s essential to rely on your Authorized Mahindra Service Center, who is trained to handle your vehicle's unique requirements. All software updates must be conducted using Mahindra-authorized updates only. Installation of third-party software or unauthorized modifications to the vehicle’s control units may cause malfunctions and will void the warranty.

When planning your maintenance services, consider your Mahindra Authorized Service Center for all your vehicle's needs.

Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits: Servicing your vehicle at an Authorized Mahindra Service Center offers numerous benefits, ensuring quality maintenance and adding value to your vehicle. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to have your vehicle serviced exclusively at an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Maintenance Interval: Mahindra's recommended maintenance intervals are based on thorough engineering tests to determine the optimal mileage for performing various services, ensuring your vehicle's protection at the lowest overall cost. It is strongly advised not to deviate from the maintenance schedules outlined in this Maintenance Schedule.

Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions

•

Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting.

•

Engage the parking brake.

•

Block the wheels to prevent unexpected vehicle movement.

•

Turn OFF the ignition and keep the key fob away from the vehicle.

•

Stay clear of hot vehicle parts.

•

Avoid repeated contact with fluids.

•

Prevent coolant and other fluids from spilling onto electrical or hot vehicle parts.

•

Keep open flames and burning material, such as cigarettes away from the battery and all electrical components.

14.2 Motor Compartment

A	Electric Power Train Cooling Degassing Tank*	B	Brake Fluid Reservoir	C	High Voltage Battery Cooling System Degassing Tank*
D	Auxiliary / Low voltage (LV) Battery (12V)*	E	Motor Compartment Fuse Box*	F	Windshield Washer Filler Neck
G	Frunk		* - Frunk to be removed for accessing

14.3 General Maintenance

The following general maintenance items should be checked frequently. Additionally, if you notice any unusual noises, fluid leaks, odors, or vibrations, it is essential to investigate the cause or take your vehicle to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center or a qualified service center immediately.

In the Motor Compartment

•

Front windshield washer fluid level.

•

Auxiliary / LV Battery condition.

•

Brake fluid level.

•

Fluid leaks.

•

Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities.

•

Wiring Harness.

Inside the Vehicle

•

Lights.

•

Warning lamps.

•

Windshield wiper and wash.

•

Steering wheel.

•

Seats / seat belts.

•

Accelerator / brake pedal.

•

Brakes.

•

Parking brake.

•

Gear lever shift functionality.

Outside the Vehicle

•

Lamps.

•

Fluid leaks.

•

Doors and hood latches.

•

Tyre inflation pressure.

•

Tyre surface / thread and wheel bolts.

14.4 In the Motor Compartment

Fluid Leaks: Inspect the motor compartment and the underbody of your vehicle for any leaks. If you detect a leak, have the cause identified and corrected immediately.

For any inspections to be carried out in motor compartment, frunk and its accessories has to be removed.

Follow the below procedure for removal of the frunk from vehicle.

14.4.1 Frunk Removal

Pull and lift the beauty cover from the snap locks by hand.

Using the star screw driver, remove the screws from the front trim and remove it. Star screw driver is available in the tool kit.

Using 10 mm socket spanner, remove the bolts from the frunk.

Lift the frunk and disconnect the electrical connector from frunk light.

Take out the frunk from the vehicle.

14.4.2 Checking/Topping Coolant Level

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

The coolant level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marking provided on the degassing tank.

If the coolant level is below the “MIN” mark, immediately contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

Refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for coolant capacity and grade.

Draining of electric power train, HVAC and HV battery pack coolant should always be done by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If the coolant level is found below MIN mark in EPT/ Battery or HVAC degassing tank, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Never top-up the coolant.

Never open any of the degassing tank pressure cap. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe burns by the erupting liquid.

14.4.3 Checking/Topping Brake Fluid

The brake fluid level will gradually decrease as the brake components wear and will rise when the components are replaced.

As long as the fluid level is between the "MIN" and "MAX" lines, it is within the normal operating range, and there is no need to add fluid.

If the fluid levels are below the "MIN" mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised. In this case, Top-up the recommended brake fluid till the ‘Max’ mark or contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately for assistance.

To check the brake fluid level, remove the beauty cover on the left-hand side.

Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before removing it to ensure no debris falls into the reservoir. Avoid keeping the reservoir open for longer than necessary when adding brake fluid.

Use only brake fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.

Refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Brake Fluid capacity and grade.

Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

14.4.4 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up

Top-up the windshield washer reservoir as and when required. Refer the above image for the windshield washer cap location.

In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.

If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

14.5 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle

Lights: Ensure that all lights, including the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights, are functioning properly. Additionally, check the alignment of the headlights.

Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps that appear in the Driver information Display (DID). Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.

Seats: Check that all seat controls, such as seat adjusters and seat back recliners, operate smoothly. Ensure that all latches lock securely in any position. Also, verify that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.

Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system, including buckles, retractors, and anchors, operates properly and smoothly. Ensure that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn, or damaged.

Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedals for smooth operation, ensuring there is no uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Also, inspect the footwell and remove any obstructions that may interfere with pedal movement.

Brake Pedal: Check the pedals for smooth operation and ensure proper clearance. Also, inspect the footwell and remove any obstructions if present.

14.6 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle

The following checks should be carried out periodically, unless otherwise specified.

Lamps: Check and ensure the proper functioning of all exterior lamps.

Fluid Leaks: Check the motor compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you notice any leak, have the cause identified and corrected immediately.

Doors and Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate and hood for proper functioning.

Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week to ensure it is within the recommended range.

14.7 LV Battery

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

Your vehicle is equipped with a genuine Mahindra auxiliary battery. To ensure long-lasting and trouble-free performance, keep the battery top clean and dry, and always ensure the cables are securely fastened to the terminals.

If you notice corrosion on the battery or terminals, disconnect the cables and clean the terminals using a wire brush. To prevent future corrosion, apply a thin layer of petroleum jelly to the terminals. Ensure the terminals and hold-down clamp nuts are tightened just enough to keep the battery securely in place, as over-tightening can damage the terminals.

For Best Battery Service

•

Keep the battery securely mounted.

•

Keep the battery top clean and dry.

•

Keep terminals and connections clean, tight, and protected with petroleum jelly or terminal grease to prevent corrosion and ensure reliable performance.

•

Immediately rinse any spilled electrolyte with a solution of water and baking soda to neutralize acid and prevent damage.

Do not disconnect the auxiliary battery terminals in the drive enable condition. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.

While removing the auxiliary battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first and while installing the battery, ensure the negative terminal is connected last.

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.

The auxiliary battery system contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not attempt to open, disassemble, or modify high-voltage components, including cables and connectors. Any attempt to tamper with the system may cause electric shock, fire, or severe injury. If you suspect a battery issue, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling batteries.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.

The company shall not be liable/responsible for any damages/ injuries, including consequential damages/ injuries, resulting due to fitment of non OEM approved batteries.

Checking the Electrolyte Level: Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity every three months. Inspect all six cells, and if the level is below the lower marker, add distilled water up to the upper marker.

Adding distilled water:

•

Remove the vent plugs.

•

Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and secure the plugs properly.

14.8 Windshield Wiper Blades and Jets

14.8.1 Changing the Wiper Blade

Switch off the ignition and lift wiper switch upwards within 3 seconds of switching ignition off.

Wiper will go to service position (at out-wipe/a-pillar).

From service position, wipers blades can be lifted off from the windshield.

Press the lock with finger slide and remove the wiper blade from the arm.

Refit the wiper blade as shown the image.

Wiper Arm and Blade Refitting Procedure

Install the wiper arm inside the wiper blade.

Pull from the wiper arm, holding the wiper blade to get wiper arm engage in wiper blade locking.

Close the clip.

Return the wiper arm on the windshield.

Don’ts

•

While wiper assembly loading on vehicle hold one hand with arm head and other with retainer.

•

Never lift the Wiper Assembly in parking condition, otherwise hood paint peel off /hood & wiper may get damaged.

•

Don’t use harsh detergent, oil etc. to clean the windshield wiper blade.

•

Avoid excessive dry run of the wiper.

•

Don’t apply unnecessary force, jerks etc. to check fitment or position.

Do’s

•

Switch on the ignition and one wipe operation from combination switch for going wiper motor to depressed park position.

•

Wiper Arm & Blade Assembly Installation will be done in depressed park condition by ensuring parking position(i.e. 3 dots marks on windshield glass (wiper motor power on condition).

•

Check wiping operation

To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.

14.8.2 Windshield Washer Jet

There are two nozzles washer jets in the hood inner panel.

Check the washer jet to ensure proper operation

14.8.3 Do it Yourself Maintenance

Learn how to perform simple Do It Yourself procedures, such as replacing wiper blades and cabin filters, or installing the paint protection film kit.

Note: Due to market region or vehicle configuration specifics, some parts and procedures may not be available for your vehicle. When navigating to, select your region and language to see an updated list of parts and accessories available for your region.

Perform each procedure in a dry and well-lit area. For your safety, only perform a procedure if you feel comfortable doing so, and always follow provided instructions.

14.9 Appearance Care and Protection

14.9.1 Washing the Exterior

•

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap.

•

Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.

•

Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight.

•

Always use a clean sponge or vehicle wash mitt with plenty of water for best results.

•

Dry the vehicle with a chamois cloth or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting.

•

It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle.

•

Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time.

14.9.2 Vehicle Wash

Water washing in the High volt motor compartment and underbody is not recommended. High pressure or low pressure water washing may cause the failure of HV and LV electrical circuits located in the motor compartment. There is a risk that the high pressure water can enter the HV battery pack from the joint and cause concern.

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

14.9.3 Exterior Chrome

•

Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.

•

Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your Mahindra Authorized Service Center. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.

•

Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface.

•

After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Mahindra Authorized Service Center, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects.

14.9.4 General

•

Do not wipe the painted surface with a dry cloth/ dirty cloth.

•

Ensure all cameras and sensors are free from obstruction before, during, and after vehicle washing.

14.9.5 Waxing your vehicle

•

Wax the high gloss painted surface of your vehicle once or twice a year.

•

We recommend that you only use an approved quality wax that does not contain abrasives.

•

For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact a Mahindra authorized dealer.

•

When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.

•

Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss black coloured parts, they discolour over time.

14.9.6 Polishing

•

Polishing should be performed only when the vehicle’s paint appears dull and adequate gloss cannot be restored using waxing materials.

•

If the polishing agent used does not contain preservative components, ensure the vehicle is waxed afterward to protect the paint surface.

•

Do not apply polishing agents or hard wax on unpainted parts or plastic components.

14.9.7 EV

•

Make sure the charging port door is closed prior to washing the vehicle.

•

Do not spray high pressure water towards the charge port as it may result in damage to the vehicle or related charging equipment.

14.9.8 Do’s and Dont’s

•

Vehicle should be washed using a car shampoo that has a mild neutral (Zero) pH with a clean sponge or microfiber cloth to avoid scratching the vehicle’s surface.

•

Do not use detergent or hard shampoos when washing the vehicle, as they can damage the paint finish. Instead, only use a mild, neutral pH car shampoo

•

External contaminants such as bird droppings, adhesives, insects, and tree sap should be removed promptly and gently from the painted surface before pre-washing. Avoid applying excessive pressure to prevent damage to the paint.

•

Dry dust should not be wiped off, it may lead to permanent scratch marks, which are especially noticeable on matte colours compared to glossy colours.

•

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash the vehicle with only water to remove excess dirt before proceeding with a full wash.

•

Avoid using automatic car washers with high-pressure brushes, as they can damage the vehicle's surface. It's advisable to use automatic car washers without high-pressure brushes for a gentler cleaning process.

•

Do not apply paint protectors such as wax polish, ceramic coating, or any other surface treatments on matte painted surfaces, as they can cause permanent damage to the paint film.

•

Avoid using paper towels, dirty, or rough cloths to clean or wipe the car, as they can cause scratches. It’s recommended to use only microfiber cloths or sponges for a safe and effective clean.

•

It's recommended not to apply anything to the painted surface, such as stickers, foils, magnetic labels, or masking tapes, as they can cause adhesive transfer, potentially leaving permanent stains.

•

It is advisable to protect vehicle from Greasy, Oily products which may leave stains on paint film, difficult to remove.

•

Recommended to visit an Authorized Mahindra workshops for any paint related repairs.

14.9.9 Paint Chips

•

Mahindra Authorized Service Centers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color.

•

Take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorized Service Center for paint touch-up or paint repairs.

•

Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.

•

Always read the instructions before using the products.

14.9.10 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Caps (If Equipped)

Alloy wheels and wheel caps are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:

•

Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at your Mahindra Authorized Service Center. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.

•

Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers.

•

Do not use hydro fluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents.

14.9.11 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available with your Mahindra Authorized Service Center. You can use these cleaners:

For routine cleaning of plastic parts.

For tar or grease spots.

For plastic head lamp lenses.

14.9.12 Windows and Wiper Blades

The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial vehicle washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield.

To clean these items, follow the below tips:

•

The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at your Mahindra Authorized Service Center.

•

The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Mahindra Authorized Service Center. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.

•

Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.

•

Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts.

If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.

Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid lines (if equipped).

14.9.13 Interior Maintenance

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:

•

Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

•

Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner.

•

If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover.

•

Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame- retardant abilities of the seat materials.

•

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

14.9.14 Display Maintenance & Cleaning

Display Maintenance (DID/CID):

Display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.

Abuse loads should not be applied to the top or sides of the display for holding or any other purpose.

Cleaning the display area:

•

It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.

•

Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.

•

Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.

•

Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.

•

Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.

•

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

•

The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, vehicle keys etc.

•

When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.

•

Display surface is not so strong for chemical agent. Glass cleaner including alkali or acid, sunscreen must not be used. Alcoholic thinner, petrol, abrading agent must not be used. This may cause discoloration or strain.

•

Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.

Display care: Your has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.

Continued usage of display with dust or dirt can create micro-scratches do not wipe dust or dirt with dry rough cloth or by hand.

14.9.15 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim

Use only soft micro fiber, dry cloth to clean Instrument Panel/Interior Trim.

Clean the instrument panel/Interior trim areas with neutral PH soap and water using soft micro fiber / cotton cloth / sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the glass of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

•

Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument pane and interior trim.

If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

•

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth.

•

Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly.

•

Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minutes.

•

Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.

•

Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth.

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.

14.9.16 Leather Seats (If Equipped)

Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather:

•

To clean, use a soft micro fiber / cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth.

•

To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from an Mahindra Authorized Service Center.

•

Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating.

In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing meets leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.

14.9.17 Air Conditioning System Maintenance

Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as refrigerant recharging should be done by a qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.

Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.

Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.

14.9.18 Vehicle Storage

If the resting period is greater than 30 days, disconnect the negative terminal of the low voltage battery. This reduces the loss of charge for both low voltage and high voltage batteries. For battery cable disconnect frunk need to be removed.

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place. Avoid parking or storing the vehicle in extremely hot or freezing conditions for extended periods, as this can lead to battery degradation. High-voltage components are sensitive to extreme environmental conditions.

When your vehicle is idle and unplugged, it uses energy from the battery to recharge the low voltage battery as needed.

Avoid parking for extended periods in unsuitable environments, such as areas with high heat reflection, to prevent vehicle damage caused by overheating.

14.10 Service Reminder Alert

The service reminder alert is to notify the driver/user when the next scheduled service is approaching. This alert is displayed on the CID and become active when the ignition is turned ON.

It will start showing up 400 kilometers before the service is due, providing a timely reminder to ensure the vehicle is serviced on schedule.

Alert will be reset by Mahindra Authorized Service Service Center after completion of every service (or)

Follow the below procedure to reset the service reminder alert by user.

Navigate to alert history page in CID Home screen.

Ensure Service reminder alert is visible in the CID notification center.

Press and hold OK button in the steering wheel switch, Turn ignition OFF and turn ON, Release OK button <= 5 seconds after ignition ON.

Check and ensure service reminder alert is not visible in the CID home screen Notification Center.

14.11 Wheels and Tyres

14.11.1 Tyre Information

RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE

“TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”

TYRE SIZE

MAX. LOAD LIMIT

TREAD WEAR

14.11.2 Tyre Rating

Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Mahindra Authorized Service Center directly, or the tyre manufacturer.

The tyre rating of is:

•

245/55 R19 and 245/50 R20 XL

•

Temporary Spare Tyre: T135/80 R18

Tyre rating is explained as below:

Tyre size (Example: 245/55 R19 103 V)

Callout (A): 245 (Three-digit number): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.

Callout (B): 55 (Two-digit number): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.

Callout (C): R: This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.

Callout (D): 19 (Two-digit number): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Callout (E) : 103 (Two or three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.

Callout (F): V: Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.

14.11.3 Speed Rating

SPEED SYMBOL	MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY	SPEED SYMBOL	MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
SPEED SYMBOL	KM/HR	SPEED SYMBOL	KM/HR
L	120	T	190
M	130	U	200
N	140	H	210
P	150	V	240
Q	160	W	270
R	170	Y	300
S	180	Z	240+

14.11.4 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)

Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front & rear tyres.

•

Using the recommended tire size ensures optimal performance and longevity of your vehicle's components.

•

Sidewall sticker on “FORMULA – e” tyres is incorporated to get an authentic “race-tyre” look and it is purely for the purpose of aesthetic appeal. Sticker wear in the form of colour change, fading, wrinkles, peel off or other damages etc due to road and other environmental condition is completely normal & it does not impact tyre grip, durability, or tyre / vehicle performance.

Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

14.11.5 Tyre Pressure

Proper tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper Tyre pressure:

•

Safety

•

Economy

•

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Overinflating produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tyre replacement. Under-inflation also increases tyre rolling resistance and results in lower range.

The proper cold tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.

14.11.6 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure

The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check Tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial Tyres may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. At the same time, each tyre should be inspected for signs of tyre wear or visible damage.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tyre inflation pressures. Cold tyre inflation pressure is defined as the tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. Check tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tyre pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

When it was new, the spare tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare tyre air pressure frequently.

14.11.7 Inflating Your Tyres

Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a tyre can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.

At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each tyre and check the tyre pressure with a tyre gauge (including spare tyre). Inflate all tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.

Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures and may result in severe tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout,” with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tyre. It also may result in unnecessary tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.

Always inflate your tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tyre. The recommended tyre inflation pressure is found on the tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.

After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.

14.11.8 Radial Ply Tyres

Combining radial ply tyres with other types of tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tyres.

Cuts and punctures in radial tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your Mahindra Authorized Service Center for radial tyre repairs.

14.11.9 Asymmetrical Tyres

Asymmetrical tyres are designed with different tread patterns on the inner and outer edges to optimize performance. The outer section is often stiffer, providing better grip during cornering, while the inner section helps with water dispersion and stability.

Ensure the sidewall labeled "Outside" faces outward when the tyre is mounted. This is crucial for proper performance. Incorrect positioning can compromise tyre performance and safety, so always double-check.

14.11.10 Foam Tyres

Foam-filled tires, helps significantly reduce the cabin noise by absorbing vibrations and road sounds. This technology, particularly beneficial for electric vehicles (EVs), enhances the overall driving experience by creating a quieter and more comfortable ride. As EVs are naturally quieter than traditional vehicles, foam tires further minimize tire noise, offering a smoother, more serene journey.

Follow the below procedure to repair the punctured foam tyre (Less than 4mm)

1. Removing Nail from tyre

•

Locate and Mark the area from outside where the injury found.

•

Remove the nail using an appropriate tool.

•

Remove the Debris from tyre tread using suitable tool such us pair of pliers.

•

Apply lubricant to the spiral shaft of the reamer tool. This will help to probe the hold and temporarily separate the steel belts without damage.

2. Cleaning the punctured hole

•

Insert the reamer into thepuncture hole and push in rotating the handle to clean the hole.

•

Reinflate tyre to help with insertion of cord.

•

Thread the Repair cord through the eye of the insertion tool until equal parts are either side of the tool. Lubricant may be added to the tip to make insertion easier.

3. Thread insertion in punctured hole

•

Firmly push the insertion tool and cord into the tyre until the sleeve is fully home against the tyre.A small amount of the card should still be visible.

•

Reinflate the tyre to check the leakage.

•

Check the repair regularly.

Follow the below procedure to repair the punctured foam tyre (More than 4mm)

1. Removing Nail from tyre

•

Dismantle the tyre and wheel assembly.

•

Locate and Mark the area from outside and inside where the injury found.

•

Remove the nail using an appropriate tool.

2. Removing Foam from Damaged location

•

Identity the damage area precisely in the foam and mark a 10X10 cm square in the foam.

•

Distance can be changed according to severity of damage or tool which is using. Try to minimize the cutting area of foam.

•

Cut the Foam in the Marked area with knife.

Tyre inner liner should not get damaged.

3. Tyre Inside (removed Foam)

•

Remove the cut foam and prepare the puncture hole by Pneumatic drilling using steel cutter with appropriate grid rating. This will remove contaminations in puncture hole and also provide better adhesion to mushroom patch.

4. Inner Liner marking

•

Measure the size of damage and select appropriate patch (preferably Mushroom Patch for Nails) & Mark the damage on inner liner according to patch size.

5. Buffing Damaged Area

•

Buff the area for good texture for better adhesion using spherical buffing tool. Recommended texture standard – RMA 1 or 2.

6. Application of Vulcanizers

•

Clean the Area and coat the buffed area with a chemical vulcanizing solution with a clean brush. Apply it evenly and completely.

•

Allow it to dry (Recommended time 5 minutes).

7. Mushroom Patch

•

Mean time take the selected patch of Mushroom and remove the film without touching the surface Apply the vulcanizing solution to the patch stem and bottom side also. Allow it to dry (recommended time 5 minutes).

•

Insert the stem head from inside.

8. Inserting Mushroom Patch

•

Insert the stem head from inside and push gently until the head appear in the other side.

9. Pulling the stem

•

Once it is outside pull the head with a nose player smoothly that the stem bottom is sticking firmly inside tyre.

10. Stitching Mushroom patch

•

Stitch the bottom of the patch from center to sidewise using a hand stitcher.

11. Finishing

•

Cut the excess stem in level of tyre surface using knife without pulling it or stretching it.

Checking Point: Mount the repaired tire on Rim, inflate and check repaired portion for leak from outside using Soap solution After puncture repair or new tyre replacement, TPMS configuration to be done.

14.11.11 Tread Wear Assessment

Tyre wear can be assessed by looking the tyre wear indicator (TWI). The TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread when the tyre wears out to the minimum allowed tread depth of 1.6 mm.

Tyre Wear Indicator (TWI)

A mark of triangle in the Tyre side wall indicates the position of the Tyre wear indicators at 6 to 9 locations around the circumference of the tyre.

The TWI appear as raised portions inside the tread in a new or partially worn tyre (A).

As the tyre wears out to its minimum allowable tread depth, the TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread (B).

The tyre should be replaced at this stage or before this stage.

New Tread (A)	Worn Tread (B)

It is extremely dangerous to drive with worn out tyres on wet roads/rainy seasons. The vehicle can skid and aquaplane on wet surfaces, if the tyre tread depth is insufficient.

Replace the tyre before the tyre tread depth reached the minimum acceptable limit.

14.11.12 Life of Tyre

The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to:

•

Driving style

•

Tyre pressure

•

Distance driven

Tyres and the spare tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden and unexpected Tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.

Keep dismounted tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not use a tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the tyre placard. Combinations of unapproved tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle or the tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

Replacing original tyres with tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

14.11.13 Snow Chains

Snow chains cannot be used on these tyres.

In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter Tyres with the same specifications for better stability, safety and performance.

14.11.14 Low Profile Tyre

Low‑profile tyres are designed with a reduced sidewall height in proportion to their tread width, reflected by a low aspect ratio tyre for enhancing steering accuracy, lateral stability, and overall handling performance.

Driving Precautions:

•

When driving on roads with curb stones, reduce speed and maintain an appropriate angle. Avoid running over objects with sharp or elevated edges, as it may seriously damage tyre side wall.

•

Reduce your speed when driving over speed bumps, manhole covers, or potholes as they may cause severe tire damage.

14.11.15 Tyre Rotation Recommendations

Applicable for 4 Alloy/Steel wheels :It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type Tyres.

Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

It is not recommended to use the temporary spare tyre for routine tyre rotation.

14.11.16 Temporary Spare Wheel

Regular Tyre	Temporary Tyre

The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running. Extended use or high-speed driving with the temporary wheel may compromise vehicle stability and increase the risk if tyre failure.

When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel

•

Temporary Spare Wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle.

•

Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel.

•

While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden braking.

When Temporary Spare Wheel is fitted in the vehicle

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

ABS, Cruise control (If equipped) EPS, Rear View monitor system (If equipped), Navigation system (if equipped)

Speed Limit when using Temporary Spare tyre

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.

The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

•

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the Temporary Spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

•

Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel.

•

Do not fit tyre chains to the Temporary spare tyre.
Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

•

Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre.

•

Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre.

•

The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair and refit the regular tyre as soon as possible.

•

Recommended to drive Max 50 kms in a stretch or reach nearest Mahindra Authorized Service Center

14.11.17 Changing a Flat Tyre

Refer “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergency Situations chapter for more details.

14.11.18 Wheel Tightness

When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel bolts are damaged, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorized Service Center.

Always tighten the bolts in a crisscross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel bolts.

Never overtighten the bolts on the wheel. You could damage the bolt.

Torque tighten the wheel bolts to the specified value at the nearest Mahindra Authorized Service Center.

Do not use a nut runner to tighten the wheel bolt.

The tyres and wheel rims fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.

14.12 Fuses & Relays

A fuse is the most common electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating of the fuse, it blows off.

The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one.

You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller should be used to remove the fuse from its position.

Before handling any fuses, always switch off the ignition, lights, and all electrical equipment to prevent the risk of electrical shock or short circuits.

Never replace a fuse with one of a different rating, as this may cause electrical damage or create a fire hazard.

Fuse replacements or electrical repairs should only be performed by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center or a qualified workshop. Improper handling may result in serious damage to the vehicle’s electrical system.

Fuse puller is available at the motor compartment fuse box.

14.12.1 Motor Compartment Fuse Box

Motor compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle LV battery.

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

To open the fuse box cover, press the lock and push the cover back and lift it.

Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown fuse.

Fuses
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating
F1	Blank	_
F2	Ip Batt 1	60A
F3	Blank	_
F4	Vcu Main Relay	30A
F5	Abs Epb motor	40A
F6	Ip Batt 2	60A
F7	Ip Batt 3	60A
F8	Ieb Ecu & Solenoid	40A
F9	Blank	_
F10	Front Blower	40A
F11	Blank	_
F12	Ip Batt 4	60A
F13	Front Wiper	20A
F14*	Adas 5r1v Apas	10A
F15	Horn Batt	20A
F16	Bms Batt	10A
F17	Blank	_
F18	Vcu Permbatt	10A
F19	Blank	_
F20	Hl Batt Saver	30A
F21	Blank	_
F22	Blank	_
F23	Lv Compressor	5A
F24	Blank	_
F25*	Rear Wiper	15A
F26	Solenoid Valve Front	5A
F27	Blank	_
F28	Lv Bms Sensor Batt (Ibs)	5A
F29	Ocdc Batt & Mcu	10A
F30	Blank	_
F31	Batt Heater & Charge Port Lamp Chiller & Solenoid Valve Coil	10A
F32	Hl Ign	5A
F33	Bms, Mcu, Eps Cooling Fan (Ign)	5A
F34	Esp-Epb(Ign)	5A
F35	Vcu Wake Up (Ign)	5A
F36	Ept Cooling Pump	20A
F37	4 Way Coolant Valve, 3 Way Coolant Valve & Ags	10A
F38*	V2l	5A
F39	Battery Cooling Pump	20A
F40	Brake Sw	10A
F41	Head Lamp Lh/ Signature Lamp/ Carpet Lamp Lh	20A
F42	Vcu Batt (Main O/P)	30A
F43	Head Lamp Rh/Carpet Lamp Rh	20A
F44	Eps Motor	125A
F45	Radiator Fan	80A
F46	Blank	_
* - If equipped

Relays
Relay No.	Relay Type	Application Detail
R1	12V 20A MICRO RLY 4P	Front Solenoid Valve Relay
R2	12V 35A MICRO RLY 4P	Batt Saver Relay
R3	12V 20A MICRO RLY 4P	Horn Relay
R4*	12V 20A MICRO RLY 5P	Rear Wiper Relay
R5	12V 40A MINI RLY 4P	Vcu Main Relay
* - If Equipped

14.12.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening Procedure

Wide open the driver door and slide the driver seat backwards. This fuse box as located below the Instrument Panel on the driver side.

Follow the below procedure to access the IP fuse box.

•

Partially detach the front RHS side door static panel seal.

•

Pull & remove the IP RH side cover.

•

Using a star screw driver, loosen and remove the IP driver lower trim bottom mounting star screws.

•

Partially detach the IP driver lower trim assembly.

•

Remove all the electrical connectors from IP driver lower trim and outward the panel to access the Instrument Panel fuse box.

FUSE NO.	Circuit	FUSE RATING
F1	Spare	20A
F2	Rear Power Window Mid Zonal Ecu Bat 2 & 3 (Batt Saver)	30A
F3	Power Window Rh (Batt Saver)	30A
F4	Spare	15A
F5	Tail Lamp Bso Lh, Tso (Batt Saver)	15A
F6	Power Window Lh (Batt Saver)	30A
F7	Front Wlc, Rear Wlc, Power Seat Vent, Batt Saver Ec (Batt Saver)	10A
F8	Spare	5A
F9	Tail Lamp Bso Rh (Batt Saver)	5A
F10	Ambient Light, Mars Roof (Batt Saver)	15A
F11	Roof Lamp (Batt Saver)	5A
F12	Spare	10A
F13	Spare	10A
F14	Hpc-C, Cid, Did, Pid (B+)	20A
F15	Mid Zonal Batt 1 (B+)	25A
F16	Front Zonal Batt 1 (B+)	25A
F17	Lv-Msd (B+)	10A
F18	Airbag (B+)	10A
F19	Kick Sensor (B+), Sbw & Icc (B+)	10A
F20	Spare	5A
F21	Hpc-C, Hvac (Ign 1)	5A
F22	Gateway Controller, Driver Side Switch, Ign Relay 1 F/B (Ign 1)	5A
F23	Front Zonal Batt 3 (B+)	20A
F24	Front Zonal Batt 2 (B+)	30A
F25	Gateway Controller (B+)	5A
F26	Spare	7.5A
F27	Steering Wheel Switch, Cfs Lin Sw (B+)	10A
F28	Obd 16p, Power Seat Sw, Nfc, Pwr Win Lin, Hvac (B+)	7.5A
F29	Adas 5r1v & 1r1v, Rls (B+)	5A
F30	Rear Blower(B+) (Not Applicable)	10A
F31	Accessory	15A
F32	Spare	20A
F33	Spare	10A
F34	Hud & Escl(B+)	7.5A
F35	Ec Ign (Vcu, Bms, Mcu, Abs, Hl, Ieb, Cooling Fan) (Ign 1)	10A
F36	Airbag (Ign 1)	5A
F37	Rvc (Ign 1)	5A
F38	Spare	5A
F39	Sbw & Epb Sw (Ign 1)	5A
F40	Spare	7.5A
F41	Spare	5A
F42	Mid Zonal, Icc, Cfs Lin (Ign 1)	5A
F43	Rear Fog (Export) (Ign 1)	10A
F44	Hud, Apas, Front Wlc, Rear Wlc, Adas 5r1v, 1r1v (Ign 2)	7.5A
F45	Spare	25A
F46	Front, Rear Power Usb (Ign 2)	20A
F47	Spare	15A
F48	Power Win Lin & Pwr Window Sub Sw (Batt Saver)	5A
F49	Ign Relay 2 F/B (Ign 2)	5A
F50	Spare	5A
F51	Front Zonal Batt 4 (B+)	25A
F52	Spare	30A
F53	Mid Zonal Batt 4 (B+)	15A
F54	Amplifier (B+)	30A
*– Based on Applicability